Mitsubishi Lancer Evolution Owner's Manual

BK0210800US.
book 1 ページ２０１４年４月８日　火曜日　午前１１時２８分
Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

appear.
N09200102101
These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI LANCER EVOLUTION. instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-
cle.
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the LANCER EVOLUTION. The Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
Owner’s Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist instructions are not followed.
in the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all LANCER EVOLUTION You will see another important symbol:
models and explains all features including options. Some features NOTE Gives helpful information.
explained in this manual may not be installed on your vehicle.
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. WARNING
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-  Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
tained here. nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.
©2014 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan

BK0210800US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月８日　火曜日　午前１１時２８分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)
1 Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

N00100202515
Instrument cluster P.5-89 Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

(if so equipped) P.5-66
Multi-information meter switch P.5-92
Combination headlights and
dimmer switch P.5-124
Turn signal lever P.5-129
Front fog light switch P.5-130
Wiper and washer switch
P.5-131
Active stability control
OFF switch P.5-77
Cruise control switches
Headlights leveling switch (if so P.5-80
equipped) P.5-129
Fuses P.9-23 Ignition switch P.5-15, 5-22, 5-50
Engine hood release lever P.9-3 Supplemental restraint system - air-

bag (for driver’s seat)
P.4-20, 4-26
Horn switch P.5-136
Steering wheel tilt lock lever P.5-47
Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag

P.4-27
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface P.5-136
Steering wheel audio remote control switches
Refer to the separated owner’s manual
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls (Instrument panel)
Instruments and controls (Instrument panel) 1

N00100202528
Gearshift lever P.5-56, 5-58

Vents P.7-2 Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front passenger’s
seat) P.4-20, 4-26
Glove compartment
P.5-163
USB input terminal
P.5-157
Fuel tank filler door

release lever P.3-4
Parking brake lever

Trunk lid release lever P.5-46 AWC switch P.5-72
P.5-37 Twin Clutch SST control mode
Cup holder switch (if so equipped) P.5-63
(for front seats) P.5-165
Floor console box P.5-164 Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

P.4-5
Overview 1-2
Center panel
1 Center panel
N00100701210
Type 1 Type 2
DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)

DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped) Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (if so equipped)
Refer to the separated owner’s manual Refer to the separated owner’s manual
Front passenger seat belt warn- Front passenger seat belt warn-
Hazard warning flasher switch Hazard warning flasher switch
ing light P.4-11 ing light P.4-11
P.5-130 P.5-130
Passenger’s airbag off

Passenger’s airbag off indicator P.4-25
Electric rear Electric rear
indicator P.4-25
window defogger switch window
P.5-135 defogger switch
P.5-135
Air conditioning
Air conditioning P.7-4, 7-9
P.7-4, 7-9
Front console box 12 V power outlet

P.5-164 P.5-160
Front console tray 12 V power outlet
P.5-164 P.5-160
1-3 Overview
Interior
Interior 1
N00100302330
Electric remote-controlled out-

side mirror switch Sunroof switch (if so
Dome light (Front)/Reading lights P.5-161,
Window lock switch P.5-43 P.5-49 equipped) P.5-44
9-30, 9-38
Power door lock switch

Power window switches P.5-35
P.5-42
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface microphone P.5-137
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor Inside rearview mirror P.5-48

(for front seats) P.4-11
Seat belts P.4-8
Sun visors P.5-160

Vanity mirror P.5-160
Card holder P.5-160
Bottle holder P.5-165
Front seats P.4-3
Supplemental restraint system - side airbag

Head restraints P.4-6 (for front seats) P.4-31
Overview 1-4
Interior
1
Supplemental restraint system - curtain airbag P.4-31
Coat hook P.5-166 Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)

P.5-162, 9-30, 9-39
Assist grip
P.5-166
Rear seats P.4-5
Tether anchors for child restraint system Arm rest P.4-5 Cup holder (for rear seat) P.5-165
P.4-16
AWC control fluid reservoir P.9-9
1-5 Overview
Trunk area
Trunk area 1
N00100400249
Inside emergency trunk lid release lever P.5-38

Trunk area light P.9-30, 9-40
Battery P.9-11
Windshield washer fluid reservoir

P.9-10
Spare tire P.8-6 Jack P.8-5 Tools P.8-5
Overview 1-6
Outside (Front)
1 Outside (Front)
N00100602506
Locking and unlocking P.5-33

Sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-44 Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-7
F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter)
(if so equipped) P.5-11
Windshield wiper and washer
P.5-131
Fuel tank filler

Engine hood P.9-3 P.3-4
Engine compartment P.9-5
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-49

Side turn signal lights P.5-129, 9-28
Headlights, high beam P.5-124, 9-28, 9-31

Front turn signal lights P.5-129, 9-28, 9-34
Headlights, low beam P.5-124, 9-28, 9-30
Daytime running lights (if so equipped) P.5-124, 9-28, 9-32 Front fog lights P.5-130, 9-28, 9-35
Front side-marker and parking lights P.5-124, 9-28, 9-33, 9-34
1-7 Overview
Outside (Rear)
Outside (Rear) 1
N00100602434
Antenna P.7-15
High-mounted stop light P.9-28
Tire inflation pressures P.9-16
Changing tires P.8-6
Tire rotation P.9-18
Tire chains P.9-19
Trunk lid P.5-37
Tire pressure monitoring system
P.5-85
Trunk lid OPEN switch (if so

equipped)
P.5-14
Rear side-marker lights

License plate lights
P.5-124, 9-28, 9-36
P.5-124, 9-28, 9-37
Rear turn signal lights P.5-129, 9-28, 9-36
Back-up lights
P.9-28, 9-36 Tail and stop lights P.5-124, 9-28, 9-36
Tail lights P.5-124, 9-28, 9-36
Overview 1-8
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702205
NOTE
 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display” on page 5-90.
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON”.
Warning light Do this Ref. page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your P.5-122
choice for assistance.
Charging system warning light
 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is
fully released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, stop and check the
or brake fluid level. P.5-121
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid
Brake warning light hard braking and high speeds, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have
the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
or repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not driv-
able, contact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehi- P.5-121
Engine malfunction indicator cles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assis-
light”) tance.
Quick index 2-1


Warning light Do this Ref. page
 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning
2 and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
P.5-75,
Test the system as described on page 5-75.
5-75
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recom-
Anti-lock braking system warning light mend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked P.4-12,
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 4-26
SRS warning light

 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the
proper inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-16.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few
minutes of driving.
P.5-86
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains
continuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the sys-
Tire pressure monitoring system warning light tem returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light
does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200901893
Problem Do this Ref. page

Cannot turn the key. When using a key to start the engine
(When using a key to start the Will not turn from “LOCK” to “ACC”.
engine) Turn the key while turning the steering wheel in either direction.
Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”. P.5-51,

Vehicles with Twin Clutch SST: 5-52
Check the position of the gearshift lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the gearshift lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Place the key at the “ACC” position. Push the key in and turn it.
(When using the F.A.S.T.-key to When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the engine
start the engine) Will not turn from “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” to “ACC”.
Push the ignition switch again, turn the steering wheel in both directions and then turn the
ignition switch.
Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”. P.5-11

Vehicles with Twin Clutch SST:
Check whether the gearshift lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Place the ignition switch at the “ACC” position. Push the ignition switch in and turn it.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-
ate.
Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the doors and start the engine. P.5-21
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-3


Cannot shift the gearshift lever
2 from the “P” (PARK) position. Shift the gearshift lever while pressing the brake pedal.
P.5-58
(for vehicles with Twin Clutch Check that the ignition key or ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
SST)
The windows are fogged up.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position.

P.7-8, 7-13
2. Turn on the blower.
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P.8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-11
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-4 Quick index


The engine coolant temperature
display “ ” in the multi-infor-
2
mation display is flashing.
Steam comes out of the engine
compartment. The engine is overheated.
P.8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
The vehicle is stuck in sand,

Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. P.8-11
mud, or snow.
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.
Quick index 2-5

2 The brakes are not functioning

properly after driving through Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P.6-5
water.
Twin Clutch SST does not shift.
Vehicle cannot move.
Acceleration is slow.
The vehicle does not creep.
A large shock is felt when shift- The temperature of the Twin Clutch SST fluid is high, a safety device in the Twin Clutch SST P.5-60,
ing. has been activated due to a possible malfunction in the Twin Clutch SST, or there is a possible 5-69,
Shifting occurs at higher engine malfunction in the engine electronic control module. 5-121
speed.
Response is slow.
(for vehicles with Twin Clutch
SST)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P.8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
2-6 Quick index

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-4
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts .....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
Oxygenated gasoline
N00301000879
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- Gasoline sold at some service stations con-
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel filler erly. tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although
tube especially designed to accept only a the oxygenates may not be identified by those
small diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing names. Oxygenates are required in some
nozzle.
Octane requirement areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on pre-
WARNING mium grade unleaded gasoline having a mini-
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
mum octane number of 93 [(MON+RON)/2]
Ethanol (Gasohol)
sive. You could be burned, seriously
or higher for optimum performance. In case
injured or killed when handling it. When-
premium grade unleaded gasoline 93 A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the
[(MON+RON)/2] is not available, unleaded hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle. gasoline rating of 91 [(MON+RON)/2] can in your vehicle, provided the octane number
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- be used. However, the performance level is is at least as high as that recommended for
door areas. reduced. unleaded gasoline.
In order to maintain exhaust system durabil-
ity, premium unleaded gasoline having an Methanol
CAUTION octane number of at least 91
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will [(MON+RON)/2] must be used
Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and If the premium grade unleaded gasoline rat-
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
ing of 91 [(MON+RON)/2] or higher is not
line is illegal, and will void your warranty type of alcohol could adversely affect the
available on journey, etc., regular unleaded
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, vehicle’s performance and damage critical
gasoline having an octane number of 87
and oxygen sensors. parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
[(MON+RON)/2] can be used temporarily as
an emergency measure.
Gasoline detergent additives MON: Motor Octane Number

RON: Research Octane Number
In the United States, fuel suppliers are
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
3-2 General information
Fuel selection
Reformulated gasoline Sulfur in gasoline NOTE

 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems
Many areas of the country require the use of Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- such as poor starting, stalling during idling,
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu- isfy California’s low-emission regulations
tion. If you experience any of these prob- 3
lated Gasoline”. based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.
lems, try using a different brand of gasoline.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates Gasoline sold in parts of the country other If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
and is specially blended to reduce vehicle than California is allowed to have a higher VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine
emissions and improve air quality. sulfur content. Using such gasoline could light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup- adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con- soon as possible by the nearest authorized
ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop- verter and cause the engine malfunction indi- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
erly blended reformulated gasoline has no cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or of your choice.
adverse effect on vehicle performance or the “Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina-  Repeatedly driving short distances at low
durability of engine and fuel system. tion of this indicator while you are using speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily system and engine, resulting in poor starting
and poor acceleration. If these problems
mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi
occur, you are advised to add a detergent
manganese tricarbonyl) Motors dealer may suggest you try using a
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-
different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gas- its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic oline to determine whether the problem is condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi
additive that is blended into some gasolines fuel-related. Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an
to increase the octane number. unsuitable additive could make the engine
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends malfunction. For details, please contact the
using gasolines without MMT. nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
adversely affect performance, and cause the
malfunction indicator on your instrument
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank
Filling the fuel tank WARNING

N00301100753  Keep the doors and windows closed while
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
WARNING fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
3  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When
Fuel tank capacity
refueling your vehicle, always turn the
engine off and keep away from flames, 14.5 gal (55.0 L)
sparks, and smoking materials. Always
handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
areas. Refueling A- Remove
 Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
B- Close
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
get rid of your body’s static electricity by
touching a metal part of the car or fuel 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
pump. Any static electricity on your body driver side of your vehicle. WARNING
could create a spark that ignites fuel The fuel tank filler door can be opened  Since the fuel system may be under pres-
vapor. from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
 Perform the whole refueling process filler door release lever located at the left slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov- side of the driver’s seat. uum that might have built up in the fuel
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
let any other person come near the fuel hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
tank filler. If you allowed a person to help before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel
you and that person was carrying static may spray out, injuring you or others.
electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
 Do not move away from the fuel tank filler 4. While filling with fuel, store the cap in the
until refueling is finished. If you moved capholder located on the inside of the fuel
away and did something else (for example,
tank filler door.
sitting on a seat) part-way through the
refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances. 3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
turning the cap counterclockwise.

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking Modifications to and racing
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank of your vehicle
filler door closed. N00301600165
This vehicle should not be modified with 3

WARNING non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mit-
 Make sure the fuel cap is securely closed. subishi Motors designs and manufactures
If the fuel cap is loose, fuel could leak, high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
resulting in a fire.
safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly CAUTION ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-  If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, ble state and/or federal regulations.
zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz- use only the cap specified for your model
vehicle. DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
zle in the tank port as far as it will go.
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
CAUTION NOTE TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
 Your vehicle can only be operated using VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
 If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata- UNDER WARRANTY.
driving, the engine malfunction indicator
lytic converter damage will result if leaded (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
gasoline is used. Examples of modifications to your vehicle
engine light”) may come on when the
that can cause damage or performance prob-
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do a self check. lems include the following:
not try to add more fuel. Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
you hear clicking sounds.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
The indicator will go off after driving several parts
CAUTION  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
times. If the indicator does not go off, con-
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-
soon as possible. emission, suspension, engine, drive train
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it
off with a soft cloth. or electrical wiring systems

Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts

 Modification of any onboard com-  Using a cellular phone or radio set inside ine parts will affect the driving safety of your
puter/control module, including repro- the vehicle without an external antenna Mitsubishi-vehicle.
gramming, or replacing/adding chips to may cause electrical system interference,
any onboard computer/control module which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-
Modification/alterations to the
3 tion.
electrical or fuel systems
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-  Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-
ual for further details regarding warranty cov- ifications must not be used. N00301800154
erage. Refer to the “Specifications” section for Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
information regarding wheel and tire vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
Installation of accessories sizes. important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
N00301700023
Motors dealer before installation of any
accessory which may involve modification of
WARNING
CAUTION  If you choose to use a cellular phone while
the electrical or fuel systems.
 Before any electrical or electronic accesso- driving, you must not allow that usage to
ries are installed, consult an authorized Mit- distract you in the safe operation of your CAUTION
subishi Motors dealer. vehicle. Anything, including cellular  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
phone usage, that distracts you from the Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
 The installation of accessories, optional safe operation of your vehicle increases sory fitment or modification.
parts, etc., should only be carried out your risk of an accident. If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
Refer to and follow all state and local laws improper installation methods are used (pro-
within the limits prescribed by law in the
in your area regarding cellular phone tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
driving area and in accordance with the usage while driving. devices may be adversely affected, resulting
guidelines and warnings contained within
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
the documents accompanying this vehicle.
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
Important point!
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
 Improper installation of electrical parts Mitsubishi Motors genuine
could cause fire. Refer to the “Modifica- Due to the large number of accessory and parts
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel replacement parts provided by different man-
N00301400105
systems” section within this owner’s manufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-
sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
ual. designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
dealer to check whether the attachment or
installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genu- dards of performance, and are recommended
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi vehicle
has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors autho-
rized accessories to choose from to tailor your 3
new vehicle to your own personal preference.
Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s Parts Man-
ager has information on various audio sys-
tems, protection items, as well as interior and
exterior accessories available for your spe-
cific model.
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
waste/perchlorate.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints .................................................................................4-6
Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-8
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-12
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-12
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-13
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-20
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-20
Seats
Seats
N00408401548
locks also are safety equipment, which must

1 - Front seats Seats and restraint systems be used correctly.
N00401600182
 To adjust the seat forward or backward Always check the following before you drive:
Your vehicle has seat belts and other features
 P.4-3
that help protect you and your passengers in
 To adjust the seatback  P.4-4  That everyone in your vehicle is properly
an accident.
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s side wearing their seat belt.
Seat belts are the most important safety
only, if so equipped)  P.4-4  That infants and small children are prop-
device. When worn properly, seat belts can
 Heated seats (if so equipped)  P.4-5 erly secured in appropriate child restraint
reduce the chance of serious injury or death
systems in the rear seat.
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
2 - Rear seats  That all doors are fully closed and locked.
tion during a severe frontal collision, your
 That seatbacks are upright, with head
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System
 Arm rest  P.4-5 (SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-
restraints properly adjusted.
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door
4-2 Seat and restraint systems
Front seats
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can
WARNING To adjust the seat forward or
help reduce the risk of injury or death, how-  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious backward
injury or death during deployment of the
ever, by following the instructions in this N00401900244
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
manual. seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
back as possible while maintaining a posi- seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the 4
Front seats tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, seat in place.
N00401800315
and safely operate the vehicle.
Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-  To reduce the risk to the front passenger
ble while maintaining a position that still Except for RECARO seat
of serious injury or death during deploy-
enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
control the steering wheel and safely operate properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
the vehicle. front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
 Always place children 12 years old and
Except for RECARO seat under in the rear seat and use appropriate
RECARO seat child restraint systems. RECARO seat
CAUTION
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between
your back and the seatback while driving. WARNING
The effectiveness of the head restraints will  To make sure that the seat is securely
be reduced in the event of an accident.
WARNING  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
locked, try to move it forward or back-
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while ward without using the adjusting lever.
catch your hand or leg.
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
trol and result in an accident.
pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
 After adjusting the seat, make sure that gers.
the seat is securely locked into position.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
To adjust the seatback RECARO seat WARNING

N00402001382  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
Adjust the seatback angle by turning the dial. death in the event of an accident or sud-
Except for RECARO seat den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, Seat belt performance during an accident
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
lean backward to a comfortable position and are reclined. The more a seatback is
release the lever. The seatback will lock in reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
place. mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
1- To move to forward direction

2- To recline backward
To adjust the seat height
(Driver’s side only, if so
equipped)
N00402100184
Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower

the seat.
CAUTION
 The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.

Rear seats
3 (LO)- Heater low (to keep the seat warm)
CAUTION
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while  When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
the heater is on. kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
WARNING heater.
 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
4
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
fatigue or other physical conditions or off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns tioning during use.
1- Raise when using the heated seat even at low
2- Lower temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care Rear seats
when using the heated seat. N00402500029
Heated seats (if so equipped)

N00435600365 Arm rest
CAUTION N00403000281
The heated seats can be operated when the  Switch off the seat heaters when not in use.
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for
Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown.
quick heating. After the seat has become The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi- “Cup holder” on page 5-165.)
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
seat temperature may be felt while using the
heated seats. This is caused by the operation
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
into the seat.
 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using
1 (HI)- Heater high (for quick heating) the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
ment to overheat.
2- Heater off
Head restraints
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
Head restraints WARNING position.
N00404300500  In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the head  To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
restraint must be adjusted to the proper
Except for RECARO seat position before vehicle operation. For the
 To lower the restraint, push down on it
N00409400030 while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
driver and front passenger, the seatbacks
4 Padded head restraints for the seats can must be adjusted to the upright position
direction shown by the arrow.
before adjusting the head restraints. The  After adjusting the height, push down on
reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
driver should never adjust the seat while the restraint to make sure it is locked in
vehicle is hit from the rear.
the vehicle is in motion. position.
The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
trated position.  Driving without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
To maximize the effectiveness of your head
serious injury or death in an accident. To
restraint, adjust the head restraint to the reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
proper position. For the driver and front pas- always make sure the head restraints are
senger, adjust the seatbacks to the upright installed and properly positioned when
position before adjusting the head restraints. the seat is occupied.
Sit back against the seatback with your head  Never place a cushion or similar device on
close to the head restraint. the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
Adjustment of the head restraint To remove

height
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, shown by the arrows. Then pull the head
adjust the head restraint height so that the restraint up and out of the seatback.
center of the restraint is at your eye level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their eye level when seated

Head restraints
CAUTION
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
seatback.
4
WARNING
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in RECARO seat
the event of an accident, the head N00409500031
restraints must be properly installed and RECARO seats are equipped with padded
positioned to proper height before vehicle
head restraints integrated with the seatbacks.
operation.
These head restraints can reduce the risk of a
whiplash injury if your vehicle is hit from the
CAUTION rear.
To install The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the trated position.
First check that the head restraint is facing in correct head restraint provided for the seat To maximize the effectiveness of your head
the right direction as shown in the previous and do not install the head restraint in the restraint, adjust your seatback to the upright
illustration, and then insert it into the seat- wrong direction. position and sit back against the seatback
back. Push the head restraint down while with your head close to the head restraint.
pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
locks into place.

Seat belts
senger in the event of an accident. Always
use the provided seat belts.
WARNING
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-
Carefully review the following information
ger of serious injury or death from a
for proper seat belt usage.
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger
always wears the seat belt properly,
4 WARNING remains seated all the way back and

 To help reduce the risk of injury or death upright in their seat, and moves the seat as
in an accident, seat belts and child far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen-
restraint systems must always be used. tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page page 4-20 for additional information.
4-13 for additional information.  Never hold an infant or child in your arms
 Never use one seat belt for more than one or on your lap when riding in this vehicle
WARNING person. even when you are wearing your seat belt.
 In order to minimize the risk of a neck  Never carry more people in your vehicle Never place any part of the seat belt you
injury due to a rear impact, the driver and than there are seat belts. are wearing around an infant or child.
front passenger seatbacks must be Failure to follow these simple instructions
 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
adjusted to the upright position before creates a risk of serious injury or death to
 Always place the shoulder belt over your
vehicle operation. The driver should never your child in the event of an accident or
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
adjust the seat while the vehicle is in sudden stop.
it behind you or under your arm.
motion.  Children 12 years old and under should
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
 Never place a cushion or similar device on always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
across your hips, not around your waist.
the seatback. This can adversely affect erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in serious injury or death in an accident,
head restraint performance by increasing
your vehicle. especially due to a deploying front passen-
the distance between your head and the
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious ger airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
restraint.
injury or death during deployment of the tems” on page 4-13 for additional
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the information.
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
Seat belts back as possible while maintaining a posi-
N00406000413 tion that still enables you to fully apply the
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas- and safely operate the vehicle.

Seat belts
WARNING NOTE WARNING

 Any child who is too small to properly  For instructions on installing a child restraint  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
wear a seat belt must be properly system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a death in the event of an accident or sud-
restrained in an appropriate child child restraint system using the seat belt” on den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
restraint system. Children 12 years old page 4-18. the upright position while the vehicle is in
and under should be seated only in the motion.
rear seat to reduce their risk of serious Seat belt performance during an accident 4
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
injury or death in an accident, especially can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
from the deployment of a front passenger
seats with their backs against the upright are reclined. The more a seatback is
airbag. seatback. To reduce the risk of serious reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
 Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing injury or death during deployment of the mance will be adversely affected. If the
child safety seat and positioned in the rear airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back seat belt is not properly positioned against
seat. as possible while maintaining a position the body during an accident, there is
 In the event of an accident, all seat belt that still enables you to fully apply the increased risk you will slide under the belt
assemblies, including retractors and pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and receive serious injury or death.
attachment hardware, should be inspected and safely operate the vehicle. The front
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors passenger seat should also be moved as 2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
dealer to determine whether replacement far back as possible. Refer to “Supple- webbing so that it easily pulls across your
is necessary. mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” body.
on page 4-20. Also refer to “To adjust the
Seat belt instructions seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
N00406201483
All seats are equipped with a seat belt which

uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
an emergency locking retractor.
This system is designed to provide both com-

fort and safety. It permits full extension and
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
retractor in the event of a sudden change in
the vehicle’s motion.
Seat belts
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
WARNING
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
adversely affect seat belt performance.
locked securely in the buckle.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the
4 buckle and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
out and check for kinks or twists in the
webbing. Then make sure it remains
untwisted as it retracts.
NOTE
 With the exception of the seat belt for the
Driver’s seat belt
driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- reminder/warning light and
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock- display
ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
N00418400326
NOTE seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
Warning light
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
installation function (see page 4-18).
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
When the ALR function has been activated,
all the way.
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4. Warning display
4. The lap part of the belt must always be
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to WARNING
take up any slack in the lap belt.  Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
is worn as low as possible across the hips,
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
instruction will increase the risk of serious A tone and warning light are used to remind
injury or death in the event of an accident. the driver to fasten the seat belt.
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position without the driver’s seat belt being

Seat belts
fastened, a warning light will come on and a
tone will sound for approximately 6 seconds
NOTE WARNING
 At the same time, “FASTEN SEAT BELT”  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
to remind you to fasten your seat belt.
will be displayed on the information screen makes the light difficult to see.
If you then drive with the seat belt unfastened
in the multi-information display.
for longer than a minute from when the igni-
tion switch was turned to the “ON” position,
the warning light will come on and blink Adjustable seat belt shoulder 4
repeatedly and the tone will sound intermit- Front passenger seat belt warn- anchor (front seats)
tently. ing light N00406300269
The warning light and the tone will stop after N00418300178
To move the anchor down, press the lock
approximately 90 seconds. The front passenger seat belt warning light is knob (A) and slide the anchor down to the
If you then repeatedly stop and start your located in the instrument panel. desired position.
vehicle with the seat belt unfastened, the To move the anchor up, slide the anchor up to
warning light/display and tone will remind the desired position.
you to fasten your seat belt every time the
vehicle starts moving. You will also be Anchor down Anchor up
reminded to fasten your seat belt in this way
when you remove your seat belt while driv-
ing. The warning light and the tone go off
when the seat belt is fastened.
WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident, always
wear your own seat belt. Do not allow any- When the ignition switch is turned to the
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she “ON” position, this indicator normally comes
is also seated and wearing a seat belt. on and goes off a few seconds later.
Children should additionally be restrained The light comes on when a person sits on the
in a secure child restraint system. front passenger seat but does not fasten the
seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
sequently fastened.

Seat belt use during pregnancy
WARNING WARNING
 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
that the shoulder belt is positioned across death to pregnant women and unborn
the center of your shoulder without touch- children in an accident, pregnant women
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should should always wear a seat belt. The lap
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail- portion of the seat belt should be worn
4 ure to follow this instruction can adversely snug and low across the hips and below
affect seat belt performance and increase the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
the risk of serious injury or death in the have any additional questions or concerns.
event of an accident.
 Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
the vehicle is not in motion.
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in WARNING Seat belt pre-tensioner and
position after adjusting it.  The extender should only be used if the force limiter systems
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone N00417700638
who can use the standard seat belt should The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
Seat belt extender not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
extender can adversely affect seat belt
N00406701215 system.
performance in an accident.
When your seat belt, even fully extended, is  When not required, the extender must be
not long enough, a seat belt extender must be removed and stowed. Pre-tensioner system
obtained. The extender may be used for either
of the front seats.
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
Seat belt use during preg- equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
nancy tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
N00406800075
collision, the pre-tensioner system operates
simultaneously with the deployment of the
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
front airbags or side airbags and curtain air-
nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
bags.
women are more likely to be seriously injured
The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within
or killed in an accident if they do not wear
the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
seat belts.
the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
webbing and increase seat belt performance.

Child restraint systems

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position. These include all of the
SRS warning
N00408700108
items listed above and all related wiring.
The pre-tensioner seat belt system will oper- This warning tells you if there is a problem
ate only when the ignition switch is in the involving the SRS airbags and the pre-ten-
“ON” or “START” position. sioner seat belts. Refer to “SRS warning
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, light/display” on page 4-26. 4
some smoke is released and a loud noise will
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care Force limiter system
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, N00408900113
as it may cause some temporary irritation to
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes people with respiratory problems.
limiter system will help reduce the force
the following components: The pre-tensioners activate in the event of
applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
moderate-to-severe frontal or side impact,
even if the seat belt is not being worn. The
seat belt pre-tensioners may not activate in Child restraint systems
certain types of collisions, even though the N00407101779
vehicle may appear to be severely damaged.
When transporting infants or small children
Such non-activation does not mean some-
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
thing is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner
system must always be used. This is required
system, but rather that the collision forces
by law in the U.S. and Canada.
were not severe enough or not of the type to
Child restraint systems specifically designed
activate the system.
for infants and small children are offered by
several manufacturers. Choose only a child
1- SRS warning light WARNING restraint system with a label certifying that it
2- Front impact sensors  The seat belt pre-tensioner system is complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
3- Seat belt pre-tensioners designed to work only once. After the seat Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle
4- Airbag control unit belt pre-tensioners have been activated, Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety
they will not work again. They must Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-
5- Side impact sensors
promptly be replaced and the entire seat
turer’s statement of compliance on the box
belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an
and child restraint system itself.
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
of the electronic parts of the system whenever

The child restraint system should be appropri-
ate for your child’s weight and height, and
WARNING
 All children must be seated in the rear
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat.
seat, and properly restrained.
For detail information, refer to the instruction
Accident statistics show that children of
manual accompanying the child restraint sys- all sizes and ages are safer when properly
tem. restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
4 the front seat.
Guidelines for child restraint  Any child who is too large to use a child
restraint system should ride in the rear
system selection seat and wear the lap and shoulder belt
properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
All children should be properly restrained in tioned over the shoulder and across the
a restraint device that offers the maximum chest, not across their neck, and with the WARNING
lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,  Your vehicle is also equipped with a front
protection for their size and age.
not across their stomach. If necessary, a passenger airbag.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
booster seat should be used to help achieve Never put REAR-FACING CHILD
requirements for child size and age that may a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
vary from the recommendations listed below. seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
a booster seat that is certified as comply- senger seat. This places the infant too
 Children less than 1 year old and who ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety close to the passenger airbag. During
weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys- deployment of the airbag, the infant can
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing
MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat. tions. child restraint systems or infant restraint
 Children older than 1 year of age and who  Never hold an infant or child in your arms systems must only be used in the rear seat.
weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must even when you are wearing your seat belt.
be in a forward-facing restraint used only Never place any part of the seat belt you
in the rear seat. are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions
 Children who weigh more than 40 pounds
creates a risk of serious injury or death to
(18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches your child in the event of an accident or
(100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should sudden stop.
use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
in the rear seat until the vehicle’s
lap/shoulder belt fits them properly.
Airbag WARNING NOTE

 It is important to use an approved rear-  Before purchasing a child restraint system,
facing infant restraint until the infant is try installing it in the rear seat to make sure
one year old (unless the infant outgrows there is a good fit. Because of the location of
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat
neck and spine to develop enough to sup- cushion, it may be difficult to securely install
port the weight of their head in the event some manufacturer’s child restraint systems. 4
of an accident. If the child restraint system can be pulled
 When installing a child restraint system, forward or to either side easily on the seat
follow the instructions provided by the cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
manufacturer and follow the directions in choose another manufacturer’s child restraint
this manual. Failure to do so can result in system.
WARNING serious injury or death to your child in an Depending on the seating position in the
 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT accident or sudden stop. vehicle and the child restraint system that
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat  After installation, push and pull the child you have, the child restraint system can be
whenever possible. If they must be used in restraint system back and forth, and side attached using one of the following two
the front passenger seat, move the seat to to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If methods:
the most rearward position and make sure the child restraint system is not installed • To the lower anchorage in the rear seat
the child stays in the child restraint sys- securely, it may cause injury to the child ONLY if the child restraint system is com-
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow or other occupants in the event of an acci- patible with the LATCH system (See page
these instructions could result in serious dent or sudden stop. 4-16).
injury or death to the child.  When not in use, keep your child restraint • To the seat belt (See page 4-18).
system secured with the seat belt, or
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.

Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations Examples of child restraint sys-
tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418900116 tems compatible with the LATCH
Anchors and Tethers for chil- Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the system
rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear
dren) system
N00419000172
seat. These are for securing a child restraint
4 N00418800102
system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seat-
ing positions in your vehicle.
Lower anchor locations
The outboard seating positions in the rear seat

of your vehicle are equipped with lower
anchors for attaching child restraint systems
compatible with the LATCH system.
A- Rear-facing child restraint system

B- Front-facing child restraint system
C- Child restraint system lower anchor
connectors
D- Tether strap
(These are only examples.)
Using the LATCH system

N00419100160
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,

NOTE remove the head restraint from the loca-
 The symbols on the seatback show the location where you wish to install the child
tion of the lower anchor points. restraint system.


2. Push the anchor connectors (A) on the 4. Latch the tether strap hook (F) of the child
child restraint system into the slits (B) in
NOTE restraint system to the anchor (G) as illus-
 In order to secure a child restraint system
accordance with the instructions provided trated below (4) and tighten the top tether
compatible with the LATCH system, use the
by the child restraint system manufac- strap so it is securely fastened.
lower anchor points in the outboard positions
turer. Remember, the lower anchors (E) of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the
provided with your vehicle are designed vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,
to secure suitable child restraint systems however, MUST be used to secure a child 4
compatible with the LATCH system in the restraint system in the center position of the
rear seat only. rear seat.
WARNING
 If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the child restraint sys-
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
from, not looped through or otherwise 5. Push and pull the child restraint system in
interfering with, the child restraint sys-
all directions to be sure it is firmly
tem. If foreign matter is not removed
secured.
and/or the seat belt interferes with the
A- Connector D- Vehicle seat child restraint system, the child restraint
system will not be secured properly, could WARNING
cushion
detach and move forward in the event of  Child restraint system tether anchors are
B- Slit E- Lower anchor designed only to withstand loads from cor-
sudden braking or an accident, and could
C- Vehicle seatback result in injury to the child or other vehi- rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
cle occupants. no circumstances are they to be used for
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
the seat where the child restraint system is attaching other items or equipment to the
installed. vehicle.
3. Open the cover for the tether anchor by

pulling it back with your hand as illus-
trated below (3).

Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING

tem using the seat belt (with  When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
4 N00407301508
system tightly secured to the seat.
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
Failure to convert the retractor to the
in all other seating positions can be converted ALR function may allow the child
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor restraint system to move forward during
(ELR) mode to Automatic Locking Retractor sudden braking or an accident, resulting
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull in serious injury or death to the child or
3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the other occupants.
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
part of the belt all the way out of the
installation function. Always use the ALR
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
child restraint installation function when you Installation
feed back into the retractor.
install a child restraint system using the seat
belt. 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
where you wish to install it.
Children 12 years old and under should To help assure proper fitting of the child
always be restrained in the rear seat, when- restraint system, always remove the head
ever possible, although the front passenger restraint.
seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode. 2. Route the seat belt through the child
restraint system according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer. Then insert the seat
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.


4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If 6. Open the cover from the tether anchor 8. Before putting your child in the restraint,
the belt is in the ALR function, you will installation point by pulling it back with push and pull the restraint in all directions
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing your hand as illustrated below (6). to be sure it is firmly secured. Do this
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the before each use. If the child restraint sys-
function has not been activated and you child restraint system to the tether anchor tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the through 7.
5. After confirming that the belt is locked, top tether strap so it is securely fastened. 9. To remove a child restraint system from 4
grab the shoulder part of the belt near the the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
buckle and pull up to remove any slack remove the child from the restraint.
from the lap part of the belt allowing the Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, from the restraint and let the belt fully
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child retract.
restraint system will not be secure. It may 10. Reinstall the head restraint.
help to put your weight on the child Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-6.
restraint system and/or push on its seat-
back while pulling up on the belt (see
illustration).
Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems
N00407601657
WARNING Children who have outgrown a child restraint

 Child restraint system tether anchors are system should be seated in the rear seat and
designed only to withstand loads from cor- wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
no circumstances are they to be used for
their stomach, a commercially available
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
booster seat must be used, to raise the child so
vehicle. that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
and the lap belt remains positioned low
across their hips. The booster seat should fit
If your child restraint system requires the use the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
accordance with the following procedures. Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- dye the belts. The color may rub off and the
tions. webbing strength may be affected. Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) - airbag
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and
WARNING their release mechanisms for positive engage-
N00407701818
 Any child who is too small to properly This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-
4 wear a seat belt must be properly
restrained in an appropriate child
retractors for automatic locking when in the
bags for the driver and passengers.
restraint system, to reduce their risk of Automatic Locking Retractor function.
serious injury or death in an accident. The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
The entire seat belt assembly should be
 A child should never be left unattended in, ment the primary protection of the driver and
or unsupervised, around your vehicle.
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious
front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
When you leave the vehicle, always take cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-
ing those occupants with protection against
the child out as well. tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
severe frontal collisions.
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,
The SRS front airbags, together with sensors
hot days. which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-
at the front of the vehicle and sensors
 Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid mance in an accident.
closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle
attached to the front seats, form an advanced
keys away from children. airbag system.
 Never allow children to play in the trunk
WARNING
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to
of your vehicle.
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work supplement the primary protection of the
should be done by an authorized driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
Maintenance and inspection an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer and provide increased overall body protection
perform the work could reduce the effec-
of seat belts tiveness of the belts and could result in a
in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
N00407000221 sions.
serious injury or death in an accident.
The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
shade. Do not allow them to retract until com- front passenger with protection against chest
pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re- injuries by deploying the bag on the side
impacted in moderate to severe side impact

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
the driver and passengers on the front seat
WARNING WARNING
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas- • Airbags inflate very quickly and with
and rear outboard seat with protection against
sengers properly positioned. This great force. If the driver and front pas-
head injuries by deploying a bag on the side
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, senger are not properly seated and
impacted in moderate to severe side impact and reduces the risk of serious injuries or restrained, the airbag may not provide
collisions. death when the airbags inflate. the proper protection and can cause seri-
During sudden braking just before a col- ous injuries or death when it inflates. 4
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use lision, an unrestrained or improperly • To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
of the seat belts. For maximum protection in restrained driver or passengers can move injury or death due to a deploying
all types of accidents, seat belts must forward into direct contact with, or driver’s airbag, always properly wear
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or within close proximity to, the airbag your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small when it begins to inflate. as far back as possible, maintaining a
children in an appropriate child restraint sys- The beginning stage of airbag inflation is position that still allows the driver to
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck- the most forceful and can cause serious have good control of the steering wheel,
led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint injuries or death if the occupant comes in brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
contact with the airbag at this time. trols.
systems” on page 4-13.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in • To reduce the risk to the front passenger
rollovers, rear impact collisions, and in of serious injury or death from a deploy-
WARNING lower-speed frontal collisions, because ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS the airbags are not designed to inflate in passenger always wears the seat belt
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY those situations. properly, remains seated upright and all
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. • Seat belts reduce the risk of being the way back in the seat, and positions
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or the seat as far back as possible.
rollover. • Seat all infants and children in the rear
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP- seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
ERLY SEATED. ate child restraint system.
• A driver or front passenger sitting too  Airbags inflate very quickly and with
close to the steering wheel or instrument great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
panel during airbag deployment can be seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
seriously injured or killed. the instrument panel, or lean your head or
chest close to the steering wheel or the
instrument panel.
 Do not put your feet or legs on or against
the instrument panel.

Airbag
WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
accident, especially when the airbags deployment of the airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys-
inflate. Infants and children should be be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
properly seated in the rear seat in an Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
appropriate child restraint system. Refer infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
to “Child restraint systems” on page 4-13. in the rear seat.


8- Seat belt buckle switches When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
WARNING 9- Passenger’s seat weight sensors accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
 Older children should be seated in the
10- Airbag control unit not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
rear seat with their seat belt properly
the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat if needed. tion to people with respiratory problems.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems” on page 4-19.
After deployment, the airbags will quickly 4
deflate, so quickly that some people may not
even realize the airbags inflated.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
How the Supplemental from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
Restraint System works and does not prevent people from leaving the
N00407800519 vehicle.
The SRS includes the following components:
11- Side airbag modules CAUTION
12- Curtain airbag modules  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
13- Side impact sensors force. In certain situations, contact with an
inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
sions, and bruises. Refer to “Supplemental
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on page
of the electronic parts of the system whenever 4-20.
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position. These include all of the
items listed above and all related wiring. Event Data Recording
N00418600230
The airbags will operate only when the igni-
1- Driver’s airbag tion switch is in the “ON” or “START” posi- This vehicle is equipped with an event data
2- SRS warning light tion. recorder (EDR).
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
4- Passenger’s front airbag When the impact sensors detect a front or certain crash or near crash-like situations,
5- Front impact sensors side impact sufficient to deploy the airbag(s), such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
6- Driver’s knee airbag the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed. road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
7- Driver’s seat position sensor standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.

SC00000500-2.fm 24 ページ２０１４年４月１８日　金曜日　午後５時４９分

The EDR is designed to record data related to To read data recorded by an EDR, special
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
WARNING
• Do not recline the seatback more than
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
necessary when driving.
less. vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
• Do not place metallic objects or luggage
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record under the front seat.
ment, can read the information if they have
4 such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR.
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe
impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by
 How various systems in your vehicle were an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
operating; Driver’s seat position sensor soon as possible.
 Whether or not the driver and passenger N00417900193
safety belts were buckled/fastened; The driver’s seat position sensor is attached Passenger’s seat weight sensors
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress- to the seat rail and provides the airbag control N00418001387
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft The passenger’s seat weight sensors are
and, position. The airbag control unit controls attached to the seat rails and provide the air-
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. deployment of the driver’s front airbag in bag control unit with information regarding
accordance with the information it receives the weight on the front passenger seat. The
These data can help provide a better under- from this sensor. airbag control unit controls deployment of the
standing of the circumstances in which If there is a problem involving the driver’s passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
crashes and injuries occur. seat position sensor, the SRS warning in the the information it receives from this sensor.
instrument panel will come on. Refer to “SRS The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
NOTE warning light/display” on page 4-26. in an impact when the weight on the seat is
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only sensed to be less than approximately
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data WARNING 66 pounds (30 kg). In this case, the passen-
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv- ger’s airbag off indicator will come on.
 If the SRS warning comes on, have the
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on
vehicle inspected by an authorized Mit-
name, gender, age, and crash location) are
subishi Motors dealer as soon as possible. page 4-25.
recorded. However, other parties, such as
 Please observe the following instructions If there is a problem involving the passen-
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
to ensure that the driver’s seat position ger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS warning in
sensor can operate correctly. the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
data routinely acquired during a crash inves-
tigation. • Adjust the seat to the correct position, “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-26.
and sit well back against the seatback.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

SC00000500-2.fm 25 ページ２０１４年４月１８日　金曜日　午後５時４９分
WARNING WARNING
 If any of the following conditions occur, • Do not place luggage or other objects on
you should immediately have your vehicle the seat.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
Motors dealer as soon as possible: • Do not modify or replace the seat and
• The SRS warning does not initially come
on when the ignition switch is turned to
seat belt.
• Do not place luggage or other objects
4
the “ON” or “START” position. under the seat.
• The SRS warning does not go out after • Do not place the floor mat on the seat
several seconds. rails.
• The SRS warning comes on while you are • Do not expose the sensors to liquids or
driving. vapors. The indicator normally comes on when the
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat weight • Do not subject the sensors to shock. ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
sensors can correctly sense the weight • Do not allow rear-seat occupants to push and goes out a few seconds later.
being applied to the seat, observe the fol- the front passenger seat with their feet or In the following situations, the indicator will
lowing instructions. Failure to follow these force the front passenger seat upward. stay on to show that the passenger’s front air-
instructions can adversely affect the per- • Do not allow rear-seat occupants to grasp
formance of the passenger’s airbag sys- bag is not operational.
the front passenger’s seatback or put
tem. their arms around it.  The passenger’s seat weight sensors sense
• Adjust the seat to the correct position,
• When attaching a child restraint system a weight of less than approximately 66
and sit well back against the seatback. in the rear seat, make sure it does not
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3. pounds (30 kg) on the front passenger
interfere with the front seat. seat.
• Do not recline the seatback more than  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
necessary.  The front passenger’s seat is not occupied.
impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
• Never have more than one person (adult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
or child) sitting on the seat. When the weight applied to the front passen-
soon as possible.
• Do not place anything between the seat ger seat is sensed to be approximately 66
and the floor console. pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes
• Do not hang anything on the front pas- Passenger’s airbag off indicator out to show that the passenger’s front airbag
senger’s seatback. N00418100251 is operational.
• Do not remove the head restraints. The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
• When attaching a child restraint system, located in the instrument panel.
secure it firmly.


Warning display
WARNING WARNING
 If any of the following conditions occur, • The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
you should immediately have the airbag ing display comes on while driving.
system in your vehicle inspected by an The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as sioners are designed to help reduce the
soon as possible:
4 • The passenger’s airbag off indicator
risk of serious injury or death in certain
collisions. If either of the above conditions
The system checks itself every time the igni-
comes on when an adult is sitting on the occurs, immediately have your vehicle
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
front passenger seat. checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
The SRS warning light will come on for sev- Motors dealer.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when the front passenger’s
eral seconds and then go out.
seat is not occupied. This is normal and means the system is work-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does ing properly. Driver’s and passenger’s front
not come on when the ignition switch is If there is a problem involving one or more of airbag system
turned to the “ON” position. the SRS components, the warning light will N00407900028
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator come on and stay on. At the same time, the The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
comes on and goes out repeatedly. warning display will appear on the informa- ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi- tion screen in the multi information display. The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off The SRS warning light/display is shared by the instrument panel above the glove com-
indicator difficult or impossible to see. the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
You must be able to see the passenger’s
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
system. passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
airbag off indicator and verify the status
of the passenger’s airbag system. the same time. However, the front passen-
WARNING ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
 If any of the following conditions occur, passenger seat is not occupied or when the
SRS warning light/display there may be a problem with the SRS air- weight sensor in the front passenger seat
bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and senses a weight on the seat of less than
N00408301622
they may not function properly in a colli- approximately 66 pounds (30 kg).
Warning light sion or may suddenly activate without a
collision:
• Even when the ignition switch is in ON,
the SRS warning light does not come on
or it remains on.

Driver’s knee airbag system

N00404500023
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
designed to deploy at the same time as the
Driver driver’s front airbag. 4
Front passenger
Deployment of front airbags

N00408000518
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows

SC00000500-2.fm 28 ページ２０１４年４月１６日　水曜日　午後２時２分

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a objects
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY
condition is shown in the illustration to the when …
left.
In certain types of front collisions, the front
4 The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not
designed to deploy only in certain moderate deploy, even if the deformation of the body
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body body of a truck
area between the arrows in the illustration to structure is designed to absorb the impact and
the right. deform in order to help protect the occupants.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag Some typical situations where the front air-
will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
structure is above a specific threshold level. are shown in the illustrations.
The threshold level is approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a Because the front airbags and driver’s knee Oblique frontal impact
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear
below this threshold level, the front airbags your seat belts properly.
and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,
another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
rail).
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful, and can cause serious injuries
or death if you are too close to the deploying
airbag. Accordingly, it is important that you
always wear the available seat belt.


carriage impact). Some typical situations are
The front airbags and driver’s Rear end collision to your vehicle shown in the illustrations.
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
… airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are Side collision to your vehicle
and these unexpected impacts can move you 4
out of position, it is important to always wear
not designed to deploy in situations where
your seat belts properly. When worn properly,
they cannot provide protection to the occu-
seat belts can help maintain your distance
pants.
from the airbags and driver’s knee airbag
Some typical situations are shown in the
when they begin to inflate. The beginning
illustrations.
stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee and can cause serious injury or death if you
airbag do not protect the occupants in all are close to the deploying airbag.
types of collisions, be sure to always wear Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
your seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s

knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under-

Collision with an elevated median/island or curb WARNING WARNING

 Do not attach anything to the steering  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate- ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and ignition key. Such objects could prevent
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
normally or could be propelled to cause
4  Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove serious injury if the airbag inflates.
compartment. Such items could strike and  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
Such objects could prevent the driver’s
knee airbag from inflating normally or
could be propelled to cause serious injury
if the airbag inflates.
Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the

ground
WARNING
 Do not attach accessories to, or put them
in front of, the windshield. They could
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and WARNING
injure an occupant, when the airbag  Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
inflates. semble or repair the SRS airbags.


A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
WARNING Side airbag system cles with side airbags.
 Do not place objects, such as packages or N00408101444
pets, between the airbags and the driver The side airbags (A) are contained in the
or the front passenger. Such objects can driver and front passenger seatbacks. Except for RECARO seat
adversely affect airbag performance, or The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
cause serious injury or death when the
airbag deploys.
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even 4
with no passenger in the front seat.
 Immediately after airbag inflation, some
parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
not touch them. You could be burned. Except for RECARO seats
 The airbag system is designed to work RECARO seat
only once. After the airbags deploy, they
will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer.
RECARO seats
Curtain airbag system

N00419201256
The curtain airbags are contained in the front

and rear pillars and roof side rail. The curtain
airbag is designed to inflate only on the side
of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no
passenger in the front seat.

WARNING
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back
of either front seat. Special care should be
taken with children.
4  Do not place any objects near or around
the front of either front seatback. Such
objects can interfere with proper side air-
bag deployment and cause injury during
deployment of the side airbag.
 Do not place stickers, labels or additional
WARNING trim on the back of either front seat. They WARNING
 The side airbag and curtain airbag can can interfere with proper side airbag  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
cause serious injury or death to anyone deployment. pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats tain airbag was activated, any such item
reduce the risk of injury from a deploying that have side airbags. Covers can inter- could be propelled away with great force
side airbag and curtain airbags, all occu- fere with proper side airbag deployment and could prevent the curtain airbag from
pants must be properly restrained and and adversely affect side airbag perfor- inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
seated well back, upright, and in the mid- mance. on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
dle of the seat. Do not lean against the  Do not attach a microphone (A) or any Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
door. other object around the part where the objects in the pockets of clothes that you
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the hang on the coat hook.
windshield, side door glass or front and  Never install a rear-facing child restraint
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
curtain airbag inflate, the microphone or facing child restraint systems MUST
other object may be hurled with great ONLY be used in the rear seat.
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate
correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.


your safety and the safety of all occupants, be
WARNING Deployment of side airbag and sure to always wear your seat belts properly.
 Front-facing child restraint systems curtain airbag
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. N00408200477
If a front-facing child restraint system The side airbag and curtain airbag
must be used in the front passenger seat,
The side airbag and curtain airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when …
move the seat as far back as possible, and
make sure that the child stays in the child ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY 4
restraint system, properly restrained and In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
when … bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
away from the door.
 Do not allow a child to lean against or sit A side airbag and curtain airbag are designed if the deformation of the body seems to be
close to the passenger door, even if the to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
child is seated in a child restraint system. to severe side impact to the middle of the pas- designed to absorb the impact and to deform
The child’s head should also not lean
senger compartment. in order to help protect the occupants. Also,
against or be close to the section of the depending on the location of the impact, the
seatback where the side airbag and cur-
The typical situation is shown in the illustra-
tion. side airbags and curtain airbags may not
tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if deploy simultaneously. Some typical situa-
the side airbag and curtain airbag
tions where the side airbag and curtain airbag
deploys. Failure to follow all of these Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the
instructions could lead to serious injury or vehicle body’s side structure
may not deploy are shown in the illustrations.
death to the child.
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
 Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
do not protect the occupant in all types of side
airbag and curtain airbag system compo-
nents should be done only by an autho- collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper belts properly.
work methods can cause accidental side
airbag and curtain airbag deployment, or
render a side airbag and curtain airbag
inoperable. Either of these situations can
result in serious injury or death. The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
mary means of protection in an accident. The
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side
airbags and curtain airbags are designed to
provide additional protection. Therefore, for


collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
Side impact in an area away from the passenger Oblique side impact
belts properly.
compartment
Head-on collision
4
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
sion with the side of vehicle
Rear end collision
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow

object The side airbag and curtain airbag
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
DEPLOY when …
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not
designed to deploy in situations where they
cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Typical situations where the side airbags and
curtain airbags cannot provide protection are
shown in the illustrations below.
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags

do not protect the occupants in all types of

SRS servicing WARNING NOTE

N00408500672  Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel
WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
 Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
Also, if you discover any tear or open To contact Mitsubishi Motors North
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi seam in the seat fabric near the side air- America, Inc. 4
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
to do any service, inspection, maintenance rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors North America,
or repair on any SRS components or wir-  If you find a crack in or damage to the Inc.
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should front pillar, rear pillar, or roof side rail Customer Relations Department
ever be handled, removed or disposed by where the curtain airbag is located, have
P. O. Box 6400
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi the SRS inspected by an authorized Mit-
Motors dealer. subishi Motors dealer.
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci- [For vehicles sold in Canada]
dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle Canada, Inc.
tions could result in serious injury or to another person, we urge you to alert the call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada,
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any and refer that owner to the applicable sec- Inc.
other SRS component or related vehicle tions in this owner’s manual. Customer Relations Department
part. For example, replacement of the  If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, P.O. Box 41009
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized 4141 Dixie Road
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can
adversely affect SRS performance and
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
be made safe for disposal.
may lead to injury.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
 If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person,
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to affected. Please consult an authorized Mit-
make sure it is in proper working order. subishi Motors dealer for assistance.
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt


[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico] [For vehicles sold in American
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Samoa]
Caribbean, Inc. To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to: call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, Pacific Marketing, Inc.
Inc. P.O. Box 698
4 Customer Service Department PAGO PAGO,
P.O. Box 192216 AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
[For vehicles sold in Guam] Warning labels *- Located in the passenger’s side as well.
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc. N00408600309
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
P.O. Box 6066 are located in the vehicle as shown in the
TAMUNING illustration.
GUAM 96931
[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors
call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

Features and controls
Break-in period ................................................................................5-3 S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) ...............................................5-71

Keys .................................................................................................5-3 Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-74
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4 Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-76 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-7 Limited-slip differential .................................................................5-78
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Service brake .................................................................................5-79
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................5-11 Brake assist system ........................................................................5-80
Door locks ......................................................................................5-33 Power steering system ...................................................................5-80
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-35 Cruise control ................................................................................5-80
“Child safety locks” for rear door ..................................................5-36 Tire pressure monitoring system ...................................................5-85
Trunk lid ........................................................................................5-37 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-89
Inside emergency trunk lid release ................................................5-38 Multi-information display .............................................................5-90
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-39 Indicator light, warning light, and information screen
Power windows ..............................................................................5-42 display list ............................................................................... 5-110
Sunroof (if so equipped) .................................................................5-44 Indicators .....................................................................................5-120
Parking brake .................................................................................5-46 Warning lights ..............................................................................5-121
Steering wheel tilt lock lever .........................................................5-47 Information screen display ..........................................................5-122
Inside day/night rearview mirror ...................................................5-48 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-124
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-49 Turn signal lever ..........................................................................5-129
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-50 Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-130
Steering wheel lock ........................................................................5-52 Front fog light switch ..................................................................5-130
Starting and stopping the engine ....................................................5-52 Wiper and washer switch .............................................................5-131
Turbocharger operation ..................................................................5-55 Electric rear window defogger switch .........................................5-135
Clutch pedal operation (if so equipped)..........................................5-56 Horn switch .................................................................................5-136
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-56 Link System .................................................................................5-136
Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift Transmission) Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..............................................................5-136
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................5-58 USB input terminal ......................................................................5-157
All-wheel drive system ..................................................................5-70 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-160
Cautions on handling of all-wheel drive vehicles ..........................5-70 12 V power outlet ........................................................................5-160
Features and controls
Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-161

Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-163
5 Cup holder ................................................................................... 5-165
Bottle holder ................................................................................ 5-165
Assist grip .................................................................................... 5-166
Coat hook .................................................................................... 5-166
Break-in period
Break-in period Keys

N00508700301 N00508800588
For future performance and economy of your

vehicle, we recommend that you carry out the Type 1
following precautions.
Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
 Avoid revving the engine. Do not exceed
5,000 rpm for the first 600 miles (1,000
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. 5
km).
 Avoid rough driving such as fast starts,
prolonged high-speed driving and rough 1- F.A.S.T.-key
shifting for the first 300 miles (500 km). (with electronic immobilizer and key-
 The high-performance brake pads on your less entry system function)
vehicle require a short break-in period. 2- Emergency key
Avoid hard braking for the first 300 miles 3- Key number plate
(500 km) to prevent future abnormal
brake noise and vibration from your vehi-
cle’s brake pads. NOTE
 The standard-equipment tires use a high-  The key is a precision electronic device with
grip compound. 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
Thus drive with extra care for the first 200 keyless entry system the following in order to prevent damage.
miles (300 km). 2- Key number plate • Do not leave where it may be exposed to
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
 Do not overload the vehicle. Observe the
top of the dashboard.
seating capacity (See “Cargo loads pre-
• Do not take the remote control transmitter
cautions” on page 6-10). Type 2 apart.
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. • Do not excessively bend the key or subject
Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys it to strong impacts.
are provided. • Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency • Keep away from magnetic objects such as
key in a safe place together as a set of spare key rings.
keys.
Features and controls 5-3

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
NOTE NOTE achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
netism, such as audio systems, computers tional status, the alarm operates if a door is
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
and televisions. opened after using the key, the door lock
knob or the power door lock to unlock the cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular vehicle. electronics.
phones, wireless devices and high fre-  The system does not enter the preparation
5 quency equipment (including medical status if the keyless entry system or the NOTE
devices). F.A.S.T.-key operation was not used to lock  Do not attach additional keys or accessories
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. the vehicle. to the ignition key. Such objects could pre-
• Do not leave the key where it may be vent the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
ity.
Electronic immobilizer normally. Refer to “Deployment of front air-
bags” on page 4-27.
 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of (Anti-theft starting system)  In the following cases, the vehicle may not
the vehicle immediately contact an autho- N00509101820 be able to recognize the registered ID code
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. from the key. This means the engine will not
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi start even when the key is turned to the
Motors dealer of the key number, they can Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
“START” position.
make a new key. The key number is stamped key)]
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
on the key number plate. Keep the key num- For information on operations for vehicles metallic or magnetic object (Type A)
ber plate in a safe place separate from the equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- • When the key grip contacts metal of
key itself. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to another key (Type B)
 No keys other than those registered in “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter • When the key contacts or is close to other
advance can be used to start the engine. (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Electronic immobilizer immobilizer keys (including keys of other
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-26. vehicles) (Type C)
starting system)” on page 5-4.
 In cases like the above, move the offending
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free- object(s) away from the key and turn the key
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Electronic hand Advanced Security Transmitter back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on (F.A.S.T.-key)] Then try to start the engine again. If the
page 5-26.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig- engine does not start, contact an authorized
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
5-4 Features and controls


Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
NOTE NOTE an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
 Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
A have your ID code changed.
with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle Additional keys
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.
To add a key, you need to register the ID code
 A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- to the vehicle. 5
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a Registering the ID code can be done by an
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
B Motors dealer. can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
sold in Canada).
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
WARNING low the “Customer key programming” proce-
 Do not make any alterations or additions dure below.
to the immobilizer system. Alterations or If you choose to have an authorized Mitsubi-
additions could cause failure of the immo- shi Motors dealer register the ID code, take
bilizer. your vehicle and all remaining keys to an
C authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Replacement keys NOTE

 You are provided with two keys, but you
Only keys that have been programmed to the may register up to eight keys.
vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
vehicle.
 The key may not operate properly when it is
If you lose the key, you can order a key from
near an object or facility that emits strong
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
electromagnetic waves.
referring to the key number.
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
vehicle keys must be changed.


4. When the immobilizer display starts
Customer key programming blinking, turn the second valid key to the
NOTE
(Except for vehicles sold in “LOCK” position and remove it. Within  The procedure will be terminated automati-
cally if:
Canada) 30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
N00562200070 immobilizer key into the ignition switch
from the moment when the first key is
You can program new keys to the system if and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform turned to the “LOCK” position to the
you have two valid (already registered) keys this operation no more than 30 seconds moment when the second key is turned to
after the immobilizer display starts blink-
5 and blank (not registered) immobilizer key
ing. When registration of the ID code is
the “ON” position
(specially cut for your vehicle at your Mit-
subishi Motors dealer) by doing the follow- complete, the immobilizer display will from the moment when the second key is
ing: come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an turned to the “LOCK” position to the
error occurs, the immobilizer display will moment when the blank immobilizer key is
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition go off during the procedure. turned to the “ON” position
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
tion for 5 seconds.
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
2. Turn the key to the “LOCK” position and tem.
remove the first key. Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
3. Within 30 seconds of turning the first key tomer remote control transmitter program-
to the “LOCK” position, insert the second 5. If you wish to register another key, per-
ming” on page 5-9.
valid key into the ignition and turn it to form the process again from step 1.
the “ON” position. About 10 seconds
General information
later, the immobilizer display will start to NOTE N00562301108
blink.  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- Your electronic immobilizer operates on a
play screen may prevent you from seeing the radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
immobilizer display. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
 It is not possible to register a key if: cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
• the immobilizer display goes off during the Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
procedure device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules
• the immobilizer display does not come on and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
within 30 seconds after turning the ignition standard(s).
switch to the “ON” position with a blank
immobilizer key

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
To unlock
N00543301109
 This device may not cause harmful inter- Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
ference. driver’s door only.
 This device must accept any interference Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
received, including interference that may button one more time to unlock all the doors.
cause undesired operation. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. 5
The front side-marker and parking lights will
CAUTION
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to
 Changes or modifications not expressly
1- LOCK ( ) button “Welcome light” on page 5-128.
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
ate the equipment.
3- Trunk ( ) button NOTE
 The door unlock function can be set so that
4- PANIC button
all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button
5- Indicator light
Keyless entry system (if so (2) is pressed once.
Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on
equipped) page 5-8.
N00509000835 To lock
N00542700053
Press the remote control transmitter buttons
to lock or unlock the doors and to open the
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the To open the trunk lid
doors. N00543400028
trunk lid.
The turn signal lights will also blink once. Press the trunk button (3) twice within about
It can also help you signal for attention by
setting off the panic alarm. 5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened.
NOTE The trunk lid must be closed manually after it
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice has been opened.
quickly, the horn will sound once.


2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Answerback function bination headlights and dimmer switch to 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
N00543501097
the “OFF” position. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
Setting of the horn and turn signal lights of 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- the “OFF” position.
the keyless entry system answerback function onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10
can be changed as required. This is done with during this time. seconds and press the LOCK button (1)
the key removed from the ignition switch. 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and during this time.
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
5 NOTE pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
 The answerback function does not operate pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
when the key is in the ignition switch or any Changing the setting of the turn
doors is opened.
signal lights answerback function Setting of door unlock function
N00543601131
Horn deactivation/reactivation The turn signal lights answerback function The door unlock function can be set to the
can be set to the following seven conditions. following two conditions.
Each time the turn signal lights answerback Each time the door unlock function is set, a
The horn answerback function can be set to chime will sound to tell you the condition of
function is set, a chime will sound to tell you
the following three conditions. the door unlock function.
the condition of the answerback function.
Each time the horn answerback function is
set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi-
Number of Condition Number of
tion of the answerback function. Condition
chimes To lock To unlock chimes
Number of One chime One flash Two flashes One chime All doors unlock
Condition
chimes Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only
Two chimes One flash No flash
One chime The horn will not sound.
Three chimes No flash Two flashes
Two chimes The horn will sound. 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Four chimes Two flashes One flash 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
The horn will sound if the bination headlights and dimmer switch to
Five chimes No flash One flash
Four chimes LOCK button (1) is pressed the “OFF” position.
twice quickly. Six chimes Two flashes No flash
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
Seven chimes No flash No flash onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. during this time.

4. Release in sequence the LOCK and To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of the remote control transmitters except the one
Customer remote control trans-
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. for the lost key must be programmed again. mitter programming
Take your vehicle and all the remaining N00544001132
remote control transmitters to an authorized You can program new remote control trans-
Using the panic alarm Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID
N00543700047
mitters to the system if you have one valid
codes programmed again. (already registered) remote control transmit-
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- ter by doing the following:
ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten- 5
tion as follows: Additional remote control 1. Have available all (current and new)
transmitters remote control transmitters you wish to
1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than N00543900023 register.
1 second. 2. With a valid (already registered) remote
To add a remote control transmitter, you must
2. The headlights will blink on and off and control transmitter, press the UNLOCK
already have one registered remote control
the horn will sound intermittently for button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds. Then press
transmitter.
about 3 minutes. and hold the LOCK button (1).
Registering the ID code can be done by your-
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on 3. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
the remote control transmitter. button, release the LOCK and UNLOCK
dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
self, follow the “Customer remote control buttons in sequence. At this time, ID
Replacement remote control transmitter programming” procedure below. codes for all remote control transmitters
transmitters If you choose to have an authorized Mitsubi- except for the transmitter used in steps 2
N00543800022
shi Motors dealer register the ID code, take and 3 are erased and the answerback func-
your vehicle and all remaining keys to an tion (door is locked and unlocked)
Only remote control transmitters pro- informs you that the registration mode has
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can been activated.
lock or unlock all doors. 4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete
NOTE the following ID code registration opera-
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you  You are provided with two remote control
tion using the next remote control trans-
can order a remote control transmitter from transmitters, but you may register up to eight
mitter you wish to register within 4
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by remote control transmitters.
seconds.
referring to the key number.
i. Press both the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons for 2 seconds.


ii. Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
buttons for 1 second.
NOTE Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
 If the following conditions are observed after
iii. Press the UNLOCK button. The dard(s).
pressing the buttons on the remote control
answerback function informs you that Operation is subject to the following two con-
transmitter, the battery in the remote control
the ID code registration of the transmit- transmitter may need to be replaced. ditions.
ter is completed. • The doors cannot be locked or unlocked.
5. To register the ID codes of additional  This device may not cause harmful inter-
• The trunk lid cannot be opened.
remote control transmitters, repeat step 4 ference.
5 within 60 seconds after step 4.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
 This device must accept any interference
• The indicator light (5) is dim or does not
6. If no ID code of a remote control trans- received, including interference that may
come on.
mitter is registered within 60 seconds cause undesired operation.
 If you lose your remote control transmitter,
after step 4, the registration mode is can- please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
celed and the normal mode returns. Motors dealer for a replacement. CAUTION
 If you wish to obtain an additional remote  Changes or modifications not expressly
control transmitter, please contact an autho-
NOTE rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
 For verification purposes, try to lock and of eight remote control transmitters can be ate the equipment.
unlock the doors after the registration is programmed for your vehicle.
completed.
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
 The indicator light (5) comes on each time a is necessary to register the key with both the
button is pressed. electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys- Procedure for replacing the
 The keyless entry system does not work if tem. remote control transmitter bat-
the key is in the ignition switch. Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
 The remote control transmitter can be used theft starting system): Customer key pro-
tery
N00544100107
from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However, gramming” on page 5-6.
this distance may change if your vehicle is 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
near a TV transmitting tower, a power sta- electricity from your body by touching a
tion, or a radio station. General information metal grounded object.
 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when N00546101111 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
all doors are locked and no doors are opened Your keyless entry system operates on a radio insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade
within about 30 seconds, the doors will auto- frequency subject to Federal Communica- screwdriver into the notch in the remote
matically re-lock. tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles control transmitter case and use it to open
sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules the case.
(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that
it works.
NOTE
 You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
5
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
4. Remove the old battery.
NOTE 5. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
down. nents.
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-
shi mark is not facing you when you open the
remote control transmitter case, the buttons + side
may come out. Free-hand Advanced Secu-
3. Remove the remote control transmitter
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
from the remote control transmitter case. - side
key) (if so equipped)
Then, open the remote control transmitter N00503100108
using the method described in step 2.

Coin type battery The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
CR1620 ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors to be
locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be
6. Close the remote control transmitter opened, and the engine to be started simply
firmly. by carrying it.
7. Place the remote control transmitter in the The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
remote control transmitter case, then remote control transmitter of the keyless
securely close the remote control trans- entry system.
mitter case. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)”: “Keyless entry


system” on page 5-28. The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
key can be modified as stated below.
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the (Keyless entry operations are possible.)
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for For details, contact an authorized Mitsubi-
vehicle operations such as locking and shi Motors dealer.
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk • Enabling only the locking and unlocking
lid, and starting the engine. When leaving of the doors and the opening of the trunk
the vehicle, make sure you are carrying lid
5 the F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehi- • Enabling only the starting of the engine
cle. • Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
WARNING NOTE
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic
 Individuals who use implantable pace-
waves.
makers or implantable cardiovascular- A- External transmitter In cases such as the following, operation
defibrillators should keep away from the
B- Internal transmitter may be improper or unstable.
external and internal transmitters. The
electromagnetic waves used in the • The vehicle is near a facility that emits
F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV
implantable pacemakers and implantable WARNING transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
cardiovascular-defibrillators.  Individuals using other electrical medical station or an airport
apparatuses besides implantable pace- • The key is carried together with other com-
makers and implantable cardiovascular- munication devices such as cellular phones
defibrillators should check with the manu- or radios, or electrical appliances such as
facturer of the apparatus to confirm the computers
effect of the electromagnetic waves used • The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromagnetic metal object
waves may affect the operations of the • A keyless entry system is being used
electro-medical apparatus. nearby
• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down
• The vehicle is in a location with strong
electromagnetic waves or noise


when the ID codes of the vehicle and
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key match.
Use the emergency key in such circum-
stances.
Refer to “To operate using the emergency
key” on page 5-21.
 The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
reception operations in its communication
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
5
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 3 years, depending on the
usage conditions. *: Front of the vehicle
 Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform- : Operating range
ing reception operations, the reception of
strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
the running down of the battery. Do not place NOTE NOTE
near electrical appliances such as televisions  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run  Only the F.A.S.T.-key that is detectable by
or computers. down or there are strong electromagnetic the doors and the trunk lid can lock and
waves or noise in the area, the operating unlock the doors and open the trunk lid.
range could decrease or operations could
Operating range of the become unstable.
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-
key is too close to the windshield, door win-
F.A.S.T.-key dows or trunk lid.
N00503200141
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3
When a person enters the operating range of Operating range for locking and feet (70 cm) of the driver’s and front passen-
the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.- unlocking the doors and for open- ger’s door lock/unlock switches and center
key and presses the driver’s or front passen- of the trunk lid, the system may not operate
ing the trunk lid if the key is close to the ground or in a high
ger’s door lock/unlock switch or the OPEN
switch on the trunk lid, verification of the ID position.
The operating range is within about 2.3 feet  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating
code is performed.
(70 cm) of the driver’s and front passenger’s range, even a person not carrying the
The F.A.S.T.-key enables the doors to be
door lock/unlock switches and the center of F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors
locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be or open the trunk lid by pressing the driver’s
the trunk lid.
opened and the engine to be started only or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,
or the OPEN switch on the trunk lid.

Operating range for starting the To operate using the F.A.S.T.- NOTE
engine key • There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger
N00503300038
N00503401254
compartment
The operating range is the interior of the • A door is open or ajar
• The ignition switch is in a position other
vehicle. To lock than “LOCK”
• The emergency key is inserted into the igni-
5 While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the tion switch
driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (A) within the operating range to lock
To unlock (Driver’s and passenger
all the doors.
The turn signal lights will blink once and the doors)
buzzer will sound once.
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the
Also refer to “Door locks”and “Power door operating range, you can unlock the doors by
locks” on pages 5-33 and 5-35 respectively. using the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
*: Front of the vehicle The turn signal lights will blink twice and the
: Operating range buzzer will sound twice.
Also refer to “Door locks” and “Power door

locks” on pages 5-33 and 5-35 respectively.
NOTE
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat- Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
ing range, it may not be possible to start the (A) to unlock only the driver’s door.
engine if the key is in a storage space such as
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s
the glove compartment, on top of the instru-
door lock/unlock switch one more time to
ment panel, or in the door pocket or trunk
compartment. unlock all the doors.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is outside the vehi-
cle, it may be possible to start the engine if NOTE
the key is close to a door or door window.  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
key does not operate.

NOTE To open (Trunk lid)

 If the doors are unlocked when all doors are
locked and no doors are opened within about While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the
30 seconds, the doors will automatically re- operating range to open the trunk lid, press
lock. and hold down the OPEN switch (A) until the
 The amount of time after unlocking until the trunk lid opens.
vehicle relocks automatically can be
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
Also refer to “Trunk lid” on page 5-37. 5
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
key does not operate.
• A door is open or ajar
NOTE • The ignition switch is in a position other
 Settings can be changed so that all doors are than “LOCK”
unlocked automatically by pressing the • The emergency key is inserted into the igni-
driver’s door lock/unlock switch once. tion switch
Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on  Function settings can be modified as stated
page 5-30. below.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock
• Activating the operation confirmation func-
switch (B) to unlock all the doors.
tion (blinking of the hazard warning lights)
only during locking, or only during unlock-
NOTE
ing.  The F.A.S.T.-key does not operate when the
• Deactivating the operation confirmation trunk lid is open.
function (blinking of the hazard warning
lights) and buzzer.
• Modifying the number of blinkings in the Ignition switch
operation confirmation function (blinking N00513500046
of the hazard warning lights).
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys
• Making the buzzer sound when the
other than those registered in advance can be
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
compartment when all the doors are closed. used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
lizer function)


While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the ignition
ON To turn from “LOCK (PUSH
switch can be turned to start the engine.
OFF)” to “ACC”
The engine runs and all electrical accessories N00513600047
can be used. Turn slowly after pressing the ignition switch.
START
5
Engages the starter. Release the ignition
switch when the engine starts. The ignition
switch returns automatically to the “ON”
position.
NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
LOCK (PUSH OFF) immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the A- Steering wheel locked
The position where the steering wheel is one registered to the immobilizer computer. B- Steering wheel lock released
locked. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-26)
 If the ignition switch is not turned to the NOTE
LOCK (PUSH ON) “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” position when the  To turn the ignition switch from the “LOCK
engine is not running, the ID code cannot be (PUSH OFF)” position to the “ACC” posi-
When the ID code verification inside the verified and the engine will not start even if tion, push the ignition switch again, turn the
vehicle produces a match, the ignition switch the ignition switch is turned to the “START” steering wheel in both directions and then
position. If this happens, fully return the turn the ignition switch.
can be turned.
ignition switch to the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”  The ignition switch cannot be turned unless
position, and start the engine again. the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle.
ACC Refer to “Operating range for starting the
engine” on page 5-14.
Allows operation of electrical accessories
with the engine off.

To turn from “ACC” to “LOCK” CAUTION There is a problem in the

N00513700077  If the engine is stopped while driving, the F.A.S.T.-key
power brake booster will stop functioning
For vehicles with manual transaxle
and greater effort for braking will be
required. Also, the power steering system If the following warning display, the display
Slowly turn the ignition switch to the goes off if corrective action is taken.
will not function and it will require greater
“LOCK” position while pressing it.
effort to manually steer the vehicle.
 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the
For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST (spor-
 Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON”
or “ACC” position for a long time when the vehicle cannot be verified 5
tronic shift transmission) engine is not running. Doing so could lead to
a dead battery. Someone may be carrying a
First, set the gearshift lever to the “P”  Do not turn the ignition switch to the F.A.S.T.-key with a different
(PARK) position, and then slowly turn the “START” position when the engine is run- ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position while ning. It will damage the starter motor. may not be within the oper-
pressing it. ating range
Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-
Warning activation out monitoring system” on
N00503500199
page 5-18.
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given
through buzzers and displays on the informa- The battery of the F.A.S.T.-
tion screen in the multi-information display key is run down
in order to prevent mistaken operations or
vehicle theft.  A door cannot be locked even when the
When a warning operates, be sure to check driver’s or front passenger’s door
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is lock/unlock switch is pressed
also displayed if there is a problem in the
F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Key lock-in pre-
NOTE If the following warning displays, contact an vention system” on page
 For vehicle with Twin Clutch SST, the igni- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 5-18.
tion switch cannot be turned to the “LOCK”
position unless the gearshift lever is in the Refer to “Door ajar preven-
“P” (PARK) position. tion system” on page 5-18.


Refer to “Ignition switch NOTE Door ajar prevention system
turn-off reminder system” on  The warning may display even if the N00560000133
page 5-18. F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for
starting the engine. The surrounding envi-
F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring ronment or electromagnetic waves may
make it impossible to verify the ID codes of
system the F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.
5
N00559801167
Key lock-in prevention system When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK
N00559900132 (PUSH OFF)” position, and someone tries to
lock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or
front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch
while one of the doors is not fully closed, the
warning display is displayed and the buzzer
When the ignition switch is in a position
sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and
other than the “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”, if the
the doors cannot be locked.
door(s) are opened, the F.A.S.T. - key is
removed from the passenger compartment, When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK
and then the door(s) are closed, the warning (PUSH OFF)” position, the F.A.S.T.-key is Ignition switch turn-off reminder
left in the passenger compartment, all the
display is displayed and the buzzer sounds 4 system
times as a warning since it’s impossible to doors are closed, and someone tries to lock
N00560100134
verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front
vehicle. passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the
sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and
NOTE the doors cannot be locked.
 The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system If all the doors are manually locked and
does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is closed while the ignition switch is in the
removed through a window without opening When the ignition switch is in a position
“LOCK (PUSH OFF)” position and the other than “LOCK (PUSH OFF)”, all the
a door. This setting can be changed.
F.A.S.T.-key is left in the car, the doors will doors are closed, and someone tries to lock
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details. automatically unlock and a buzzer will sound the vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front
for about 3 seconds. passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the


sounds for about 3 seconds as a warning, and  If the engine will not start because the bat-
the doors cannot be locked.
CAUTION tery is weak or discharged, refer to
 Carry the key with you when leaving the
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
vehicle.
for instructions.
Steering wheel lock  If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the
 A longer warm up period will only con-
N00514300054 ignition switch to the “ACC” position to
unlock the steering wheel. sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
enough for driving when the bar graph of
the engine coolant temperature display
starts to move. Refer to “Interrupt display
5
NOTE
screen (With ignition switch in the “ON”
 If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn position)” on page 5-99.
the ignition switch from “LOCK” to “ACC”  On vehicles equipped with the Twin
position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to Clutch SST, the following may occur after
the left or to the right as you turn the ignition the engine is started, but they do not indi-
switch. cate an abnormality.
• You may hear operational sounds of the
Twin Clutch SST and you may feel
Starting vibration in the vehicle body.
To lock N00514601315 • If you shift the gearshift lever into the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- Tips for starting the accelerator pedal, increases in the
tion. engine speed will be limited.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.  Do not operate the starter motor for longer
than 15 seconds as this could run the bat-
WARNING
tery down or damage the starter motor. If
To unlock the engine does not start, turn the ignition
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed
switch back to the “LOCK” position, wait to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” posi- a few seconds, and then try again. Trying bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
tion while moving the steering wheel slightly. repeatedly with the engine or starter extremely poisonous, could build up and
motor still turning will damage the starter cause serious injury or death.
mechanism.


6. Without pressing the accelerator pedal,
CAUTION NOTE slowly turn the ignition switch to the
 Do not push-start the vehicle.  For models equipped with a manual trans-
“START” position to start the engine.
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive axle, the starter will not operate unless the
Release the ignition switch when the
at high speeds until the engine has had a clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter-
lock). This is a safety feature. engine starts.
chance to warm up.
 Release the ignition switch as soon as the
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor NOTE
4. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
5 will be damaged. the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
position. up.
On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, make
Starting the engine sure the gearshift lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position. When the engine is hard to start
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is NOTE After several attempts, you may experience
a system that automatically controls fuel  On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the that the engine still does not start.
injection. There is no need to depress the starter will not operate unless the gearshift
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
accelerator pedal when starting the engine. lever is in the “P” (PARK) position or the
gearshift lever is in the “N” (NEUTRAL) as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
The starter motor should not be run for more
position with the brake pedal depressed. window defogger, are turned off.
than 15 seconds at a time.
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” 2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi-
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
(PARK) position so that the wheels are cles equipped with Twin Clutch SST or
between attempts to restart the engine.
locked. the clutch pedal on the vehicles equipped
1. Make sure all occupants are properly with manual transaxle, press the accelera-
seated with seat belts fastened. 5. While pushing the ignition switch from tor pedal halfway and hold it there, then
2. Press and hold the brake pedal down with “LOCK” (PUSH OFF) to “LOCK” crank the engine. Release the accelerator
your right foot. (PUSH ON), set the ignition switch to the pedal, immediately after the engine starts.
3. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way “ON” position and confirm that all warn-
down (manual transaxle). ing lights and warning displays are oper-
ating properly.


3. If the engine still will not start, the engine does not indicate a problem. If it occurs,
could be flooded with too much gasoline. place the gearshift lever in the “P” (PARK)
While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- position and let the engine idle for at least
cles equipped with Twin Clutch SST or 10 minutes.
the clutch pedal on the vehicles equipped The transmission will warm up, and you will
with manual transaxle, push the accelera- be able to start normally.
tor pedal all the way down and hold it Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
there, then crank the engine for 5 to 6 sec- operation.
onds. Return the ignition switch to the
5
“LOCK” position and release the acceler-
ator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and then
To operate using the emergency
crank the engine again for 5 to 6 seconds key
while depressing the brake pedal or the N00514800020 NOTE
clutch pedal, but do not push the accelera-  Only use the emergency key in an emer-
tor pedal. Release the ignition key if the Emergency key gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
engine starts. If the engine fails to start, N00515200122
has run down, replace the battery as soon as
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.
repeat these procedures. If the engine still The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-
 After using the emergency key, be sure to
will not start, contact your local key. reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such
ity of your choice for assistance. as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the To lock or unlock the driver’s door with
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can the emergency key
Startability of Twin Clutch SST vehicle be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door
with an ambient temperature of -22 °F and to start the engine. Turn the emergency key toward the front of
(-30 °C) or lower the vehicle to lock the door. After checking
To use the emergency key (1), unlock the lock that the door is locked, turn the emergency
When the ambient temperature is -22 °F knob (2) and remove it from the F.A.S.T.-key key back to the center and remove it.
(-30 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to (3).
start from a standstill even with the gearshift
lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
(REVERSE) position.
This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
mission has not warmed up sufficiently; it

LOCK NOTE
 The vehicle is equipped with an electronic
The engine is off and the steering wheel is immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
locked. The emergency key can be inserted which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
and removed only when the ignition switch is one registered to the immobilizer computer.
in this position. (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-26)
5 ACC
The electrical accessories can be used with To turn from “LOCK” to “ACC”
the engine off.
1- Insert or remove the emergency key 1. Remove the emergency key from the
2- Lock F.A.S.T.-key.
3- Unlock ON Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-21.
2. While pushing the lock release buttons
The engine will start only by using the emer-
(A), remove the cover of the ignition
gency key with the F.A.S.T.-key inserted. It is
Ignition switch switch.
possible to use all electrical accessories with
N00529301235
only the emergency key.
To prevent vehicle theft, only the emergency
key with the pre-registered F.A.S.T.-key
START
inserted can start the engine. (Electronic
immobilizer function) Engages the starter. Release the emergency
key when the engine starts. The ignition
switch returns automatically to the “ON”
position.
3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition

switch, and slowly push and turn.

CAUTION
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position while the vehicle is moving. This
will cause the steering wheel to lock, making
it impossible to operate the vehicle.
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the
power brake booster will stop functioning
and greater effort for braking will be
required. Also, the power steering system
5
will not function and it will require greater
effort to manually steer the vehicle.
 Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON”
NOTE NOTE or “ACC” position for a long time when the
 For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the engine is not running. The battery will run
 When the ignition switch cannot be turned down.
emergency key cannot be removed unless the
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
gearshift lever is set to the “P” (PARK) posi-  Do not turn the ignition switch to the
position, turn the ignition switch while turn-
tion. “START” position when the engine is run-
ing the steering wheel in both directions.
ning. It will damage the starter motor.
2. Install the cover of the ignition switch.

To turn from “ACC” to “LOCK” 3. Reinsert the emergency key into the Steering wheel lock
F.A.S.T.-key.
1. [For vehicles with manual transaxle]
Push the emergency key in at the “ACC”
position and keep it depressed until it is NOTE
turned to the “LOCK” position, and  Always install the cover of the ignition
switch when not using the emergency key.
remove.
Not doing so could cause damage if foreign
[For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST material such as dust gets into the keyhole of
(sportronic shift transmission)] the ignition switch.
First, set the gearshift lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and then slowly turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
while pressing it.


 Do not operate the starter motor continu-
To lock
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
WARNING
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
Turn the emergency key to the “LOCK” posi- could run the battery down or damage the
ventilated area any longer than is needed
tion. starter motor. If the engine does not start,
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
turn the emergency key back to the bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked. “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds, extremely poisonous, could build up and
and then try again. Trying repeatedly with cause serious injury or death.
To unlock the engine or starter motor still turning
5 will damage the starter mechanism.
Turn the emergency key to the “ACC” posi-
tion while moving the steering wheel slightly.
 If the engine will not start because the bat- CAUTION
tery is weak or discharged, refer to  Do not push-start the vehicle.
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2  Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
CAUTION for instructions. at high speeds until the engine has had a
 Remove the emergency key when leaving the  A longer warm up period will only con- chance to warm up.
vehicle. sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up  Release the emergency key as soon as the
 If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the enough for driving when the bar graph of engine starts. It will damage the starter
emergency key to the “ACC” position to motor.
the engine coolant temperature display
unlock the steering wheel.
starts to move. Refer to “Interrupt display
screen (With ignition switch in the “ON” Starting the engine
position)” on page 5-99.
NOTE  On vehicles equipped with the Twin The vehicle is equipped with an electronically
 If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
Clutch SST, the following may occur after controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn tem that automatically controls the fuel injec-
the engine is started, but they do not indi-
the emergency key from “LOCK” to “ACC”. tion. There is no need to depress the
Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or cate an abnormality.
• You may hear operational sounds of the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
to the right as you turn the emergency key.
Twin Clutch SST and you may feel The starter motor should not be run for more
vibration in the vehicle body. than 15 seconds at a time.
Starting To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
• If you shift the gearshift lever into the
Tips for starting “N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress between attempts to restart the engine.
the accelerator pedal, increases in the
1. Make sure all occupants are properly
engine speed will be limited.
seated with seat belts fastened.


NOTE
 On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the
switch.
starter will not operate unless the gearshift
lever is in the “P” (PARK) position or the
gearshift lever is in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position with the brake pedal depressed.
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
(PARK) position so that the wheels are
locked.
5
8. Turn the emergency key with the

5. Press and hold the brake pedal down with F.A.S.T.-key to the “ON” position and
your right foot. make certain that all warning lights and
6. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way warning displays are functioning properly
3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition down (manual transaxle). before starting the engine.
switch. 9. Turn the emergency key with the
NOTE F.A.S.T.-key to the “START” position
 For models equipped with a manual trans-
without pressing the accelerator pedal.
axle, the starter will not operate unless the Release the emergency key with the
clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- F.A.S.T.-key when the engine starts.
lock). This is a safety feature. 10. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the emer-
gency key.
7. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) NOTE
position.  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
On vehicles with SST, make sure the gear- up. These will disappear as the engine warms
up.
shift lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.
4. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency
key.


2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi-
WARNING cles equipped with Twin Clutch SST or
Startability of Twin Clutch SST vehicle
 Make sure to remove the F.A.S.T.-key with an ambient temperature of -22 °F
the clutch pedal on the vehicles equipped
from the emergency key after the engine is (-30 °C) or lower
with manual transaxle, press the accelera-
started.
If not removed, the F.A.S.T.-key could fall tor pedal halfway and hold it there, then When the ambient temperature is -22 °F
to the floor, which could disturb the pedal crank the engine. Release the accelerator (-30 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to
operation. Furthermore, the F.A.S.T.-key pedal, immediately after the engine starts. start from a standstill even with the gearshift
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
5 could prevent the driver’s knee airbag
from inflating normally or could be pro- could be flooded with too much gasoline.
lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
(REVERSE) position.
pelled to cause serious injury if the airbag While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
inflates. cles equipped with Twin Clutch SST or mission has not warmed up sufficiently; it
the clutch pedal on the vehicles equipped does not indicate a problem. If it occurs,
with manual transaxle, push the accelera- place the gearshift lever in the “P” (PARK)
NOTE tor pedal all the way down and hold it position and let the engine idle for at least
 If the emergency key is attached to a key there, then crank the engine for 5 to 6 sec- 10 minutes.
ring, it may become impossible to insert the onds. Return the ignition switch to the The transmission will warm up, and you will
F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency key, and it “LOCK” position and release the acceler- be able to start normally.
may prevent the engine from being started.
ator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and then Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
When using the emergency key to start the
crank the engine again for 5 to 6 seconds operation.
engine, first remove the key from the key
ring. while depressing the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal, but do not push the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the ignition key if the Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
When the engine is hard to start engine starts. If the engine fails to start, theft starting system)
repeat these procedures. If the engine still N00529600055
After several attempts, you may experience will not start, contact your local The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
that the engine still does not start. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
ity of your choice for assistance. theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
window defogger, are turned off. attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-
lizer system.


All of the keys provided with your new vehi- For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- For F. A. S. T.-key programming, follow the
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- procedures below.
electronics. ming” procedure below.
If you choose to have an authorized Mitsubi- 1. Remove the emergency key from the
shi Motors dealer register the ID code, take F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Emergency key”
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys on page 5-21.
N00561000055
your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.-keys
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 2. While pushing the lock release buttons
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro- (A), remove the cover of the ignition
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be switch. 5
used to start the vehicle. NOTE
 You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.
F.A.S.T.-key from an authorized Mitsubishi You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all Motors dealer.
the F.A.S.T.-keys except the one for the lost
F.A.S.T.-key must be programmed again.
Take your vehicle and all the remaining Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi ming (Except for vehicles sold in
Motors dealer to have your ID codes pro- Canada)
grammed again. N00561200145
3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the switch.
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys system if you have two valid (already regis-
N00561100043 tered) F.A.S.T.-keys, blank (not registered)
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have F.A.S.T.-key and emergency key (specially
two registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi
register the ID code to the vehicle. Motors dealer).
Registering the ID code can be done by an To use the new F.A.S.T.-key, it is necessary to
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it register the key with both the electronic
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles immobilizer and keyless entry system. Also
sold in Canada). refer to “Keyless entry system: Customer
F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page 5-31.


4. Insert the first valid F.A.S.T.-key into the 7. When the immobilizer display starts
emergency key. blinking, turn the second valid F.A.S.T.-
NOTE
 The procedure will be terminated automati-
key to the “LOCK” position and remove
cally if:
it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert
a blank F.A.S.T.-key into the emergency
from the moment when the first F.A.S.T.-
key and turn it to the “ON” position. Per- key is turned to the “LOCK” position to the
form this operation no more than 30 sec- moment when the second F.A.S.T.-key is
onds after the immobilizer display starts
5 blinking. When registration of the ID
turned to the “ON” position
code is complete, the immobilizer display from the moment when the second
will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If F.A.S.T.-key is turned to the “LOCK” posi-
an error occurs, the immobilizer display tion to the moment when the blank
will go off during the procedure. F.A.S.T.-key is turned to the “ON” position
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
5. Turn the emergency key with the
is necessary to register the key with both the
F.A.S.T.-key to the “ON” position for 5
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
seconds. tem.
6. Turn the emergency key with the Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
F.A.S.T.-key to the “LOCK” position. tomer F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page
Within 30 seconds after doing so, remove 8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-
5-31.
the F.A.S.T.-key from the emergency key, key, repeat the process from step 1.
insert the second valid F.A.S.T.-key into
Keyless entry system
the emergency key and turn it to the “ON” NOTE N00515500154
position. About 10 seconds later, the  Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
immobilizer display will start to blink. play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- Press the remote control transmitter buttons
play screen may prevent you from seeing the to lock or unlock the doors and to open the
immobilizer display. trunk lid.
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if: It can also help you signal for attention by
• the immobilizer display goes off during the setting off the panic alarm.
procedure
• the immobilizer display does not come on
within 30 seconds after turning the ignition
switch to the “ON” position with a blank
F.A.S.T.-key


This is done with the key removed from the
To unlock
ignition switch.
N00544301119
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the

driver’s door only. Within about 2 seconds, NOTE
press the UNLOCK button one more time to  The answerback function does not operate
when the key is in the ignition switch or any
unlock all the doors.
door is opened.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. 5
The front side-marker and parking lights will Horn deactivation/reactivation
also turn on for about 30 seconds. Refer to The horn answerback function can be set to
1- LOCK ( ) button “Welcome light” on page 5-128. the following three conditions.
2- UNLOCK ( ) button
3- Trunk ( ) button NOTE Each time the horn answerback function is
 The door unlock function can be set so that set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi-
4- PANIC ( ) button all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button tion of the answerback function.
5- Indicator light (2) is pressed once. Refer to “Setting of door
unlock function” on page 5-30. Number of
Condition
chimes
To lock One chime The horn will not sound.
N00544200010 To open the trunk lid
Two chimes The horn will sound.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the N00544400012
doors. Press the trunk button (3) twice within about The horn will sound if the
The turn signal lights will also blink once. 5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened. Four chimes LOCK button (1) is pressed
The trunk lid must be closed manually after it twice quickly.
NOTE has been opened.
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
quickly, the horn will sound once. Answerback function position. If you started the engine with the
N00544501078
key, remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Setting of the horn, turn signal lights and
buzzer of the keyless entry system answer-
back function can be changed as required.

2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
bination headlights and dimmer switch to position. If you started the engine with the position. If you started the engine with the
the “OFF” position. key, remove the key from the ignition key, remove the key from the ignition
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- switch. switch.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
during this time. bination headlights and dimmer switch to bination headlights and dimmer switch to
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and the “OFF” position. the “OFF” position.
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
5 pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. seconds and press the LOCK button (1) onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
during this time. during this time.
Changing the setting of the turn signal 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
lights answerback function LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
The turn signal lights answerback function
can be set to the following seven conditions. Buzzer deactivation/reactivation Using the panic alarm
N00544700044
Each time the turn signal lights answerback The buzzer answerback function can be
function is set, a chime will sound to tell you If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
turned ON or OFF as required.
the condition of the answerback function. ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-
tion as follows:
Condition
Setting of door unlock function
Number of N00544601112 1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than
chimes To lock To unlock 1 second.
The door unlock function can be set to the
One chime One flash Two flashes following two conditions. 2. The headlights will blink on and off and
Each time the door unlock function is set, a the horn will sound intermittently for
Two chimes One flash No flash
chime will sound to tell you the condition of about 3 minutes.
Three chimes No flash Two flashes 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
the door unlock function.
Four chimes Two flashes One flash the remote control transmitter.
Five chimes No flash One flash Number of
Condition
chimes
Six chimes Two flashes No flash
One chime All doors unlock
Seven
No flash No flash Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only
chimes

Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE

N00561300032  You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but
Only a F.A.S.T.-key, which has been pro- you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys.
grammed into the vehicle’s electronics, can
lock and unlock all the doors, and start the
engine. Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a ming (Except for vehicles sold in
F.A.S.T.-key from an authorized Mitsubishi Canada) 5
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. N00561501129
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
the F.A.S.T.-keys except the one for the lost
system if you have two valid (already regis- 3. Insert the emergency key into the ignition
F.A.S.T.-key must be programmed again.
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys, blank (not registered) switch.
Take your vehicle and all the remaining
F.A.S.T.-key and emergency key (specially
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi
cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi
Motors dealer to have your ID codes pro-
Motors dealer).
grammed again.
To use the new F.A.S.T.-key, it is necessary to
register the key with both the electronic
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys immobilizer and keyless entry system. Also
N00561400033 refer to “Electronic immobilizer: Customer
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have F.A.S.T.-key programming” on page 5-27.
two registered F.A.S.T.-keys.
Registering the ID code can be done by an For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it procedures below.
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles 4. Insert the valid F.A.S.T.-key into the
1. Remove the emergency key from the
sold in Canada). For you to register the ID emergency key.
F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Emergency key”
code yourself, follow the “Customer
on page 5-21.
F.A.S.T.-key programming” procedure below.
If you choose to have an authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer register the ID code, take
switch.
your vehicle and all remaining F.A.S.T.-keys
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.


10. Release in sequence the LOCK and
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
NOTE
• The doors cannot be locked or unlocked.
pressing the LOCK button in step 9, and
• The trunk lid cannot be opened.
the immobilizer display will blink on the
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
information screen in the multi-informa-
• The indicator light (5) is dim or does not
tion display. (Perform the following pro-
come on.
cedure within 60 seconds)
 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
11. Press the LOCK button twice with the
5 blank F.A.S.T.-key and the immobilizer
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a
replacement.
display will come on for 30 seconds on  If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-
the information screen in the multi-infor- key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
5. Turn the emergency key with F.A.S.T.- mation display. Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
key to the “ON” position. (Perform the 12. This completes the registration of the key can be programmed for your vehicle.
following procedure within 30 seconds) F.A.S.T.-key.  To use the new remote control transmitters, it
6. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the emer- is necessary to register the key with both the
gency key. electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
NOTE tem.
7. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the  The indicator light (5) comes on each time a Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
UNLOCK button (2) and the LOCK but- button is pressed. theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-
ton (1) simultaneously for 4 to 10 sec-  The keyless entry system does not work if key programming” on page 5-27.
onds. the key is in the ignition switch.
8. Release in sequence the LOCK and  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
General information
N00561601074
pressing the LOCK button in step 7. (Per- may change if your vehicle is near a TV
form the following procedure within 30 transmitting tower, a power station, or a Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-
seconds) radio station. quency subject to Federal Communications
9. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press  If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold
the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds all doors are locked and no doors are opened in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
within about 30 seconds, the doors will auto- vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-
and press the LOCK button during this
matically re-lock.
time. plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
 If the following conditions are observed after
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
pressing the buttons on the remote control
Operation is subject to the following two con-
transmitter, the battery in the remote control
transmitter may need to be replaced. ditions.

Door locks
 This device may not cause harmful inter- 5. Close the remote control transmitter case
ference. firmly.
 This device must accept any interference 6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
received, including interference that may it works.
cause undesired operation.
NOTE
CAUTION  You may purchase a replacement battery at
 Changes or modifications not expressly an electric appliance store. 5
approved by the manufacturer for compli-  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- replace the battery for you if you prefer.
ate the equipment.
NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
CAUTION
Procedure for replacing the Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubi-  When the remote control transmitter case is
remote control transmitter battery shi mark is not facing you when you open the opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
N00561700094 remote control transmitter case, the transmit- out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static ter may come out. nents.
electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
3. Remove the old battery.
2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
Door locks
insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade N00509200518
up.
screwdriver into the notch in the remote
control transmitter case and use it to open + side WARNING
the case.  Make sure all doors are tightly closed and
locked while driving.
• Locked doors, in combination with the
- side use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
of ejection in an accident.
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
Coin type bat-
especially small children, from opening
tery CR2032
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.

Door locks
WARNING To lock or unlock the door from

• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders the inside
from gaining access to your vehicle when
you slow or come to a stop. Move the lock knob to the lock position to
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. lock the door.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles All doors should be kept locked while driv-
may not be able to get out. Children
ing.
5 trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
overcome by heat and suffer serious
injury or death due to heat stroke.
 Never leave children unattended inside a
vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat 1- Insert or remove the key
stroke, children can activate switches and 2- Lock
controls, resulting in an injury or fatal 3- Unlock
accident.
NOTE
To lock or unlock the driver’s  When locking or unlocking with the key,
door with the key only the driver’s door will be locked or
unlocked.
To lock or unlock all doors, use the power 1- Lock
Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to 2- Unlock
door lock switch, the keyless entry system or
lock the door. After checking that the door is
the F.A.S.T.-key.
locked, turn the key back to the center and
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-35,
remove it. The driver’s door can be unlocked without
“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-7 and
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
5-28, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key” on page 5-14. door handle.
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked To lock the door without using
using the emergency key.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-21. the key
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
position.

Power door locks

2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi- The warning display will be displayed on the If the driver’s door is opened while the igni-
cle. Close the door. information screen in the multi-information tion switch is in a position other than “LOCK
display. (PUSH OFF)”, the ignition switch return
reminder buzzer will sound intermittently to
remind you to return the ignition switch to the
Lock out protection “LOCK (PUSH OFF)” position.
N00517300039
The warning display will be displayed on the
When you push the lock knob forward or lock information screen in the multi-information
the door with the power door lock switch in display.
5
both of the following conditions, the lock
knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position. Power door locks
N00509300580
 The key is in the ignition switch or the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” NOTE
Key reminder system position.  When locking or unlocking with the key on
N00549600211  Driver’s door or front passenger door is the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
opened. lock or unlock.
 Repeated continuous operation between lock
When a key was used to start the and unlock could activate the power door
engine Ignition switch return reminder locking systems built-in protection circuit
system and prevent the system from operating. If
N00503800147
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
ating the power door lock switch.
When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to

start the engine
If the ignition switch is turned off and the

driver’s door is opened with the key in the
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
sound intermittently to remind you to remove
the key.

“Child safety locks” for rear door
To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors

N00563401135
You can select the functions to unlock the

Using the power door lock switch doors either using the ignition switch posi-
tion or using the gearshift lever (Twin
Clutch SST) position.
These functions are not activated when the
5 vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
vate or deactivate these functions, please
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
“Child safety locks” for rear

Using the ignition switch position door
N00509400233
1- Lock All doors will unlock when the ignition
2- Unlock switch is turned to the “LOCK” position.
Except for vehicles sold in Can-
ada
All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by Using the gearshift lever (Twin
pressing the power door lock switch on the Clutch SST) position
driver’s or the front passenger’s door.
All doors will unlock when the gearshift lever
(Twin Clutch SST) is moved to the “P”
(PARK) position with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position.

Trunk lid
For vehicles sold in Canada WARNING CAUTION

 Always keep the doors tightly closed and  Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
locked when driving. An unlocked door loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
may be accidentally opened by a passen- the exhaust could lead to burns.
ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
To open
from the vehicle in an accident.
5
Operation from outside the vehicle
Trunk lid
N00509501202
Using the remote control transmitter
1- To lock WARNING
2- To release  It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid Press the trunk button (Vehicles with keyless
open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can entry system or F.A.S.T.-key) or OPEN
Child safety locks help prevent rear passen- enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odor- switch (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key). (See
gers, especially children, from opening the less gas that can cause unconsciousness “Keyless entry system” on page 5-7, 5-28 or
and even death. “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
rear door using the inside door handle.
 Do not allow children to have access to the (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-11.)
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk
vided on each rear door. from outside or through the inside of the The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when open the trunk.
rear door cannot be opened using the inside your vehicle is unattended. If trapped in
door handle. the trunk, it is possible to escape from the
To open the rear door when the child safety trunk by using the inside emergency trunk
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out- release lever. (See “Inside emergency
side door handle. trunk lid release” on page 5-38.)
When the lever is in the release position (2),
the child safety lock is released and the rear
door can be opened using the inside door han-
dle.

Inside emergency trunk lid release
Operation from inside the vehicle To close NOTE

 Gas struts (A) are installed in the locations
Pull the trunk lid downward as illustrated illustrated to support the trunk lid. Please
before the trunk lid closes completely. Gently observe the following in order to prevent
slam the trunk lid from the outside so that it is damage or faulty operation.
completely closed. • Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts
when closing the trunk lid.
5 • Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts.
To open the trunk, pull up the trunk lid

release lever, located to the left of the driver’s
seat.
CAUTION
 Do not use the trunk lid release lever while CAUTION
the vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid is  When closing the trunk lid, always ensure
opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto your or other person’s fingers cannot be
the road and cause an accident. caught by the trunk lid. Inside emergency trunk lid
 Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con- release
firm that the trunk lid is locked. If the trunk
NOTE lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects
N00509800178
 The trunk area light comes on when the trunk stored in the trunk could fall out onto the The emergency trunk lid release is designed
lid is opened, and goes out when it is closed. road. to provide a way to open the trunk lid from
 The trunk area light remains illuminated for inside the trunk. It was developed to help pre-
a certain period and then goes off automati- vent death and serious injuries to children
cally. Refer to “Interior light auto-cutout who might become locked inside a vehicle
function (dome light and other lights)” on trunk.
page 5-162.

Theft-alarm system
The emergency trunk lid release lever (see
illustration) is mounted on the trunk lid.
WARNING Theft-alarm system
 People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk, N00510201270
The lever glows in the dark after exposure to even if only for a short period of time, can
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide
sunlight. quickly die from suffocation or heat
stroke, especially on hot days. Interior
protection from unauthorized entry into the
temperatures in vehicles can rise in min- vehicle. This system is operated in three
utes. stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec-
ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-
 Keep your vehicle doors locked and the
trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep armed” stage. If triggered, the system 5
your vehicle keys away from children. provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
nals.
To open the trunk from the inside, move the
lever (A) in the direction of the arrow on the
lever. Push up on the trunk lid to open the CAUTION
trunk and climb out.  Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
system.
Doing so could cause the theft-alarm to mal-
function.
You and your family should familiarize your-
selves with the location and operation of the
emergency trunk lid release lever. Children
should be taught not to play in or around
Armed stage
vehicles.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the
system as described below.
WARNING
 Children should never be left unsuper- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
vised in or around vehicles. position.
 Unsupervised children could lock them- Also, if a key was used to start the engine,
selves in an open vehicle or trunk. CAUTION remove the key from the ignition switch.
 When loading the trunk, place your things so 2. Make sure that the trunk lid and engine
that they will not touch the emergency trunk hood are closed.
lid release lever when you close the trunk. 3. Lock all doors by either the keyless entry
Otherwise you could damage the lever and
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
make it unusable.

Theft-alarm system
 One of the doors is opened without using
Arm the system and leave NOTE the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
 If the engine hood or the trunk lid is open,
key operation.
the theft-alarm indicator (A) illuminates and
 The engine hood or the trunk lid is
the system cannot enter the armed stage. The
system enters the armed stage about 20 sec- opened.
onds after the engine hood or the trunk lid is
closed. Type of alarm
5  The system will be disarmed if, while the
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all
doors are unlocked by the keyless entry sys-
When the alarm is activated:
tem, the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)  The system will be disarmed if, while the
utes.
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the igni-
on the audio panel flashes for confirma- After 3 minutes the headlights automati-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
tion. cally shut off.
 The system will not be armed if a door or the
trunk lid or the engine hood is not com- 2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3
pletely closed. If this happens, rearm the sys- minutes.
tem as described above.
 The theft-alarm system can be activated
Horn sounds!
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
Headlights blink on and off!
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
system to the system armed mode while peo-
ple are riding in the vehicle.
4. The system has entered the armed stage Alarm stage

after about 20 seconds, when the theft-
alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes The alarm will be activated if any of the fol-
slower. lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to the system is armed.
flash while the system is in the armed
stage.

Theft-alarm system
NOTE Disarmed stage NOTE

 The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-  Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will The system will be disarmed if the following not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
automatically shut off to save battery power. ing procedure.
operation is performed.
The system will then be rearmed until the
proper disarming step is taken.  The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
 The alarm will resume if unauthorized
Testing the theft-alarm system
position.
actions are taken again, even if the alarm has
stopped.
 All doors are unlocked by the keyless
Use the following procedure to test the sys-
5
entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key opera-
 While the alarm is operating, a warning is tem:
displayed on the information screen in the
tion.
multi-information display. 1. Lower the driver’s window.
Disarm...by the keyless entry system or 2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
F.A.S.T.-key operation stage”.
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
comes on and flashes for approximately
20 seconds.
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the
driver’s side door by using the inside door
Alarm deactivation lock knob and open the door.
5. Check to be sure that the horn sounds
intermittently and the headlights blink on
The alarm can be deactivated in the following and off when the door is opened.
ways. 6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors
NOTE
by the keyless entry system or the
 By using the keyless entry system or the  If the UNLOCK button is pressed when all
doors are closed and no door is opened F.A.S.T.-key operation.
F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock
the door. within approximately 30 seconds, re-arming
 Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- will automatically occur.
tion.  The amount of time after unlocking until the
vehicle relocks automatically can be
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi

Power windows
Power windows WARNING

N00510800266  Never leave the vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch.
 Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.
Main switch
5 N00548700114
The main switch located on the driver’s door

can be used to operate all door windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operat- 1- Driver’s door window switch
ing the corresponding switch. 2- Front passenger door window switch
Press the switch down to open the window, 3- Left rear door window switch
1- Open (down) and pull up the switch to close it. 4- Right rear door window switch
2- Close (up) If the driver’s door window switch is fully 5- Window lock switch
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
window automatically opens/closes com-
NOTE pletely.
 Never try to operate the main switch and sub If you want to stop the window movement,
switch in different directions at the same operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
time. This will freeze the window in position.
tion.
 Operating the power windows repeatedly
with the engine stopped will run down the
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
WARNING
 Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

SC00000600-3.fm 43 ページ２０１４年４月１６日　水曜日　午後２時６分
Power windows
Sub switch Safety mechanism (Driver’s NOTE

N00548800085
door window only)  The safety mechanism may be activated if
N00528800076
the driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the door window to be subjected to a
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the physical shock similar to that caused by
door window is automatically lowered a little. trapped hand or head.
After the door window is lowered, pull up the  If the safety mechanism is activated 3 or
switch again to close the door window. more times consecutively, the safety mecha-
nism is deactivated and normal closing of the
5
door window will be aborted.
WARNING Use the following method to return to normal
 If the safety mechanism is activated three operation.
or more times successively, the safety
1. If the door window is open, repeatedly
mechanism will be temporarily cancelled.
pull up the power window switch to fully
1- Close (up) If a hand or head subsequently gets
close the door window.
2- Open (down) trapped, a serious injury can result.
2. With fully closing the window, release
 The safety mechanism is deactivated while
the switch and then pull up the switch
the switch is pulled up continuously.
Each sub switch can be used for its own pas- again for about 1 second.
Therefore be especially careful that hands
senger door window, unless the driver’s win- or head are not trapped in the door win-
dow lock switch is activated. dow opening.
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or Lock switch
Timer function head in order to activate the safety mecha- N00549000068
nism. When this switch is in the lock mode, the

N00548900116
Your hands or head could be trapped and
The power windows can be run up or down main switch for passenger door window and
personal injury could result.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- the sub switch cannot be used to open or
tion. close the door window, and the main switch
will open or close only the driver’s door win-
The door windows can be opened or closed CAUTION dow. To unlock the switch, press it again.
for a 30 second period after the ignition  The safety mechanism is deactivated just
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” before the door window closes. This allows
position. However, once the driver’s door or the door window to close completely. There-
the front passenger’s door is opened, the fore be especially careful that fingers are not
power windows cannot be operated. trapped in the door window opening.

SC00000600-3.fm 44 ページ２０１４年４月１６日　水曜日　午後２時６分
Sunroof (if so equipped)

door windows open, open the front door win-
dows as well as the rear door windows to
To open
minimize the condition.
Press the switch (1), the sunroof automati-
cally opens and the sunroof will stop several
Sunroof (if so equipped) centimeters this side of the full open position.
N00511000496 Press the switch (1) again, and the sunroof
will be fully open.
5 WARNING To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch.
 Do not stick your head, hands or anything
1- Lock
else in the sunroof opening. NOTE
 Before operating the sunroof, make sure
2- Unlock  The sunroof stops just before reaching the
that nothing can be trapped (head, hands,
fully open position. If the vehicle is driven
fingers, etc.).
with the sunroof in this position, wind buf-
 Never leave a child (or other person who is feting is lower than with the sunroof fully
WARNING incapable of safely operating the sunroof open.
 Before driving with a child in the vehicle, switch) alone in the vehicle.
be sure to lock the window switch to make
it inoperative. Children tampering with The sunroof can be opened and closed with
the switch could easily trap their hands or
the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
heads in the window.
What to do if you hear wind

buffeting when driving
N00551400014
Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting when driving with one or both
rear door windows down or partially opened.
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
Sunroof (if so equipped)
To close Safety mechanism WARNING

N00544900059  Do not deliberately trap your hands or
Press the switch (3), the sunroof automati- If a hand or head is trapped in the closing head in order to activate the safety mecha-
nism.
cally closes. sunroof opening, the safety mechanism will
Personal injury and malfunction of the
To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch. cause the sunroof to re-open automatically.
sunroof could result.
The opened sunroof will become operational
again after a few seconds.
To tilt up If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or 5
CAUTION
more times consecutively, normal closing of
When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear edge  The safety mechanism is deactivated just
the sunroof will be aborted. before the sunroof closes. This allows the
of sunroof raises for ventilation. As an emergency measure, the sunroof can be sunroof to close completely. Therefore be
closed in small increments until it is com- especially careful that fingers are not trapped
To tilt down pletely closed by repeatedly pressing the in the sunroof opening.
switch (2).
After performing the emergency measure,
Press the switch (3).
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors NOTE
dealer.  When leaving the vehicle unattended, be
Timer function sure to close the sunroof and if a key was
used to start the engine, remove the key from
N00544800029
NOTE the ignition switch.
The sunroof can be operated when the igni-  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
tion switch is in the “ON” position. The sun-  Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro-
driving conditions or other circumstances
zen closed (after snowfall or during extreme
roof can be opened or closed for a 30 seconds cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
cold).
period after the ignition switch is turned to cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
 Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. However, hand or head.
sunroof or roof opening edge.
once the driver’s door or the front passenger’s  Do not apply any force that may cause dam-
door is opened, the sunroof cannot be oper- age to the sunroof.
ated until the ignition switch is turned on WARNING  Release the switch when the sunroof has
again.  The safety mechanism is deactivated while reached a completely open or completely
the switch (2) is pressed continuously. closed position.
Therefore be especially careful that hands
or head are not trapped in the sunroof
opening.

Parking brake
NOTE Sunshade Parking brake

 If the sunroof does not operate when the sun- N00545000028 N00511400360
roof switch is operated, release the switch The sunshade can be opened or closed manu- To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
and check whether something is trapped by ally while the sunroof is closed.
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade
sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a
will also open automatically.
Motors dealer. uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-
tion, for vehicles with a manual transaxle or
5  Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski
carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depend- set the gearshift lever to “P” (PARK) position
ing on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier, on Twin Clutch SST vehicles.
the sunroof may contact the carrier when the
sunroof is tilted up.
 Be sure to close the sunroof completely
To apply
when washing the vehicle or when leaving
the vehicle.
 Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip
(black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If
it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain
a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
 After washing the vehicle or after rain be
sure to wipe off any water that is on the sun- CAUTION
roof before operating it.  Do not attempt to close the sunshade when
 Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the the sunroof is opened.
engine turned off will run down the battery.  Be careful that hands are not trapped when
Operate the sunroof only while the engine is closing the sunshade.
running. 1- Pull the lever up without pushing the
button at the end of hand grip.
NOTE When the parking brake is set and the
 Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos- ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
ing the sunshade. the brake warning light in the instru-
ment cluster will come on.
Before driving, be sure to release the

parking brake.

Steering wheel tilt lock lever
To release CAUTION
 Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning display will appear on
the information screen in the multi-informa-
tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
5
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure. 1- Locked
2- Released
Warning light
1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press and hold the button at the end of
the hand grip.
WARNING
 After adjusting, make sure the lock lever
3- Push the lever downward.
Warning display is secured in the locked (1) position.
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering
When parking on a hill, apply the parking wheel while driving. This can be danger-
brake and turn the front wheels toward the ous.
curb on a downhill grade, away from the curb  When releasing the tilt lock lever {moving
on an uphill grade. it to the position (2)}, be sure to hold the
steering wheel firmly. Otherwise, the
steering wheel may slip down too sud-
denly.
Steering wheel tilt lock lever
N00511500198
To adjust the steering wheel height, release

the tilt lock lever while holding the steering
wheel by hand, and raise or lower the steering
wheel to the desired height.
After adjustment, securely lock the lever by
pulling it upward.
Inside day/night rearview mirror
Inside day/night rearview To adjust the vertical mirror

mirror position
N00548600070
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after It is possible to move the mirror up and down
making any seat adjustments so as to have a to adjust its position.
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
5
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv- To reduce the glare
ing.
Type 1
Type 1
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the

mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
To adjust the mirror position reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
Type 2 left/right to adjust its position.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.

Outside rearview mirrors

Normally, use the automatic mode. When the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
To adjust the mirror position
tion, the reflection factor of the mirror is The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
automatically changed. when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
NOTE Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner mirror you wish to adjust.
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.
5
1- Daytime position
2- Night position Outside rearview mirrors
N00512201258
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after

Type 2 making any seat adjustments so you have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
When the headlights of the vehicles behind
you are very bright, the reflection factor of WARNING
the rearview mirror is automatically changed L- Left outside mirror adjustment
 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
to reduce the glare. view mirrors while driving. This can be
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv- Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
ing. tion.
 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
The objects you see in the mirror will look 1- Up
smaller and farther away than they 2- Down
appear in a regular flat mirror.
3- Right
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
tance of vehicles following you when
4- Left
changing lanes.

Ignition switch
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
NOTE the defogger is on. Manual transaxle Twin Clutch SST
 After adjusting, return the lever to the
The heater will be turned off automatically in
“•”(off) position (C).
about 20 minutes.
To fold the mirror

5 The outside mirror can be folded in toward
the side window to prevent damage when
parking in tight locations.
LOCK
The engine is off and the steering wheel is

locked. The key can be inserted and removed
only when the switch is in this position.
Ignition switch
N00512400572
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

ACC
key]
For information on operations for vehicles Allows operation of electrical accessories
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to with the engine off.
Heated mirror “F.A.S.T.-key: Ignition switch” on page 5-15.
N00549301257
[Except for vehicles equipped with the

ON
When the rear window defogger switch is
pressed with the engine running, the outside F.A.S.T.-key]
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. The engine runs and all accessories can be
Current will flow through the heater element used.
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
condensation.

Ignition switch
START NOTE Twin Clutch SST

• The time until the power cuts out can be
Engages the starter. After the engine starts, changed to about 60 minutes.
release the key and it will return automati- • The ACC power auto-cutout function can
be deactivated.
cally to the “ON” position.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
NOTE 5
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code To remove the key
which the transponder inside the key sends N00550900139
must match the one registered to the immobi- For vehicles with a manual transaxle, when
lizer computer. removing the key, push the key in at the NOTE
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page “ACC” position and keep it depressed until it  For vehicles with a Twin Clutch SST, the key
5-4.) cannot be removed unless the gearshift lever
is turned to the “LOCK” position, and
is set to the “P” (PARK) position, which
remove.
allows the ignition switch to turn to the
ACC power auto-cutout func- “LOCK” position.
Manual transaxle
tion
N00539601101
CAUTION
After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the  Do not remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch in the “ACC” position, the ignition switch while driving. The steering
function automatically cuts out the power for wheel will lock, causing loss of control.
the audio system and other electric devices  If the engine is turned off while driving, the
that can be operated with that position. power brake booster will stop functioning
When the ignition switch is turned from and braking efficiency will be reduced. Also,
“ACC” to the “ON” position, the power is the power steering system will not function
and it will require greater effort to manually
supplied again to those devices.
For vehicles with a Twin Clutch SST, when steer the vehicle.
removing the key, first set the gearshift lever  Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
NOTE to the “P” (PARK) position, and then turn the a long time when the engine is not running.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: key to the “LOCK” position and remove it. This will cause the battery to run down.

Steering wheel lock
CAUTION To lock Starting and stopping the

 Do not turn the key to the “START” position
when the engine is running. It will damage
engine
Remove the key at the “LOCK” position. N00542100073
the starter motor.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
Tips for starting
Steering wheel lock To unlock
5 N00512500010  Do not operate the starter motor continu-
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- Turn the key to the “ACC” position while
key] moving the steering wheel slightly. could run the battery down or damage the
For information on operations for vehicles starter motor. If the engine does not start,
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to turn the ignition switch back to the
“F.A.S.T.-key: Steering wheel lock” on page CAUTION “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds,
5-19.  Remove the key when leaving the vehicle. and then try again. Trying repeatedly with
the engine or starter motor still turning
[Except for vehicles equipped with the will damage the starter mechanism.
F.A.S.T.-key] NOTE  If the engine will not start because the bat-
 If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft tery is weak or discharged, refer to
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn “Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
the key from “LOCK” position to “ACC” for instructions.
position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to
 The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
the left or to the right as you turn the key.
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant
temperature display starts to move. Driv-
ing before the bar graph moves may cause
deterioration of turbocharger performance
and driveability. A longer warm up period
will only consume extra fuel.
 On vehicles equipped with the Twin
Clutch SST, the following may occur after
the engine is started, but they do not indi-
cate an abnormality.

Starting and stopping the engine

• You may hear operational sounds of the For information on operation for vehicles 6. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
Twin Clutch SST and you may feel equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
vibration in the vehicle body. “F.A.S.T.-key: Starting the engine” on page position.
• If you shift the gearshift lever into the 5-19. On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, make
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and depress sure the gearshift lever is in the “P”
the accelerator pedal, increases in the [Except for vehicles equipped with the (PARK) position.
engine speed will be limited. F.A.S.T.-key]
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni- NOTE
cally controlled fuel injection system, which  On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the
5
WARNING automatically controls the release of fuel. starter will not operate unless the gearshift
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly There is usually no need to depress the accel- lever is in the “P” (PARK) position or the
ventilated area any longer than is needed erator pedal when starting the engine. gearshift lever is in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
The starter should not be run for more than position with the brake pedal depressed.
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
extremely poisonous, could build up and
15 seconds at a time.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds (PARK) position so that the wheels are
cause serious injury or death.
between attempts to restart the engine. locked.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly

CAUTION seated with seat belts fastened.
7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
 Do not push-start the vehicle. tion and make certain that all warning
2. Insert the ignition key. lights are functioning properly before
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
3. Make sure the parking brake is applied. starting the engine.
at high speeds until the engine has had a
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
chance to warm up.
your right foot. position without pressing the accelerator
 Release the ignition switch as soon as the
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor 5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way pedal. Release the key when the engine
will be damaged. down (manual transaxle). starts.
NOTE When the engine is hard to start

Starting the engine  For models equipped with a manual trans-
N00542201172 axle, the starter will not operate unless the
clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- After several attempts, you may experience
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- that the engine still does not start.
lock). This is a safety feature.
key]

Starting and stopping the engine

Startability of Twin Clutch SST Stopping the engine
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
window defogger, are turned off. vehicle with ambient temperature N00542300075
of -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. While depressing the brake pedal on vehi-
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
cles equipped with Twin Clutch SST or
depressing the brake pedal.
the clutch pedal on the vehicles equipped When the ambient temperature is -22 °F
3. For vehicles with a manual transaxle, turn
with manual transaxle, press the accelera- (-30 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tor pedal halfway and hold it there, then start from a standstill even with the gearshift
5 crank the engine. Release the accelerator lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
tion to stop the engine, and then move the
gearshift lever to the 1st (on a uphill) or
pedal, immediately after the engine starts. (REVERSE) position.
“R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) position.
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, place
could be flooded with too much gasoline. mission has not warmed up sufficiently; it
the gearshift lever in the “P” (PARK)
While depressing the brake pedal on vehi- does not indicate a problem. If it occurs,
position, and then turn the ignition switch
cles equipped with Twin Clutch SST or place the gearshift lever in the “P” (PARK)
to the “LOCK” position to stop the
the clutch pedal on the vehicles equipped position and let the engine idle for at least
engine.
with manual transaxle, push the accelera- 10 minutes.
tor pedal all the way down and hold it The transmission will warm up, and you will
there, then crank the engine for 5 to 6 sec- be able to start normally.
onds. Return the ignition switch to the Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
“LOCK” position and release the acceler- operation.
ator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and then
crank the engine again for 5 to 6 seconds
while depressing the brake pedal or the
Idle speed in high altitude area
N00547600031
clutch pedal, but do not push the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the ignition key if the At high altitude locations, the idle speed may
engine starts. If the engine fails to start, be higher. This is done in order to stabilize
repeat these procedures. If the engine still the idle speed when the power steering sys-
will not start, contact your local tem and other systems operate. It does not
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- indicate a malfunction.
ity of your choice for assistance.

Turbocharger operation
NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, the  If the temperature inside the engine compart-  Do not stop the engine immediately after
engine will stop and the vehicle power will ment is high, the cooling fans (A) will con- high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the
turn off approximately 1 second after the tinue to operate for some time even if the engine to idle to give the turbocharger a
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” engine is stopped. chance to cool down.
position. Therefore, the operation sound of the cooling  Engine oil must be properly maintained to
fans may be heard even after the engine is avoid engine and/or turbocharger damage.
The reason for this is that, in the time from
when the ignition switch is turned to the
stopped. This sound is normal and does not
indicate a malfunction.
To better protect your engine and turbo-
charger, use fully synthetic engine oil.
5
“LOCK” position until the engine stops, the After operating for a period of time, the cool-
gears inside the Twin Clutch SST disengage ing fans will stop automatically.
so that the engine will start smoothly the Turbocharger
next time it is started.
Two clutches installed in the Twin Clutch
The turbocharger increases engine power by
SST alternately engage and disengage to
pushing large amounts of air into the engine’s
achieve smooth shifting.
In addition, the gear on the side with the free cylinders. The finned parts inside the turbo-
clutch is engaged, therefore, quick shifting is charger turn at extremely high speeds and are
performed. subjected to extremely high temperatures.
If the engine was stopped with the gear They are lubricated by engine oil and cooled
engaged like this, it would provide resistance by engine oil and coolant. If the engine oil is
the next time the engine is started. Therefore, not replaced at the specified intervals, the
the gear disengages in the approximately 1- bearings may seize or emit abnormal noise.
second period until the engine stops.
 For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, do not
operate the gearshift lever or the accelerator
pedal for approximately 1 second until the Turbocharger operation
engine stops. N00537300077
CAUTION
 Do not run the engine at high speeds (for
example, by revving it or by accelerating
rapidly) immediately after starting it.

Clutch pedal operation (if so equipped)

 On hills and other gradients, do not hold
the vehicle in position by slipping the Manual transaxle (if so
clutch without using the brakes. equipped)
 Make sure the space under the clutch N00512700139
pedal is free of objects that could obstruct
the pedal. The shift pattern below is shown on the gear-
shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way
down while shifting gears.
5 CAUTION
 If the clutch is engaged suddenly while the
engine revolution is high, an extremely large
1- Air compressor load will be applied instantaneously to the
2- Compressed air power train, possibly leading to the breakage
of that component. Please ensure, therefore,
3- Cylinder
that the clutch pedal is always applied in a
4- Turbo fin
slow yet firm manner.
5- Turbine
6- Exhaust gas
NOTE
 Your vehicle has a special feature to reduce
Clutch pedal operation (if so the impact into the power train and to reduce
equipped) the load of the clutch disk; the engine revolu-
tion doesn’t rise more than around 5,500 rpm
NOTE
N00537700042
while the vehicle is stationary and the clutch  During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-
pedal has been depressed. cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed
Observe the following cautions when using up. This is normal and not harmful to the
the clutch pedal. Not observing them could  If either of the following occurs, the clutch
transaxle.
should be inspected by a Mitsubishi Motors
result in rapid clutch wear or in clutch dam-
dealer or a repair facility of your choice:
age.
• The pedal stroke until clutch disengage-
 Press the clutch pedal all the way down ment suddenly increases. To start
while shifting gears. • The engine revs when the clutch is not dis-
engaged. Press the clutch pedal all the way down and
 Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way
down before starting the engine. shift into 1st. Then gradually release the
 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

clutch pedal while depressing the accelerator
Upshifting Recommended downshifting speed
pedal.
N00512900144
For the best fuel economy and performance in Downshifting speed Shift point
CAUTION using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed
 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal Under 20 mph Shift down from cur-
below.
because this will cause premature clutch (32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear.
wear or damage.
Shift point Upshift speeds 20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur-
 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position
(illegal in many states). 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear. 5
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
because this can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks. 3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)
Driving precautions
N00513100156
4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)  The table below shows the maximum rec-
ommended driving speed for in each gear.
NOTE Do not drive near or at these speeds for
 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the Downshifting prolonged periods of time.
clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then N00513000096
be easier.
It is recommended that you downshift to a
lower gear when needed to maintain the
Maximum possible driving speed
desired speed, according to the table.
Proper shift points Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The Shift Maximum possible driving
N00537400049
engine may suffer damage. points speed
Always use care to change the gear with the To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake 1st gear 37 mph (60 km/h)
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed. life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-
Proper shifting will improve fuel economy ing a steep hill. 2nd gear 55 mph (90 km/h)
and prolong engine life. Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug- 3rd gear 74 mph (120 km/h)
ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as 4th gear 99 mph (160 km/h)
CAUTION when turning a corner or when driving up a
 Avoid downshifting that may cause the
steep hill.
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a han-
tachometer pointer to enter the red zone. drest. This can result in premature wear of
This puts the engine at risk of being dam-
the transaxle shift forks.
aged.

Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift Transmission) (if so equipped)

2. Move the gearshift lever to the desired
Twin Clutch SST (Spor- position.
NOTE
tronic Shift Transmission) (if  In the main shift gate, the gearshift lever has
4 positions.
so equipped) NOTE  For information on manual shift gate opera-
N00539700017  The gearshift lever cannot be moved from tion, please refer to “Manual shift” on page
“P” (PARK) to another position if the igni- 5-64.
The Twin Clutch SST is a transmission that, tion switch is at the “LOCK” or “ACC” posi-
5 through integrated control of the engine and
transmission, is able to achieve both the
tion, or the key has been removed, or if the
brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
smooth shifting of an automatic transaxle and
the acceleration and fuel economy close to a
The Twin Clutch SST has 6 forward gears
manual transaxle. In addition, the control
and 1 reverse gear.
mode can be selected from three types to suit
The individual gears are selected automati-
the driving conditions.
cally, depending on the position of the gear-
Together with manual shifting, the transmis-
shift lever, the speed of the vehicle and the
sion is capable of responding to a variety of
position of the accelerator pedal.
driving circumstances.
The gearshift lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
Twin Clutch SST control mode  P.5-62 shift gate (B) and the manual shift gate (C).
Manual shift  P.5-64
Gearshift lever operation

N00539800063
The pull-ring (D) must be pulled
up while the brake pedal is
As an additional safety precaution, models depressed to move the gearshift
equipped with a Twin Clutch SST have a lever.
shift-lock device that holds the gearshift lever
in the “P” (PARK) position. To move the The gearshift lever will move
gearshift lever from the “P” (PARK) position without pulling up the pull-ring
to another position, follow the steps below. (D).
The pull-ring (D) must be pulled
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down. up to move the gearshift lever.

WARNING Gearshift lever position display When the gearshift lever position
 If the pull-ring is always pulled up when N00539900077 display blinks
using the gearshift lever, the gearshift When the ignition switch is turned to the N00563000017
lever may be accidentally shifted into the
“ON” position, the gearshift lever position is When the gearshift lever is placed in the “R”
“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
shown on the multi-information display. (REVERSE) position, the gearshift lever
Do not pull up the pull-ring when making
position display on the multi-information dis-
shifts shown by in the illustration.
play may blink and the vehicle will not move
 Always depress the brake pedal when
because the gears in the transmission have 5
shifting the gearshift lever into the other
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N” not engaged.
(NEUTRAL) position. If this occurs, perform the following proce-
When beginning to drive, do not shift the dure.
gearshift lever from the “P” (PARK) or
“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress- 1. Depress the brake pedal with your right
ing the accelerator pedal. Doing so is dan- foot and place the gearshift lever in the
gerous because the vehicle will “jump” “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
forward or backward. 2. Place the gearshift lever in the “R”
(REVERSE) position, and confirm that
In addition, when the vehicle is driven with the gearshift lever position display stops
NOTE the gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE) posi- blinking.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustration, tion, the forward gear number is shown. 3. Repeat 1 and 2 above if the gearshift lever
depress the brake pedal before moving the position display continues to blink.
gearshift lever. If you attempt to move the
gearshift lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the gearshift lever will be immovable. through
WARNING
 Do not accelerate immediately after moving  To avoid unintended vehicle movement,
the gearshift lever. It may take some time for keep brake pedal applied with your right
the transmission to shift to the selected gear. foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the gearshift lever position
 When the gearshift lever is operated when
display is blinking.
the Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature is
low, the time required to shift to the selected
gear may be longer than usual.

If the gearshift lever position dis- When the warning display or the warn- CAUTION
play is not showing ing display appears on the information screen
 If the warning display is shown, such as
N00562500031
in the multi-information display while you
when the vehicle does not accelerate while
are driving, take the following measures.
There may be a problem in the Twin Clutch traveling even if the accelerator pedal is
SST. depressed, the vehicle may not be able to be
If this occurs, the safety device operates and When warning display is show- driven normally.
prevents the vehicle from moving. Therefore, ing For safety, pay attention to your surround-
5 perform the following procedure. N00543100070
ings when driving the vehicle.
The temperature of the Twin Clutch SST fluid

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop
is high. NOTE
the engine.
If this occurs, take one of the following mea-
2. Restart the engine.  If the vehicle is continuously driven on hilly
sures. roads or in an aggressive manner involving
If the gearshift lever position display is high engine rpm, sudden acceleration and/or
 Reduce the vehicle speed.
shown and the vehicle can move after this deceleration, the vehicle transmission may
 Stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the vibrate.
procedure is performed, there is no malfunc- gearshift lever in the “P” (PARK) posi- This vibration is to alert the driver that the
tion. tion, and then open the engine hood with Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature has risen.
If the gearshift lever position display is not the engine running to cool the engine. It does not indicate a malfunction.
shown and the vehicle cannot move, or if this If this occurs, perform the same measures for
problem occurs repeatedly, have the vehicle
After a while, check that the warning dis- when the warning appears. If the vibra-
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as play has gone out. tion stops, the vehicle can be driven nor-
If the display goes out, the vehicle can be mally.
soon as possible.
driven normally.
If the warning display remains on or comes If vehicle is driven with warning dis-
Warning display on frequently, have the vehicle checked by an played
N00540000065 authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice. If the vehicle continues to be driven after the
or warning display appears, and the tempera-
ture of the Twin Clutch SST fluid continues
to rise, the transmission protection control
may operate and cause the transmission to


function as if the gearshift lever was in the If this occurs, perform the following proce-
“N” (NEUTRAL) position. dure.
Gearshift lever positions (Main
(At this time, the vehicle temporarily cannot shift gate)
be driven.) 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop N00540100040
If this occurs, take the following measures. the engine.

2. Restart the engine. “P” PARK
1. Depress the brake pedal and stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place. If the warning display goes out, there is no
2. Place the gearshift lever in the “P” abnormal condition.
This position locks the transmission to pre- 5
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
(PARK) position, and then open the However, if the warning display remains on be started from the “PARK” position.
engine hood with the engine running to or comes on frequently, have the vehicle
cool the engine. checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
“R” REVERSE
3. After a while, check that the warning
display has gone out, and then stop the soon as possible.
Move the lever to this position only after the
engine if the warning display has gone vehicle has come to a complete stop.
out. CAUTION
4. If the engine can be restarted, the vehicle  If the warning display is shown, such as
can be driven normally. CAUTION
when the vehicle does not accelerate while
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
traveling even if the accelerator pedal is
If the warning display remains on or comes (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
depressed, the vehicle may not be able to be
on frequently, have the vehicle checked by an motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P”
driven normally.
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a For safety, pay attention to your surround-
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
repair facility of your choice. ings when driving the vehicle.
may be damaged.
When warning display is show-

ing “N” NEUTRAL
N00543200042
A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has At this position, the transmission is disen-
been activated due to a possible malfunction gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
in the Twin Clutch SST or in the engine elec- a manual transaxle and should be used when
tronic control module. the vehicle is not moving for an extended


length of time during driving, such as in a Twin Clutch
traffic jam.
CAUTION
 Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position
SST control Characteristic
from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the mode
WARNING vehicle is in motion. Control mode for normal
 Never move the gearshift lever to the “N” If the lever is shifted into the “D” (DRIVE) Normal driving on local roads, free-
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since from the “R” (REVERSE) position while the (Control ways, and the like.
you could accidentally slip it into the “P” vehicle is in motion, the transmission may be
mode when Smooth shifting is per-
5 (PARK) or “R”(REVERSE) position and
the engine speed could rise, damaging the
damaged.
engine is formed at low engine speeds
transmission. started) for economical driving with
good ride quality.
 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when NOTE
stopped on a slope, the engine should be  For information on manual shift gate opera- Control mode for driving on
started in the “P” (PARK) position. tion, please refer to “Manual shift” on page mountain roads, roads with
Although the engine can be started when 5-64. uphill and downhill slopes,
the vehicle is in the “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- and freeways with long
 When the engine is cold, upshifts occur at a
tion, for safety reasons, do not start the
higher vehicle speed than when the engine is downhill slopes where
engine in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
warm. engine braking is necessary.
 Always keep your foot on the brake pedal This control is performed to quickly warm
when the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL)
Compared to “Normal”
up the engine. It does not indicate a malfunc- Sport mode, shifting occurs at
position, or when shifting into or out of tion. After the vehicle has been driven for a
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, to prevent roll- higher engine speeds and is
while, upshifts will occur at the regular
ing. engine speeds.
quicker. In addition, quick
downshifting is possible
when the accelerator pedal
“D” DRIVE Twin Clutch SST control mode
is depressed for quick accel-
eration or when the brakes
N00540200083
This position is used for most city and high- are applied.
Select the control mode from the following
way driving. Engine shifting and braking are
three types to suit the driving conditions.
done automatically as needed, depending on
road conditions.


Twin Clutch NOTE Twin Clutch SST control mode
SST control Characteristic  When continuously driving on closed circuit switch
mode racetracks or at other locations where the N00540300013
In the “S-Sport” mode, engine is operated at high speeds and under a

When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
shifting occurs at higher heavy load, the Twin Clutch SST fluid tem-
perature will have a tendency to rise.
position, operate the Twin Clutch SST control
engine speeds and is even mode switch (A) to change the control mode.
In this case, if the temperature rises too high,
quicker than in the “Sport”
S-Sport mode. the warning display will appear on the 5
(Super Sport) “S-Sport” mode is designed information screen in the multi-information
to be used while driving on display to alert the driver.
closed circuit tracks. Do not If the warning display appears, be sure to
use this mode on public refer to “Warning display” on page 5-60 and
roads. follow the appropriate measures.
 The Twin Clutch SST control mode can be
selected both when “D” range operation is
NOTE selected and when manual shifting is
 Damage to your vehicle caused by racing selected.
and/or driving on closed circuit tracks will  If you select “Sport” mode or “S-Sport”
not be covered under warranty. Please review mode while the engine is cold, the transmis-
the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE sion may shift up at different speeds com- When the engine is started, the control mode
MANUAL: NEW VEHICLE LIMITED pared to that when the engine is warm. is automatically set to the “Normal” mode.
WARRANTY”. This is simply the operation of the control Use the following procedures to change the
system to warm the engine quickly. It does control mode.
not indicate a malfunction.
 For slippery road surfaces, such as roads To shift from “Normal” mode to “Sport”
with accumulated snow, “Normal” mode is mode
recommended for smooth shifting at low
engine speeds. While the vehicle is stopped or being driven,
push the Twin Clutch SST control mode
switch forward.

To shift from “Sport” mode to “S-Sport” Twin Clutch SST control mode
mode display
N00540400098
While the vehicle is stopped, push the Twin
Clutch SST control mode switch forward and When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
hold it for 3 seconds or more. position, the currently selected control mode
is displayed on the multi-information display.
5 CAUTION
 For safety reasons, shift from the “Sport”
mode to the “S-Sport” mode only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To shift from “S-Sport” mode to “Sport”

mode or
To shift from “Sport” mode to “Normal” Shifting can be performed even while the
mode accelerator pedal is depressed.
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven, This allows the driver to enjoy sporty driving,
push the Twin Clutch SST control mode such as quick cornering, by nimbly down-
switch rearward. shifting to reduce vehicle speed just before
entering a curve.
Manual shift
NOTE N00540500057
 If the Twin Clutch SST control mode switch Using the gearshift lever (A) or the sportronic
CAUTION
is continuously pressed after a control mode steering wheel shifters (B), shifting can be  When manually shifting while the vehicle is
has been selected, an erroneous operation being driven, select the correct shift position
performed manually.
prevention function operates and the control to control the engine speed so that the
mode is automatically set to the “Normal” tachometer indicator does not enter the red
mode. zone.
If you would like to select a control mode  Sudden engine braking and rapid accelera-
again, return the ignition switch to the tion can cause the vehicle to skid. Shift down
“ACC” or “LOCK” position and restart the according to road conditions and vehicle
engine. Then, push the Twin Clutch SST speed.
control mode switch.

CAUTION Shifting using the gearshift lever

 If both the left and right sportronic steering N00540600016 SHIFT DOWN
wheel shifters are operated at the same time,
Selecting manual shifting
the transmission may not change gears.
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven,
move the gearshift lever from the “D” SHIFT UP
NOTE (DRIVE) position in the main shift gate
 Only the forward gears 1 to 6 can be toward the driver’s seat to select manual 5
selected. shifting.
To reverse or park, place the gearshift lever
in the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) posi-
tion.
 During manual shifting, downshifting will be NOTE
performed automatically when the vehicle  After manual shifting is selected using the
slows down and the transmission will down- gearshift lever, shifting up and down can also
shift to 1st gear before the vehicle stops. be performed using the sportronic steering
 If the gearshift lever or sportronic steering wheel shifters.
wheel shifters are operated repeatedly, the
transmission will also shift repeatedly. Returning to “D” range operation
 In order to ensure driving performance,
upshifting may not occur depending on the Move the gearshift lever toward the front pas-
vehicle speed even if the gearshift lever or senger’s seat to return to automated shifting.
sportronic steering wheel shifters are oper-
ated. In addition, in order to prevent exces- Shifting up and shifting down
sive engine speed, the buzzer sounds and
downshifting may not occur depending on Each time the gearshift lever is pulled rear-
the vehicle speed even if the gearshift lever ward, the transmission shifts up 1 gear.
or sportronic steering wheel shifters are In addition, each time the gearshift lever is
operated. pushed forward, the transmission shifts down
 When driving in an aggressive manner 1 gear.
involving high engine rpm, sudden accelera-
tion and/or deceleration, the Twin Clutch
SST could take longer to shift due to higher
fluid temperatures.

NOTE - (SHIFT DOWN) + (SHIFT UP) Shifting down

 When the gearshift lever is moved to the “D”
(DRIVE) position from the manual shift Each time the - (SHIFT DOWN) sportronic
gate, it may automatically select a gear dif- steering wheel shifter is pulled, the transmis-
ferent from the gear selected during manual sion shifts down 1 gear.
shifting depending on vehicle speed or driv-
ing conditions.
5
Shifting using the sportronic steer-
ing wheel shifters
N00540700017
Selecting manual shifting
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven

with the gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE) Shifting up
position, manual shifting can be selected by
Each time the + (SHIFT UP) sportronic steer-
pulling one of the sportronic steering wheel
ing wheel shifter is pulled, the transmission
NOTE
shifters toward you.  After manual shifting is selected using the
shifts up 1 gear.
sportronic steering wheel shifters, shifting up
and down can also be performed using the
gearshift lever.
Returning to “D” range operation
When the gearshift lever is in the “D”

(DRIVE) position, pull the + (SHIFT UP)
sportronic steering wheel shifter toward you
for 2 seconds or more to return to “D” range
operation.

Manual shift display CAUTION

N00543000095  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot.
In manual shift, the currently selected gear is Using the left foot could cause driver move-
displayed on the multi-information display. ment delay in case of an emergency.
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
the engine at high rpms when shifting from
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
through
tion.
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the
5
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
affect braking efficiency, may cause prema-
ture wear of brake pads and may cause
NOTE engine damage.
 If manual shifting is selected using the spor-  Use the gearshift lever in the correct shift
tronic steering wheel shifters when the gear- position in accordance with driving condi-
shift lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) position, tions.
the transmission will automatically return to Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
“D” range operation before the vehicle stops. ing shift position {“D” (DRIVE) or manual
 When the transmission returns to “D” range shifting} or coast forward in the “R”
operation from manual shifting, it may auto- Operation of the Twin Clutch (REVERSE) position.
matically shift up or down from the gear SST Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
selected using manual shifting depending on N00540800034
and steering effort could lead to an accident.
the vehicle speed or driving conditions.  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
 If manual shifting is selected using the spor- CAUTION pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
tronic steering wheel shifters, “D” range This can cause sudden acceleration and dam-
 Before selecting a position with the engine
operation will again be selected by moving age the Twin Clutch SST.
running and the vehicle stationary, fully
the gearshift lever from the “D” (DRIVE) Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
position toward the driver’s seat, then return while holding down the brake pedal with the
cle from creeping.
it toward the front passenger’s seat. gearshift lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
Do not release the brakes until you are ready
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
to drive away. The vehicle will begin to
as when performing the same operation with
move as soon as the Twin Clutch SST is
the gearshift lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
engaged.
position.


position. This function assists engine braking
Passing acceleration CAUTION efforts, reducing the need for using the ser-
N00540900019  Do not use the tendency of the vehicle to
vice brakes.
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) creep forward in order to drive at low speeds
position (when passing another vehicle) push up hills.
the accelerator to the floor if it is safe to do so The transmission may be damaged and an Waiting
accident may occur due to the following con- N00541000046
in traffic conditions. The Twin Clutch SST
ditions.
will automatically downshift. For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
5 • The Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature
will rise and can cause transmission dam-
lights, the vehicle can be left in gearshift
lever position and held stationary with the
NOTE age.
• If the vehicle is continuously driven at low
service brake.
 In manual shift, downshifts do not take place
when the accelerator is depressed all the way speeds using the tendency of the vehicle to For longer waiting periods with the engine
to the floor. creep forward, the vehicle will vibrate or running, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
the warning display will appear on the
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
information screen in the multi-information
Uphill/downhill driving display to alert the driver that the Twin
with the service brake.
N00541600042 Clutch SST fluid temperature has risen. Prior to moving off after having stopped the
After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid vehicle, make sure that the gearshift lever is
DRIVING UPHILL temperature rises even higher, the transmis- in “D” (DRIVE) position or manual shift
sion protection control will operate. position.
The Twin Clutch SST may not upshift to a If this occurs, the vehicle may suddenly
higher shift position if the computer deter- reverse as if the gearshift lever was in the
mines the current speed cannot be maintained “N” (NEUTRAL) position and cause an
CAUTION
once a higher shift position is engaged. accident.  Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
For smoother vehicle performance, if you the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
If the warning display appears or the ation may occur if the gearshift lever is in a
release the throttle while climbing a steep transmission protection control operates, position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
grade, the Twin Clutch SST may not upshift.
refer to “When warning display is (NEUTRAL).
This is normal, as the computer is temporarily
showing” on page 5-60.  Do not keep the vehicle in a stopped position
preventing shifting. After reaching the top of on an uphill slope by depressing the acceler-
the hill, normal shift function will resume. ator pedal instead of the brake pedal.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
The transmission may be damaged and an
When traveling down steep grades, the com- accident may occur due to the following con-
puter may automatically select a lower shift ditions.


Refer to “Engine malfunction indicator
CAUTION What to do if the following occur
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
• The Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature with the Twin Clutch SST engine light”)” on page 5-121 and follow the
will rise and can cause transmission dam- N00541200077
appropriate measures.
age.
If there is a malfunction in the Twin Clutch
• If the vehicle is kept in a stopped position When the gearshift lever position display
SST or engine electronic control module, the
by depressing the accelerator pedal instead
following may occur. is not showing
of the brake pedal, the vehicle will vibrate
or the warning display will appear on  Twin Clutch SST does not shift. A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has 5
the information screen in the multi-infor-  Vehicle cannot move. been activated due to a possible malfunction
mation display to alert the driver that the  Twin Clutch SST acceleration is slow. in the Twin Clutch SST.
Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature has  Vehicle does not creep. Refer to “If the gearshift lever position dis-
risen. play is not showing” on page 5-60 and follow
 “Shift shock” is large.
After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid the appropriate measures.
 Shifting occurs at higher engine speed.
temperature rises even higher, the transmis-
sion protection control will operate.  Response is slow.
If this occurs, the vehicle may suddenly When warning display is showing or
reverse as if the gearshift lever was in the If any of these occurs, perform the following
when no warning is showing in the multi-
“N” (NEUTRAL) position and cause an procedure.
information display
accident.
If the warning display appears or the When warning display is showing A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has
transmission protection control operates, been activated due to a possible malfunction
The temperature of Twin Clutch SST fluid is in the Twin Clutch SST or in the engine elec-
refer to “When warning display is high.
showing” on page 5-60.
tronic control module.
Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-60 and
follow the appropriate measures. Perform the following procedure.
Parking
N00541100018 When the engine malfunction indicator 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check the engine.
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake, engine light”) comes on or blinking 2. Restart the engine.
and then move the gearshift lever to the “P”
There could be a malfunction in the engine If the vehicle moves and accelerates normally
(PARK) position.
electronic control module. after this procedure is performed, there is no
malfunction.

All-wheel drive system

However, if the vehicle does not move or tions as are suitable for ordinary front-wheel
accelerate normally, or if this problem occurs drive vehicles.
CAUTION
 Always use tires of the same size, same type,
repeatedly, have the vehicle checked by an
and same brand, and which have no wear dif-
repair facility of your choice as soon as possi-
Cautions on handling of all- ferences. Using tires that differ in size, type,
brands or the degree of wear, will increase
ble. wheel drive vehicles the differential oil temperature, resulting in
N00530800174 possible damage to the driving system. Fur-
5 CAUTION ther, the drive train will be subjected to
 When the Twin Clutch SST fluid tempera- Tires and wheels excessive loading, possibly leading to oil
leakage, component seizure, or other serious
ture is high, the engine idle speed when the
problems.
vehicle is stopped may increase or the vehi- Since driving torque can be applied to all four
cle will have a weak tendency to creep.
wheels, the performance of the vehicle when
After that, if the Twin Clutch SST fluid tem-
operating in all-wheel drive is greatly
perature rises even higher, the warning affected by the condition of the tires.
Towing
display will appear.
Pay close attention to the tires.
 Install specified tires on all wheels. Refer

All-wheel drive system to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
N00516400020
 Be sure to fit all four tires and wheels of
All-wheel drive vehicles are propelled by the same size and type.
engine power distributed constantly and When replacement of any of the tires or
appropriately to all four wheels. wheels is necessary, replace all of them.
Not only does this ensure enhanced handling  All tires should be rotated whenever the
on dry, paved roads but also permits better wear difference between the front and rear
traction when driving on slippery, wet or tires is recognizable.
snow-covered roads and when moving out of
mud. Good vehicle performance cannot be
These vehicles, however, are not designed expected if there is a difference in wear
for off-road use, and are unsuitable for between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on
driving on bumpy ground that may cause page 9-18.
excessive strain. All-wheel drive vehicles
should be driven only under the same condi-  Check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control)

Please read this section in conjunction with and power drive distribution of the center dif-
CAUTION the following sections. ferential.
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
ACD (Active center differential system) 
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
P.5-71 NOTE
or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. AYC (Active yaw control system)  P.5-71  If the parking brake lever is pulled up while
If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type Anti-lock braking system  P.5-74 the vehicle is moving, the center differential
C or Type D equipment. Active stability control (ASC)  P.5-76 is designed to switch to a free state condition
which will allow the rear wheel to lock eas-
5
CAUTION ier.
Jacking up all-wheel drive vehi-  Do not over-rely on the S-AWC. Even the S-
cles AWC cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle. This sys- AYC (Active yaw control sys-
tem, like any other system, has limits and tem)
cannot help you to maintain traction and con-
WARNING trol of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reck-
N00541500012
 Do not start or run the engine while the less driving can lead to accidents. It is the The AYC is a system, with a left-right differ-
vehicle is on the jack. driver’s responsibility to drive carefully. ential limiting function and yaw control func-
The jack could slip out of position and This means taking into account the traffic, tion, that enhances cornering performance
result in an accident. road and environmental conditions. and stability during cornering by controlling
 Be sure to use tires that are the same speci- the left-right drive power difference of the
fied size, type, and brand, and have no differ- rear wheels, the braking force of all four
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel ence in the amount of wear for all four wheels, and the vehicle yaw moment.
wheels. Otherwise, the S-AWC may not
Control) work properly.
N00541300036 CAUTION
S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics  Control of the braking force does not
control system that helps enhance driving ACD (Active center differential enhance the stopping performance of the
performance, cornering performance, and vehicle, therefore, pay careful attention to
vehicle stability over a wide range of driving
system) the safety of your surroundings when driv-
N00541400011 ing.
conditions through integrated management of
the ACD, the AYC, the anti-lock braking sys- The ACD is a system that improves accelera-
tem, and the active stability control (ASC). tion performance and straight-ahead stability
by regulating the differential limiting action

Left-right differential limiting S-AWC

function control Operation
mode
The left-right differential limiting function is Normally, use this control
a function that enhances driving performance TARMAC mode. Use this mode for paved
and vehicle stability by preventing idle spin- roads.
ning of a wheel when driving on slippery Use this control mode when
5 road surfaces or when the road surfaces of the driving on somewhat slippery
GRAVEL
left and right wheels are different. road surfaces, such as wet road
surfaces and gravel roads.
Yaw control function Use this control mode when
driving on slippery road sur-
NOTE
SNOW  The control mode can be changed while the
The yaw control function is a function that faces, such as snow-covered
vehicle is moving.
enhances vehicle cornering performance by roads.
 The selected control mode is stored in mem-
controlling the drive power difference of the ory even if the engine is stopped.
left and right wheels and the braking force However, if a battery terminal is discon-
when the vehicle does not turn in response to
S-AWC control mode switch nected, the control mode stored in memory
steering input, such as when the steering will be erased and the control mode will be
wheel is turned quickly or when driving on When the ignition switch is set to the “ON” set to the “TARMAC” mode.
slippery road surfaces. position, operate the AWC switch to change
the control mode.
Each time the switch is pushed, the control S-AWC control mode display
S-AWC control mode mode changes in the order “TARMAC” 
N00542401057
“GRAVEL”  “SNOW”  “TARMAC”.
Select the control mode from the following
three types to suit the driving conditions.
Example: “TARMAC” mode is selected.


The currently selected control mode is dis-
Display example WARNING
played on the multi-information display.
 Always concentrate on your driving first.
In addition, when the control mode is
The S-AWC operation status is displayed. Keep your eyes and mind on the road. Dis-
changed, the selected mode appears on the
tractions while driving can lead to an acci-
interrupt display screen of the information dent.
screen in the multi-information display.
The control mode display will appear on the
information screen for a few seconds, and
then the original screen will return.
S-AWC warning display 5
N00542600049
When there is a malfunction in the system,

CAUTION
 The S-AWC control mode display may flash the warning display will appear on the
under aggressive driving conditions. information screen in the multi-information
At this time, S-AWC control is temporarily display.
suspended in order to protect the S-AWC In addition, the S-AWC control mode display
device, but this will not affect normal driv- AYC operation display in section A will go out at the same time.
ing. The amount of the yaw moment added by
After the vehicle is driven for a while, if the AYC is displayed as a bar graph.
S-AWC control mode display remains on, A, D- Clockwise yaw moment about the
the S-AWC control will start operating again. vehicle’s center of gravity
B, C- Counterclockwise yaw moment
about the vehicle’s center of gravity
S-AWC operation display
N00542500048 ACD operation display
The S-AWC operation status can be displayed The strength of the differential limiting
on the information screen in the multi-infor- action (center differential) of the ACD is
mation display. displayed in section E of the meter as a bar
To display the status, press the multi-informa- graph.
tion meter switch to change the information
screen.
Refer to “Information screen (when the igni-
tion switch is “ON”)” on page 5-96.

Anti-lock braking system

In this situation, simply hold the brake
CAUTION Anti-lock braking system pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
 The system may be malfunctioning. N00517900295
brake, which will result in reduced
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent braking performance.
engine.
the wheels from locking up when braking.  An operation noise is emitted from the
Restart the engine and check whether the This helps maintain vehicle drivability and engine compartment or feel a shock from
warning display and “SERVICE steering wheel handling. the brake pedal when start driving imme-
REQUIRED” go out.
diately after starting the engine. These are
5 If the warning display and “SERVICE normal sound or operation that the anti-
REQUIRED” go out, there is no abnormal
Driving hints
lock braking system makes when per-
condition. If the warning display and  Always keep a safe distance from the forming a self-check. It does not indicate
“SERVICE REQUIRED” do not go out or vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- a malfunction.
appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking  The anti-lock braking system can be used
the vehicle immediately, but we recommend system, leave a greater braking distance after the vehicle has reached a speed over
that you have your vehicle inspected. approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
when:
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered working when the vehicle slows below
roads. approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
NOTE • Driving on uneven road surfaces.
 If the ambient temperature drops and the vis-
cosity of the AWC control fluid increases,
 Operation of anti-lock braking system is CAUTION
not restricted to situations where brakes  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
the warning may be displayed.
At this time, S-AWC control is temporarily
are applied suddenly. This system may accidents. It is your responsibility to take
suspended, but this will not affect normal also prevent the wheels from locking safety precautions and to drive carefully.
driving. when you drive over manholes, steel  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
After the vehicle is driven for a while, if the roadwork plates, road markings, or any system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
engine is restarted after the AWC control uneven road surface. same size and the same type.
fluid warms up or the ambient temperature  When the anti-lock braking system is in  Do not install any aftermarket limited-slip
increases, the S-AWC control will start oper- use, you may feel the brake pedal pulsa- differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The anti-
ating again if the warning display goes out. tion and the vibrations of the vehicle body lock braking system may stop functioning
and steering wheel. It may also feel as if properly.
the pedal resists being pressed.

Anti-lock braking system

However, if the warning light / display do not
Anti-lock braking system warn- CAUTION disappear, or if they come on again when the
ing light / display  Any of the following indicates that the anti-
vehicle is driven, have the vehicle checked by
lock braking system is not functioning and
N00531600632 an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
only the standard brake system is working.
Warning light repair facility of your choice as soon as possi-
(The standard brake system is functioning
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle ble.
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.
• When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
If the anti-lock braking system 5
Warning display position, the warning light does not come
warning light / display and brake
on or it remains on and does not go off. warning light / display come on at
• The warning light comes on while driving. the same time
• The warning display appears while driving.
Warning light
If there is a malfunction in the system, the If the warning light / display

anti-lock braking system warning light will comes on while driving
come on and the warning display will appear N00531700561
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
mation display. If only the anti-lock braking sys-
Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak-
tem warning light / display comes
ing system warning light only comes on when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” on The anti-lock braking system and brake force
position and goes off a few seconds later. distribution function may not work, so hard
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. braking could make the vehicle unstable.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Test the system by restarting the engine and Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an
driving at a speed of about 12 mph (20 km/h) authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair
or higher. facility of your choice.
If the warning light / display then remain off
during driving, there is no abnormal condi-
tion.

Active stability control (ASC)
NOTE Rear CAUTION

 The anti-lock braking system warning light  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC
and brake warning light illuminate at the cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
same time and the warning displays appear from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
alternately on the information screen in the any other system, has limits and cannot help
multi-information display. you to maintain traction and control of the
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
5 ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
responsibility to drive carefully. This means
After driving on icy roads taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
N00529200035
ronmental conditions.
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove  Be sure to use the same specified type and
any snow and ice which may have been left size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an Active stability control ASC may not work properly.
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to  Do not install any aftermarket limited-slip
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the
(ASC) differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
N00559100121
cables located at each wheel. may stop functioning properly.
The active stability control (ASC) takes over-
all control of the anti-lock braking system,
Front traction control function and skid control NOTE
function to help maintain the vehicle’s control  An operation noise may be emitted from the
and traction. Please read this section in con- engine compartment in the following situa-
junction with the pages on the anti-lock brak- tions. The sound is associated with checking
ing system, traction control function and skid the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
control function. may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
Anti-lock braking system  P.5-74 tion.
Traction control function  P.5-77 • When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
Skid control function  P.5-77 position.
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after
the engine is turned on.

Active stability control (ASC)

maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
NOTE output and the brake on each wheel.
CAUTION
 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a  Be sure to turn ON the ASC for normal driv-
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin- ing.
ing sound from the engine compartment. NOTE
This indicates that the system is operating  The skid control function operates at speeds
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher. NOTE
 When the anti-lock braking system warning  When moving out of mud, sand or fresh
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active. snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not 5
ASC OFF switch allow the engine speed to increase. In such
situations, temporarily turning off the ASC
Traction control function N00559400209
with the “ASC OFF” switch will make it eas-
N00559200021 When the ignition switch is turned to the ier to move out your vehicle.
On slippery surfaces, the traction control “ON” position, the ASC automatically turns  By pressing the ASC OFF switch, both the
function prevents the drive wheels from spin- ON. If the ASC OFF switch is pressed to turn skid control function and the traction control
ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to OFF the ASC, the display in the meter function are turned OFF.
start moving from a stopped condition. It also comes on. Press the switch again to turn ON  By pressing down the “ASC OFF” switch for
provides sufficient driving force and steering the ASC. 3 seconds or longer, you can deactivate the
performance as the vehicle turns while press- ASC and the braking control of the AYC.
ing the acceleration pedal. At this time, the display will appear
for a few seconds.
CAUTION
 When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
the vehicle at moderate speeds.
Then, the previous screen will return and the
“!” mark will come on.
Skid control function Press the ASC OFF switch again to turn ON
N00546800010 the ASC.
The skid control function is designed to help
the driver maintain control of the vehicle on CAUTION
slippery roads or during rapid steering  For safety reasons, press the ASC OFF
switch when the vehicle is stopped.

Limited-slip differential
NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 If the ASC OFF switch is continuously  The display may come on when you start  The system may be malfunctioning.
pressed after the ASC has been turned OFF Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
the engine. This means that the battery volt-
or the ASC and the braking control of AYC engine. Restart the engine again and check
age momentarily dropped when the engine
have been turned off, an erroneous operation whether the display/indicator goes out. If
was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
prevention function operates and the ASC is they go out, there is no abnormal condition.
tion, provided that the display goes out
automatically turned ON. If they do not go out or appear frequently, it
immediately.
5  When a compact spare tire has been put on
is not necessary to stop the vehicle immedi-
ately, but you should have your vehicle
ASC operation display or ASC your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
will be lower, making it more likely that the
OFF display Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
N00546500091
display/indicator will blink. choice as soon as possible.
ASC operation display/ASC indicator

-
The display/indicator will blink when
the ASC is operating. ASC warning display Limited-slip differential
ASC OFF display N00546600092 N00517400014
-
The display is displayed when the If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys- A limited-slip differential is applied for front
ASC has been deactivated with the tem, the following display/indicator will turn wheel differential. The features of this lim-
“ASC OFF” switch. on. ited-slip differential are described below:
Just as with a conventional differential, the

- ASC indicator
wheel on one side is allowed to turn at a dif-
CAUTION ferent speed from the wheel on the other side
- ASC OFF display
 When display/indicator blinks, ASC is when the vehicle is cornering. The difference
operating, which means that the road is slip- between the limited-slip differential and a
pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
Warning display conventional differential is that if the wheel
ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower. on one side of the vehicle loses traction, a
greater amount of torque is applied to the
wheel on the other side to improve traction.

Service brake
erly, the rest of the brake system will still
NOTE WARNING work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
 Even if there is a difference in the amount of  Do not leave any objects near the brake
quickly.
traction the wheels can get, if both of them pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;
You will know this has happened if you find
are spinning, the limited-slip differential will doing so could prevent the full pedal
not be effective. stroke that would be necessary in an you need to depress the brake pedal down
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can further, or harder when slowing down or stop-
be operated freely at all times. Make sure ping, or if the brake warning light and the
CAUTION warning display in the multi-information dis-
the floor mat is securely held in place.
play come on.
5
 Never start the engine while one of the front
or rear wheels is jacked up and the other in
contact with the ground; doing so may cause CAUTION WARNING
the vehicle to jump forward.  It is important not to drive the vehicle with  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.
 Continuously attempting to extract the vehi- your foot resting on the brake pedal when Keep the engine running whenever your
cle from snow, mud, etc. while using high braking is not required. This practice can vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
engine rpm may damage the limited-slip dif- result in very high brake temperatures, pre- engine while driving, the power brake
ferential. mature pad wear, and possible damage to the booster will stop working and your brakes
 Using a compact spare wheel will adversely brakes. will not work as well.
affect the limited-slip differential; replace  If the power assist is lost or if either brake
the compact spare wheel with a standard size hydraulic system stops working properly,
wheel as soon as possible. Power brakes take your vehicle to an authorized Mit-
N00517600380 subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes
Service brake for more braking force with minimal brake
N00517500291 pedal effort.
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
Brake pad wear alarm
Brake pedal capacity, even if the power assist is lost.
N00532500117
If the power assist is lost, the effort needed to The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a
press the brake pedal is greater. metallic squeal when the brake pads have
Overuse of the brake can cause poor brake
If you lose the power assist for some reason, worn down enough to need service. If you
response and premature wear of the brake
the brakes will still work. hear this sound continuously, have the brake
pads.
If the power brake unit or either of the two pads inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
When driving down a long or steep hill, use
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop- Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
engine braking by downshifting.
choice.
Brake assist system

lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
WARNING NOTE son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
 Driving with worn brake pads will make it  Once the brake assist system is operational,
cle, but you will notice it takes much more
harder to stop, and can cause an accident. it maintains great braking force even if the
effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
brake pedal is lightly released.
To stop its operation, completely remove cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
NOTE your foot from the brake pedal.
choice.
 When the brakes are applied, a faint noise  The brake assist system may become opera-
5 may be heard, but this is a characteristic of tional when the brake pedal is fully
high-performance brakes; it does not indicate depressed even if it has not been depressed WARNING
a problem. suddenly.
 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
 When the brake assist system is in use while moving. Stopping the engine would make
driving, you may feel as if the depressed the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small possibly resulting in an accident.
Brake assist system motions in conjunction with the operation
N00567300076 noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
The brake assist system is a device assisting
assist system is operating normally and does CAUTION
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal  Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
firmly such as in emergency stop situations depress the brake pedal. way in one direction. This can cause damage
and provides greater braking force.  You may hear an operation noise when the to the power steering system.
brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
while stationary. This does not indicate a
brakes will be applied with more force than
usual.
malfunction and the brake assist system is Cruise control
operating normally.
N00518300472
Cruise control is an automatic speed control

CAUTION
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
 The brake assist system is not a device Power steering system vated at speeds from about 25 mph
designed to exercise braking force greater N00518000323
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a (40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
sufficient distance between vehicles in front The power steering system operates while the speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
of you without relying too much on the brake engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
assist system. needed to turn the steering wheel.
The power steering system has mechanical
steering capability in case the power assist is

Cruise control
CAUTION Cruise control switches NOTE

 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,  When operating the cruise control switches,
turn off the cruise control for safety. press the cruise control switches correctly.
 Do not use cruise control when driving con- The set speed driving may be deactivated
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same automatically if two or more switches of the
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads cruise control are pressed at the same time.
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
5
 On vehicles with manual transaxle, do not To activate
move the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) N00518400327
position while driving at a set speed without
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
depressing the clutch pedal. The engine will
run too fast and might be damaged.
tion, press the “ON OFF” switch (A) to
turn on the cruise control. The “CRUISE”
indicator light in the meter cluster will
A- “ON OFF” switch come on.
NOTE
 Cruise control may not be able to keep your Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
speed on uphills or downhills.
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
B- “COAST SET” switch
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
 Your speed may increase to more than the set
desired speed.
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use
the brake to control your speed. As a result,
the set speed driving is deactivated. C- “ACC RES” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to

the original set speed.
D- “CANCEL” switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

Cruise control
NOTE
 If the cruise control is on when the ignition
switch is turned to “LOCK” or “ACC” posi-
tion, cruise control will be on automatically
the next time you start the engine. The
“CRUISE” indicator light will also be on.
 If the battery voltage is insufficient, the
5 memory data for the cruise control may be
erased.
As a result, the “CRUISE” indicator light
may not come on when you restart the
engine.
To increase your speed in small amounts,
If this happens, press the “ON OFF” switch NOTE press the “ACC RES” switch for less than
once again to turn on the cruise control.  When you release the “COAST SET” switch,
about 1 second and release it.
the vehicle speed will be set.
Each time you press the “ACC RES” switch,
2. Confirm that the Twin Clutch SST control your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
mode is set to “Normal”. faster.
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST control mode” To increase the set speed
on page 5-62. N00518500298
Accelerator pedal
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
NOTE
 The cruising speed cannot be set when the
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
“ACC RES” switch erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
Twin Clutch SST control mode is set to
“Sport” mode or “S-Sport” mode. then press the “COAST SET” switch (B) and
Press and hold the “ACC RES” switch (C) release the switch momentarily to set a new
while driving at the set speed, and your speed desired cruising speed.
3. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
will then gradually increase.
speed, then press and release the “COAST
When you reach your desired speed, release
SET” switch (B) when the “CRUISE”
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
indicator light is illuminated. The vehicle
set.
will then maintain the desired speed.

Cruise control
To slow down your speed in small amounts,

press the “COAST SET” switch for less than
To decrease the set speed about 1 second and release it.
To temporarily increase or
N00518600228
Each time you press the “COAST SET” decrease the speed
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed. switch, your vehicle will slow down by about N00541700014
1 mph (1.6 km/h).

“COAST SET” switch To temporarily increase the speed
Brake pedal
Press and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B) Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
while driving at the set speed, and your speed normally. When you release the pedal, you
While driving at the set speed, use the brake
will slow down gradually. will return to your set speed.
pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
When you reach your desired speed, release then press the “COAST SET” switch (B) and
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now release the switch momentarily to set a new
set. desired cruising speed.

Cruise control
 When the Twin Clutch SST control mode
To deactivate is set to “Sport” mode.
N00518801588
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST control mode”
The set speed driving can be deactivated as on page 5-62.
follows:  When the active stability control (ASC)
starts operating.
 Press the “ON OFF” switch (A). (Cruise Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
control will be turned off.) on page 5-76.
5  Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
 Depress the brake pedal.
WARNING
 On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST,
although the set speed driving will be
To temporarily decrease the speed deactivated when shifting to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the
gearshift lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the position while driving.
speed. To return to the previously set speed, You would have no engine braking and
press the “ACC RES” switch (C). could cause a serious accident.
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
5-85. Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-
vated as follow:
The set speed driving is deactivated automati-  When the engine speed rises and
cally in any of the following ways. approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on
vehicles with manual transaxle).
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed
because of a hill, etc.
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or less.


Under either of the following conditions,
CAUTION however, using the switch does not allow you
WARNING
 When the set speed driving is deactivated  The spare wheel does not have a tire infla-
to resume the previously set speed. In these
automatically in any situation other than tion pressure sensor.
situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
those listed above, there may be a system When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
malfunction. sure monitoring system will not work
 The “ON OFF” switch is pressed.
Press the “ON OFF” switch to turn off the properly.
cruise control and have your vehicle
 The ignition switch is turned OFF. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 “CRUISE” indicator light is turned OFF.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.
5
choice.
Tire pressure monitoring
system NOTE
To resume the set speed N00530201511
 The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
N00518900234 The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels tion pressures.
If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
condition described in “To deactivate” on as described in “Tires” on page 9-12.
page 5-84, you can resume the previously set system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
cantly under-inflated.  Each of the grommets and washers where the
speed by pressing the “ACC RES” switch (C) tire inflation pressure sensors are mounted
while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 should be replaced with new ones when the
km/h) or higher. tire is replaced.
For details, contact your authorized Mitsubi-
shi Motors dealer.
Grommet
Washer
Tire inflation
pressure sensor

Tire pressure monitoring sys- CAUTION NOTE

tem warning light / display  If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-  In addition, the warning display is displayed
N00554800110
ing light does not illuminate when the igni- on the information screen in the multi-infor-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position, it mation display.
means that the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem is not working properly. Have the sys-
tem inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
5 When the ignition switch is turned to the
Motors dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
“ON” position, the tire pressure monitoring system may be preventing the monitoring of
system warning light normally illuminates the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
and goes off a few seconds later. sharp turning and high-speed driving. Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
 If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres- should be checked monthly when cold and
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for sure monitoring system, the tire pressure inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, monitoring system warning light will blink mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
the warning light will remain illuminated for approximately 1 minute and then remain
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- continuously illuminated. The warning light
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size
will issue further warnings each time the
tion. than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
Refer to “If the warning light/display illumi- exists. or tire inflation pressure label, you should
nates while driving” on page 5-87 and take Check to see whether the warning light goes determine the proper tire inflation pressure
the necessary measures. off after few minutes driving. for those tires.)
If it then goes off during driving, there is no As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
NOTE problem. been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
However, if the warning light does not go system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
 In addition, the warning display is displayed
off, or if it blinks again when the engine is pressure telltale when one or more of your
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
mation display. tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of tale illuminates, you should stop and check
the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
the warning light appears while driving, them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
high-speed driving. overheat and can lead to tire failure.


Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- erly.
NOTE
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
ing light will go off after a few minutes of
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
If the warning light/display illu- driving.
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- minates while driving 2. If the tire pressure monitoring system
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached N00532800439
warning light remains illuminated after
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
low tire pressure telltale. warning light illuminates, avoid hard
you have been driving for about 20 min-
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
5
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
sure, one or more of the tires may have a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when high speeds. You should stop and adjust
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a
the system is not operating properly. The the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
puncture, have it repaired by an autho-
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
with the low tire pressure telltale. the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
possible.
When the system detects a malfunction, the 9-12.
telltale will flash for approximately one min-
ute and then remain continuously illuminated. NOTE WARNING
This sequence will continue upon subsequent  In addition, the warning display is displayed  If the warning light/display illuminates
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction on the information screen in the multi-infor- while you are driving, avoid hard braking,
mation display. sharp steering maneuvers and high
exists.
 When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire
When the malfunction indicator is illumi- adversely affects vehicle performance and
sure, do not apply excessive force to the
nated, the system may not be able to detect or can result in an accident.
valve stem to avoid breakage.
signal low tire pressure as intended.
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
of reasons, including the installation of valve stem. CAUTION
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could  If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- get into the valve, resulting in damage to the the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire
ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal- tire inflation pressure sensor. could lead to an accident.
function telltale after replacing one or more  Do not use metal valve caps, which may  The warning light/display may not illuminate
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion immediately in the event of a tire blowout or
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen- rapid leak.
sors.


 A window tint that affects the radio wave
NOTE signals is installed.
CAUTION
 To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-  The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
tion pressure sensors, have any punctured the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi NOTE sensors, resulting in air leakage or damage to
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi- the sensors.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
not covered by your warranty. large variations in ambient temperature, the
5  Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair prod-
uct on any tire. Such a spray could damage
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
(causing the warning light/display to come
General information
N00533001259
the tire inflation pressure sensors. Have any on) when the ambient temperature is rela-
puncture repaired by an authorized Mitsubi- tively low. If the warning light/display Your tire pressure monitoring system oper-
shi Motors dealer. comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure. ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry
The tire pressure monitoring system may not
Whenever the tires and wheels Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).
work normally in the following circum-
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
stances: are replaced with new ones Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
N00532900179
 A wireless facility or device using the RSS standard(s).
If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure Operation is subject to the following two con-
same frequency is near the vehicle.
sensors are installed, their ID codes must be ditions.
 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
and/or on the wheels.
system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-  This device may not cause harmful inter-
 The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors ference.
is dead.
dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire  This device must accept any interference
 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine
inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel received, including interference that may
wheels are being used.
replacement is not done by an authorized cause undesired operation.
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by
tion pressure sensors are being used.
your warranty.
 Wheels whose ID codes are not memo- CAUTION
rized by the vehicle are used.  Changes or modifications not expressly
 Compact spare tire is fitted on a road approved by the manufacturer for compli-
wheel. ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.

Instrument cluster
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
Instrument cluster Type 1
performance.
N00519000317
Type 2
1- Tachometer  P.5-89
2- Multi-information display  P.5-90 CAUTION
Information screen display list   The red zone indicates an engine speed
P.5-111 beyond the range of safe operation.
3- Speedometer  P.5-89
4- Rheostat meter illumination button  Select the correct shift position (manual
P.5-89 transaxle) or (Twin Clutch SST) to control
the engine speed so that the tachometer indi-
cator does not enter the red zone
Speedometer
N00519100220
Tachometer Rheostat meter illumination
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
N00519200205
button
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per
(km/h). N00554900166
minute. This allows the driver to determine
Each time you press this button, there is a
the most efficient shift position (manual
sound and the brightness of the instruments
transaxle) or (Twin Clutch SST) and engine
changes.
speed combinations.

Multi-information display
NOTE NOTE
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-  If you press and hold the button for longer
tively for when the front side-marker and than about 1 second when the front side-
parking lights are illuminated and when they marker and parking lights are illuminated,
are not. the brightness level changes to the maximum
 If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic level. Pressing and holding the button for
light control, when the light switch is in a longer than about 1 second again returns the
5 position other than the “OFF” position, the
meter illumination switches automatically to
brightness level to the previous level.
the adjusted brightness, depending on the

brightness outside the vehicle.
 The brightness level of the instruments is 1- Brightness display
stored when the ignition switch is turned off. 2- Rheostat illumination button
N00555000207
The multi-information display displays warnings, the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel remaining, out-
side temperature, Twin Clutch SST control mode, S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) control mode, gearshift lever position, average and momen-
tary fuel consumption, driving range, average speed, S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) operation display, instrument brightness, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as the language and units used on the multi-information display.

With ignition switch in the With ignition switch in the “ON” position With ignition switch in the “ON” position
“OFF” position (Twin Clutch SST) (manual transaxle)
1- “!” Warning display screen (With igni- 7- Information screen (With ignition
switch in the “ON” position)  P.5-96
NOTE
tion switch in the “OFF” position)   The trip computer function fuel units, tem-
P.5-92 Interrupt display screen (With ignition
perature units, display language, and other
2- Information screen (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)  P.5-99 settings can be changed.
switch in the “OFF” position)  P.5-92 8- Fuel remaining display screen  Refer to “Changing the function settings
Interrupt display screen (With ignition P.5-100 (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
switch in the “OFF” position)  P.5-94 9- Twin Clutch SST control mode display on page 5-103.
3- Door ajar warning display screen (With screen (if so equipped)  P.5-100
ignition switch in the “OFF” position) 10- Gearshift lever position display screen
 P.5-94 (if so equipped)
4- S-AWC control mode display screen   P.5-100
P.5-96 11- Active stability control (ASC) OFF dis-
5- Outside temperature display screen  play screen
P.5-100  P.5-78
6- “!” Warning display screen (With igni- 12- Engine coolant temperature display
tion switch in the “ON” position)   P.5-96
P.5-96

information display by operating the multi-
NOTE information meter switch.
NOTE
 The display screen is different depending on  When the “!” warning is displayed, the warn-
whether the ignition switch in the “OFF” or ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
“ON” position. information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-92. switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-92.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
5 switch in the “OFF” position)” on page
5-111.
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-96.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition

switch turned from “OFF” to “ON”)” on
page 5-95.
Information screen (With igni-
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition tion switch in the “OFF” posi-
switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-96. tion)
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
N00555300141
“!” Warning display screen Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, the display screen
(With ignition switch in the switches in the following order.
Multi-information meter switch “OFF” position)
N00555100165
N00555200078
The multi-information meter switch is a but- If you press the multi-information meter
ton marked “INFO” on the left side of the switch and return from the warning display
dash. screen to the previous screen, the “!” warning
Each time the multi-information meter switch is displayed.
is operated, a sound is emitted and the multi- Refer to “Returning to the display screen
information display changes between infor- from before the warning display” on page
mation such as warnings, service reminder, 5-94.
average and momentary fuel consumption, This mark is also displayed if there is another
driving range, average speed, and S-AWC warning other than the one displayed. When
operation display. the cause of the warning display is elimi-
It is also possible to change elements such as nated, the “!” warning goes out automatically.
the language and units used on the multi-

Odometer
Shows the total distance traveled.
Trip odometer
Shows the distance traveled between two

points.
5
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip
odometer
It is possible to measure two currently trav-
NOTE
eled distances, from home using trip odom-
 If there is no warning display, the switching
eter and from a particular point on the
1- sequence is: odometer/trip odometer 
Trip odometer way using trip odometer . odometer/trip odometer  service
2- Trip odometer
3- Service reminder reminder  odometer/trip odometer .
 To reset the trip odometer
4- Redisplay of a warning display screen  Both tripmeters and can count up to
9999.9 miles/kilometers.
To return the display to 0, hold down the
When a tripmeter goes past 9999.9
multi-information meter switch for about 2
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-
Odometer/Trip odometer seconds or more. Only the currently dis- meters.
N00555400139 played value will be reset.  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor- memories of tripmeter displays and
mation meter switch, the display screen Example
are cleared, and their displays return to “0.0
switches. miles/kilometers”.
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
Odometer/Trip odometer  Odome- odometer will be reset.
ter/Trip odometer  Service reminder  Service reminder
Redisplay of a warning display screen  N00555500013
Odometer/Trip odometer . Shows the distance and number of months

until the next periodic inspection.

Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-101.
Returning to the display screen NOTE
from before the warning display  Warning display screens with a “ ” or
Interrupt display screen (With
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
ignition switch in the “OFF” Even if the cause of the warning display is
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
position) not eliminated, you can return to the screen the display, press the multi-information
N00559600139 that was displayed before the warning dis- meter switch as follows.
play.
5 When there is information to be announced,
If you press the multi-information meter
“ ” : Press lightly.
such as a key reminder, the buzzer sounds and
switch, the display screen switches to the “ ” : Press for about 2 seconds or more.
switches to the warning display screen. Refer
screen display from before the warning and
to the appropriate page and take the necessary
the “!” warning is displayed. Redisplay of a warning display screen
measures.
When the cause of the warning display is When the “!” warning is displayed, if you
eliminated, the warning display goes out lightly press the multi-information meter
automatically. switch a few times, the warning display
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition screen you switched from is redisplayed.
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
5-111. switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-92.
Door ajar warning display

screen (With ignition switch in
the “OFF” position)
A- “!” warning
N00559700114
If any of the doors or the trunk lid is not com-

pletely closed, this displays the open door or
trunk lid.
1- Information generated
2- Cause eliminated

1- Doors and trunk lid are closed 1- Screen when the ignition switch is
2- Doors or trunk lid is open “OFF” NOTE
2- System check screen  The system check screen display varies
3- Screen when the ignition switch is depending on your equipment.
Information screen (With igni- “ON”
tion switch turned from “OFF”
to “ON”) Service reminder
System check screen
N00555800162
When the time for periodic inspection arrives,
When the ignition switch is turned to the When the ignition switch is turned to the “PERIODIC INSPECTION” is displayed for
“ON” position, the display screen switches in “ON” position, the system check screen is a few seconds after the screen that is initially
the following order. displayed for about 4 seconds. If there is no displayed when the ignition switch is turned
fault, information screen (when the ignition “ON”. Refer to “Service reminder” on page
switch is “ON”) is displayed. 5-101.
If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
ing display. Refer to “Warning display list
(when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on page
5-114.

When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the “!” warning goes out automat-
Information screen (With igni-
ically. tion switch in the “ON” posi-
tion)
NOTE N00556200206
 When the “!” warning is displayed, the warn- Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the mation meter switch, the display screen
5 information screen.
switches in the following order.
switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-92.

S-AWC control mode display

screen “Active stability control (ASC) When there is no warning display
N00561900012
OFF” display screen
The S-AWC operation status is displayed. N00556100104
Refer to “S-AWC control mode” on page This is displayed when the Active stability
5-72. control (ASC) is turned “OFF” with the When there is a
“ASC OFF” switch. warning display
“!” Warning display screen Also, if an abnormal condition is occurred in
(With ignition switch in the the ASC while driving, the “ASC OFF” dis-
play illuminates.
“ON” position) Refer to “ASC OFF switch” on page 5-77. 1- Trip odometer
N00556000015
2- Trip odometer
This is displayed when you press the multi- 3- Service reminder
information meter switch and switch the 4- Driving range display, momentary fuel
warning display screen. consumption display
This mark is also displayed if there is another 5- Average fuel consumption display,
warning other than the one displayed. momentary fuel consumption display
6- Average speed display, momentary fuel
consumption display

7- S-AWC operation display Engine coolant temperature dis-
8- Function setting screen
NOTE
9- Redisplay of a warning display screen
play  When you refuel, the driving range display is
updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of
Shows the engine coolant temperature.
NOTE fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
 While driving, the function setting screen is If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
not displayed even if you operate the multi- Pay careful attention to the engine coolant  When your vehicle is stopped on an
information meter switch. Always park the
vehicle in a safe place before operating.
temperature display while you are driving. extremely steep hill, the driving range value
may, change. This is due to the movement of
5
Refer to “Changing the function settings fuel in the tank and does not indicate any
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
CAUTION breakdown.
on page 5-103.  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.  The display setting can be changed to the
 When there is information to be announced, In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. preferred units (miles or km).
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place Refer to “Changing the function settings
the screen display is switched. and take the required measures. Refer to (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
Refer to “Interrupt display screen (With igni- “Engine overheating” on page 8-4. on page 5-103.
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page
5-99.
Average speed display
Driving range display
Odometer/Trip odometer This displays the average speed from the last
Shows the approximate driving range (how reset to the present.
many more miles or kilometers you can There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
The operation method is the same as when drive). When this driving range falls below For details on how to change the average
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position. 30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed. speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
For further details, refer to “Odometer/Trip Refuel as soon as possible. function settings (With ignition switch in the
odometer” on page 5-93.
“ON” position)” on page 5-103.
NOTE
Service reminder  The driving range is determined based on the
fuel consumption data. This may vary
Shows the distance and number of months depending on the driving conditions and hab-
until the next periodic inspection. its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-101. rough guideline.

 When the ignition switch is turned to the
Manual reset mode NOTE “ON” position from the “ACC” or
 “---” is displayed when the average speed
 When the average speed is being dis- “LOCK” position, the mode setting
cannot be measured.
played, if you hold down the multi-infor- changes automatically from manual to
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mation meter switch, these calculations auto.
mode”.
will be reset to zero. Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
 The display setting can be changed to the
 When the ignition switch is turned to the preferred units (mph or km/h). switching to manual mode is done, how-
ever, the data from the last reset is dis-
5 “ON” position from the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position, the mode setting
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” played.
changes automatically from manual to on page 5-103.
auto.  The average speed display memories for auto Auto reset mode
Switching to auto occurs automatically. If reset mode and manual reset mode are erased
switching to manual mode is done, how- if the battery is disconnected.  When the average fuel consumption is
ever, the data from the last reset is dis- being displayed, if you hold down the
played. Average fuel consumption display multi-information meter switch, these cal-
culations will be reset to zero.
This displays the average fuel consumption  When the ignition switch has been set to
Auto reset mode
from the last reset to the present. the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about
 When the average speed is being dis- There are 2 types of mode settings as follows. 4 hours or more, the average fuel con-
played, if you hold down the multi-infor- For details on how to change the average fuel sumption display will automatically reset.
mation meter switch, these calculations consumption display setting, refer to “Chang-
will be reset to zero. ing the function settings (With ignition switch NOTE
 When the ignition switch has been set to in the “ON” position)” on page 5-103.  The average speed display and the average
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
The “ ” mark in the momentary fuel gauge
4 hours or more, the average speed dis- rately in both auto reset mode and manual
shows the average fuel consumption.
play will automatically reset. reset mode.
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
Manual reset mode sumption cannot be measured.
NOTE  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
 The average speed display and the average  When the average fuel consumption is
mode”.
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa- being displayed, if you hold down the
rately in both auto reset mode and manual multi-information meter switch, these cal-
reset mode. culations will be reset to zero.
consumption and speed reset method” set-
NOTE NOTE tings can be modified as desired.
 Average fuel consumption may vary depend  When the momentary fuel consumption can-
For further details, refer to “Changing the
on the driving conditions (road conditions, not be measured, a bar graph is not shown.
function settings (With ignition switch in the
how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel con-  The display setting can be changed to the
sumption may differ from the fuel consump- “ON” position)” on page 5-103.
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption L/100km or km/L}.
displayed as just a rough guideline. Refer to “Changing the function settings Interrupt display screen (With
 The average fuel consumption display mem-
ories for auto reset mode and manual reset
on page 5-103. ignition switch in the “ON” 5
mode are erased if the battery is discon-  It is possible to cancel the green bar graph. position)
nected. Refer to “Changing the function settings N00556300164
 The display setting can be changed to the (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)”
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK), on page 5-103. Warning display
L/100km or km/L}.
(With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” When there is information to be announced,
S-AWC operation display
on page 5-103. such as a system fault, a tone sounds and the
information screen is switched to the warning
The S-AWC operation status is displayed. display screen.
Momentary fuel consumption dis- For further details, refer to “S-AWC opera- Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
play tion display” on page 5-73. sary measures. Refer to “Warning display list
While driving, the momentary fuel consump- WARNING on page 5-114.
tion is shown with a bar graph.  Always concentrate on your driving first. When the cause of the warning display is
When the momentary fuel consumption sur- Keep your eyes and mind on the road. Dis- eliminated, the warning display goes out
passes the average fuel consumption, the tractions while driving can lead to an acci- automatically.
momentary fuel consumption is displayed dent.
with a green bar graph.
Returning to the display screen from
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary
before the warning display
fuel consumption above the average fuel con- Function setting screen
sumption, it can help you drive with the better Even if the cause of the warning display is
fuel consumption. The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”, not eliminated, you can return to the screen
“Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel

that was displayed before the warning dis-
Redisplay of a warning display Outside temperature display
play.
screen screen
If you press the multi-information meter N00556500081
switch, the display screen switches to the When the “!” warning is displayed, if you Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
screen display from before the warning and lightly press the multi-information meter
the “!” warning (A) is displayed. switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.
NOTE
5  The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (°F or °C).
Other interrupt displays Refer to “Changing the function settings
The operation status of each system is dis- on page 5-103.
played on the information screen.  Depending on factors such as the driving
conditions, the displayed temperature may
For further details, refer to the appropriate
vary from the actual outside temperature.
page in the warning display list.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (With igni-
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on page
5-119. Twin Clutch SST control mode
display screen
NOTE
Gearshift lever position display N00545100016
 Warning display screens with a “ ” or The operation status of the Twin Clutch SST
screen (if so equipped) control mode is displayed. Refer to “Twin
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the N00545800042
Clutch SST control mode” on page 5-62.
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi-information Shows the position of the gearshift lever.
meter switch as follows. Refer to “Gearshift lever operation” on page Fuel remaining display screen
“ ”: Press lightly. 5-58. N00556600109
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more. Shows the amount of fuel remaining.

Fuel remaining warning display NOTE

 The service reminder time can be modified
When the fuel level runs low, the information by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
screen switches to the interrupt display of the to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to
fuel remaining warning display and the mark “Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi-
cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If
further information, please contact your
the warning display appears, refuel as soon as
possible.
5
CAUTION
 Running out of gas could damage the cata-
lytic converter. If the warning display
appears, refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
 It may take several seconds to stabilize the
display after refilling the tank.
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch in 1. Shows the time until the next periodic
the “ON” position, the remaining fuel dis- NOTE inspection.
play may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.  On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank. NOTE
 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
Fuel tank filler door mark km) and the time in units of 1 month.
Service reminder
N00556700197
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
filler door is located on the left side of the Displays the approximate time until the next
vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
page 3-4) displayed when the inspection time has
arrived.

2. This informs you that a periodic inspec- periodic inspection is displayed and the warn-
tion is due. Contact an authorized Mit- ing display is no longer displayed when the
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility ignition switch is switched from the “OFF”
of your choice to have the system position to the “ON” position.
checked.
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
At that time, when the ignition switch is tion meter switch, the information screen
switched from the “OFF” position to the switches to the service reminder display
5 “ON” position, “PERIODIC INSPEC- screen.
TION” is displayed for a few seconds on
the information screen.
CAUTION
 The customer is responsible for making sure
that regular inspections and maintenance and
periodic inspections and maintenance are
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.
2. Press and hold the multi-information

meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
NOTE
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an  The “---” display cannot be reset while the
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it more) to display “ ” and make it flash. ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
displays the time until the next periodic (If there is no operation for about 10 sec-  When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
inspection. onds with this indicator flashing, the distance and a certain period of time, the dis-
play returns to the previous screen.) play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed.
To reset 3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly  If you accidentally reset the display, consult
press the multi-information meter switch, an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
The “---” display can be reset while the igni- the screen switches from “---” to assistance.
tion switch is in the “OFF” position. When “CLEAR”. After that, the time until the
the display is reset, the time until the next next periodic inspection is shown.
Door ajar warning display Changing the function settings meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
screen (With ignition switch in (With ignition switch in the more) to switch from the setting mode
the “ON” position) “ON” position) screen to the menu screen.
N00555700116 N00556801166
If any of the doors or the trunk lid is not com- 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
pletely closed, this displays the open door or Firmly apply the parking brake and put
the gearshift lever into the “N” (Neutral)
trunk lid.
position (manual transaxle) or the gear-
5
If the speed increases to about 5 mph (8
km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a buzzer will shift lever into the “P” (PARK) position
sound 4 times to inform you that a door is (Twin Clutch SST).
ajar. 2. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
tion meter switch, the information screen
switches to the function setting screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With igni-
tion switch in the “ON” position)” on
page 5-96. NOTE
 To return the menu screen to the function set-
ting screen, press and hold the multi-infor-
mation meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more).
 If no operations are made within about 15
seconds of the menu screen being displayed,
the display returns to the function setting
CAUTION screen.
 For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
CAUTION While driving, even if you operate the multi-
 Always make sure that the warning display information meter switch, the function set- 4. Select the item to change on the menu
goes out before beginning to drive. ting screen is not displayed. screen and change to the desired setting.
For further details on the operation meth-
ods, refer to the following sections.

Refer to “Changing the reset mode for 1. Press and hold the multi-information
Manual reset mode
average fuel consumption and average meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
speed” on page 5-104. more) to switch from the setting mode  If you press and hold the multi-informa-
Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption screen to the menu screen. tion meter switch when the average fuel
display unit” on page 5-105. Refer to “Changing the function settings consumption and average speed are dis-
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- played, these calculations will be reset to
on page 5-106. tion)” on page 5-103. zero.
Refer to “Changing the display language” 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
5 on page 5-106. switch to select “AVG” (average fuel con-
 When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position from the “ACC” or
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on sumption and average speed setting). “LOCK” position, the mode setting
page 5-106. changes automatically from manual to
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST auto.
REMINDER” is displayed” on page Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
5-107. switching to manual mode is done, how-
Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound” ever, the data from the last reset is dis-
on page 5-107. played.
Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel
consumption display” on page 5-108.
Auto reset mode
Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
tings” on page 5-108.  When the average fuel consumption and
average speed are being displayed, if you
Changing the reset mode for aver- 3. Press and hold the multi-information hold down the multi-information meter
age fuel consumption and average meter switch (for about 2 seconds or switch, these calculations will be reset to
more) to switch in sequence from A or 1 zero.
speed (Auto reset)  M, 2 or P (Manual reset)  When the ignition switch has been set to
N00557000214
 A or 1 (Auto reset). the “ACC” or “LOCK” position for about
You can change the mode condition for the The setting is changed to the selected 4 hours or more, the average fuel con-
average fuel consumption and average speed reset condition. sumption display and the average speed
display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset.” display will automatically reset.

NOTE meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
 The average speed display and average fuel
more) to change the setting to the selected
consumption display can be reset separately
unit.
in both auto reset mode and manual reset
mode.
 The average speed display memories and NOTE
average fuel consumption memories for auto  The display units for the driving range, the
reset mode and manual reset mode are erased
if the battery is disconnected.
average fuel consumption, the average speed 5
and the momentary fuel consumption are
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset changed, but the units for the indicating nee-
mode”. dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip
3. Press and hold the multi-information odometer will remain unchanged.
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
Changing the fuel consumption more) to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel con- the unit setting is erased and is automatically
display unit sumption display unit setting). set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.
N00557100101 4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
The fuel consumption display unit can be switch to switch in sequence from km/L The distance and speed units are also changed
changed. The distance, speed, and amount  L/100 km  mpg (US)  mpg (UK) in the following combinations to match the
units are also changed to match the selected  RETURN  km/L. selected fuel consumption unit.
fuel consumption unit.
Distance Speed
1. Press and hold the multi-information Fuel
(driving (average
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or economy
range) speed)
more) to change from the setting mode
mpg (US) mile (s) mph
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- km /L km km /h
tion)” on page 5-103.
L /100 km km km /h
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
sumption display unit setting).

Changing the temperature unit NOTE meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
N00557200131  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
more) to display “LANGUAGE” (lan-
The temperature display unit can be switched. the unit setting is erased and is automatically
guage setting).
set to °F (°C).
switch to select the desired language.
more) to switch from the setting mode Changing the display language
5 screen to the menu screen. N00557300174
more) to change the setting to the selected
Refer to “Changing the function settings The language of the multi-information dis- language.
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- play can be changed.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 1. Press and hold the multi-information
NOTE
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
switch to select “ ” (temperature unit meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
the language setting is erased and is automat-
setting). more) to change from the setting mode ically set to ENGLISH or RUSSIAN.
screen to the menu screen.  If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
Refer to “Changing the function settings warning message is not displayed when there
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- is a warning display or interrupt display.
switch to select “LANGUAGE” (lan- Operation sound setting
guage setting). N00557400087
You can turn off the operation sounds of the

multi-information meter switch and rheostat
meter illumination button.
3. Press and hold the multi-information 1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change in sequence from °F  more) to switch from the setting mode
°C  °F. screen to the menu screen.
The setting is changed to the selected tem- Refer to “Changing the function settings
perature unit. (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
Changing the time until “REST
switch to select “ ” (operation sound REMINDER” is displayed
setting). N00557500091
The time until the display appears can be

changed.

meter switch (for about 2 seconds or 5
more) to switch from the setting mode
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
switch to select the time until the display
appears.
switch to select “ALARM” (rest time set-
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
ting).
more) to switch in sequence from ON more) to change the setting to the selected
(operation sound on)  OFF (operation time.
sound off)  ON (operation sound on).
The setting is changed to the selected con- NOTE
dition.  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
set to the “OFF”.
NOTE  The drive time is reset when the ignition
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
switch is in the “OFF” position.
the operation sound setting is erased and is
automatically set to “ON” (operation sound
on).
 The operation sound setting only deactivates Changing the turn signal sound
the operation sound of the multi-information N00563500067
meter switch and rheostat meter illumination meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
It is possible to change the turn signal sound.
button. The warning display and other more) to display “ALARM” (rest time
sounds cannot be deactivated. setting).

Changing the momentary fuel con-
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
to switch from the setting mode screen to sumption display to switch in sequence from ON (with the
the menu screen. N00563600026
green bar graph)  OFF (without the
Refer to “Changing the function settings It is possible to change the bar graph setting green bar graph)  ON (with the green
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- of the momentary fuel consumption display. bar graph).
tion)” on page 5-103. The setting changes to the selected bar
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter 1. Press and hold the multi-information graph setting.
5 meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
switch to select . (changing the turn to switch from the setting mode screen to
signal sound) the menu screen. Returning to the factory settings
Refer to “Changing the function settings N00557600177
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi- All of the function settings can be returned to
tion)” on page 5-103. their factory settings.
switch to select . (changing the
momentary fuel consumption display) more) to switch from the setting mode
(With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
3. Press and hold the multi-information 2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more switch to select “RESET” (return to the
to switch in sequence from 1 (turn signal factory settings).
sound 1)  2 (turn signal sound 2)  1
(turn signal sound 1).
The setting changes to the selected turn
signal sound.

NOTE
• Momentary fuel consumption with the
green bar graph
: ON

more), the buzzer sounds and all of the
function settings are returned to the fac-
tory settings.
NOTE
 The factory settings are as follows.
• Average fuel consumption and average
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
or (L/100 km)
• Temperature unit: °F (Fahrenheit) or {°C
(Celsius)}
• Display language: ENGLISH
• Cooperative language setting: A
• Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
on)
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
• Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

N00557700019
Indicator and warning light list

N00557800212
Type 1 Type 2
5
1- Position indicator  P.5-120 8- Brake warning light  P.5-121 14- Information screen display list 
2- High beam indicator  P.5-120 9- Cruise control indicator  P.5-81 P.5-111
3- Charging system warning light  10- Seat belt reminder/warning light 
P.5-122 P.4-10
4- Turn signal indicator/Hazard warning 11- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
light  P.5-120 warning light  P.4-26
5- Front fog light indicator  P.5-120 12- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
6- Anti-lock braking system warning light VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
 P.5-75, 5-75 engine light”)  P.5-121
7- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- 13- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
ing light  P.5-86  P.5-78

Information screen display list

N00557900066
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer to
the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “OFF” position)” on page 5-111.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-114.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)” on page 5-119. 5
NOTE
 In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicle’s electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.
Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “OFF” position)

N00558000194
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

 You have forgotten to remove the key from  Remove the key.
the ignition switch. Refer to “Key reminder system” on page
5-35.


 You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to “Light auto-cutout function (head-
lights and other lights)” on page 5-126.
 The theft-alarm system is operating. Refer to “Theft-alarm system” on page 5-39.

5
 Immobilizer is registered. Refer to “Customer key programming (Except

for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-6.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)” on
page 5-27.
 After turning off the engine, an attempt  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
was made to open the driver’s door with (PUSH OFF) position.
the ignition switch in any position other Refer to “Ignition switch return reminder
than “LOCK” (PUSH OFF). system” on page 5-35.
 An attempt was made to lock all the doors  Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
and the trunk lid with the ignition switch in (PUSH OFF) position.
any position other than “LOCK” (PUSH Refer to “Ignition switch turn-off reminder
OFF). system” on page 5-18.


 There is a fault in the F. A. S. T. -key. Refer to “F. A. S. T. -key” on page 5-11.

Warning display list (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)

N00558101336

 There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-11.


 Immobilizer is registered. Refer to “Customer key programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-6.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)” on
page 5-27.
 The brake fluid level is low.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect
 There is a fault in the brake system. it. 5
 If the light still illuminates after the inspec-
tion, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
choice for assistance.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-122.
 There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driv-
system. ing, park the vehicle in a safe place, and
take corrective measures. Refer to “Anti-
lock braking system warning light /dis-
play” on page 5-75.
 The tire pressure in one of the tires (except Refer to “Tire pressure monitoring system
spare tire) is low. warning light /display” on page 5-86.
 There is a fault in the Tire pressure moni- Refer to “Tire pressure monitoring system
toring system. warning light /display” on page 5-86.


 One of the doors or the trunk lid is not  Close the door or trunk lid.
completely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display screen
The open door is displayed. (With ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.

5 Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.
 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
 The Twin Clutch SST fluid temperature is  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take
increased. corrective measures.
Refer to “Twin Clutch SST” on page 5-58.
 The seat belt is not fastened when the igni-  Wear your seat belt properly. Refer to
tion switch is in the “ON” position. “Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light
and display” on page 4-10.
 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to


 The vehicle is being driven with the park-  Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake
ing brake still applied. warning display” on page 5-122.
 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
system. possible and contact an authorized 5
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning” on page
5-123.
 There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible and contact an authorized
ity of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Charging system warning dis-
play” on page 5-122.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
pre-tensioner system. dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
have the system checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning light/display” on
page 4-26.
 There is a fault in the Active stability con-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
trol (ASC). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 5-76.


 There is a fault in the S-AWC (Super-All  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Wheel Control). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
trol)” on page 5-71.
 A safety device in the Twin Clutch SST has  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5 been activated due to a possible malfunc- dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
tion in the Twin Clutch SST or in the have the system checked.
engine electronic control module. Refer to “Twin Clutch SST” on page 5-58.
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to “Fuel

remaining warning display” on page 5-100.
 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C) or  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

less.  The ground may be frozen even when this
warning is not displayed, so drive care-
fully.
 The timing chain may be worn.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to

Other interrupt displays (With ignition switch in the “ON” position)

N00558201281
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.
Screen System operation status Reference

 When the Active stability control (ASC) Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on
and the braking control of the Active yaw page 5-76.
control system (AYC) are turned off with 5
the “ASC OFF” switch.
 When the Active stability control (ASC) is Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on
operating. page 5-76.
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen Do this
Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details,
refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-101.

Indicators
The rest time can be set.
Screen Do this
Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position)”
5 on page 5-103.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds about every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a
rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous dis-
play screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer
encourage you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
• The multi-information meter switch is held (for about 2 seconds or more).
Indicators NOTE Front fog light indicator

N00519900127  If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if N00520200191
the indicator stays on without flashing, check This indicator comes on while the front fog
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
Turn signal indicators/Hazard turn signal connection.
lights are on.
warning lights
N00520000216 Position indicator
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- High beam indicator N00551300026
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn N00520100086 This indicator light illuminates while the
signal lever is used. A blue light comes on when the headlights position lights are on.
are on high beam.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
ing flasher switch is pressed.

Warning lights
Warning lights CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator

N00520300147  If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”
braking system warning light are illuminated
at the same time, the braking force distribu- or “Check engine light”)
Brake warning light tion function will not operate, so the vehicle N00520500787
N00520400483
may be destabilized during sudden braking This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
This light comes on when the ignition switch under the following conditions. nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off). • When the brake warning light does not go
out even when the parking brake is
emissions, engine control system or Twin 5
When the engine is started, the light should Clutch SST control system. If a problem is
go off a few seconds later. A warning is also released.
detected in one of these systems, this indica-
displayed in the multi-information display. • When the brake warning light stays on
tor illuminates or flashes. When the ignition
The warning light also illuminates after start- while driving.
switch is turned to the “ON” position, this
ing the engine under the following condi- • If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
indicator normally comes on and goes off
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in
tions. after the engine has started.
a safe place, and contact an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
 When the parking brake is still applied. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
your choice as soon as possible.
 When the brake fluid level is low. filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
 When the brake system circuit is not indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
following manner when brake performance
working properly. is deteriorated. ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake you press down on the brake pedal harder until you hear clicking sounds.)
is fully released and brake warning light is than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal If this indicator does not go off after several
off. may go all the way to the floor. seconds or lights up while driving, have the
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking system checked as soon as possible at an
NOTE to reduce your speed and slowly apply the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
parking brake. repair facility of your choice.
 Under conditions such as sporty driving, the
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
brake fluid in the tank may move and the
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
warning light may come on temporarily.
If the warning light goes out after a while,
there is not a problem with the brake system
and the vehicle can be driven normally.

Information screen display
CAUTION NOTE Information screen display

 Driving for a long time with the engine mal-  Do not disconnect the battery cable when the N00558300012
function indicator on may cause more dam- engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE
age to the emission control system. This ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil- on.
Brake warning display
N00558400114
ity. The engine electronic control module stores
 If this indicator does not come on when the critical OBD information (especially exhaust
5 ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, have the system checked at an autho-
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
facility of your choice. difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on lems.
while the engine is running, avoid driving at This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
high speeds. being driven with the parking brake still
During vehicle operation with the indicator Charging system warning light applied. The warning light in the instrument
on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you N00520600296 cluster only comes on when the parking brake
depress the accelerator pedal.
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc- is applied.
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal tion in the charging system or when the igni-
more firmly than usual since the engine tion switch is turned to the “ON” position CAUTION
idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi- (engine off). A warning is also displayed in  If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
cle with Twin Clutch SST has a stronger ten- the multi-information display. When the parking brake, the brakes will overheat,
dency to creep forward. engine is started, the light should go out. resulting in ineffective braking and possible
Check to make sure that the light has gone brake failure.
out before driving. If this warning is displayed, release the park-
ing brake.
CAUTION
 If the warning light stays on while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
as soon as possible and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice to have the system checked.

Information screen display

When the ignition switch is turned to the If there is a fault in the charging system, the
“ON” position, if the brake fluid is low, this
CAUTION warning display is displayed on the informa-
 If the brake warning display, brake warning
warning is displayed. tion screen in the multi-information display.
light, and the Anti-lock braking system
The warning light in the instrument cluster The warning light in the instrument cluster
warning light are illuminated at the same
also illuminates. time, the braking force distribution function also illuminates.
will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta-
CAUTION bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden CAUTION
 If this warning stays on and does not go out braking and high-speed driving. Park the
vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
 If warnings are displayed while the engine is 5
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective running, park your vehicle in a safe place as
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair soon as possible and contact an authorized
safe place, and contact an authorized Mit- facility of your choice. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the of your choice to have the system checked.
your choice. following manner when brake performance
is deteriorated.
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
you press down on the brake pedal harder Oil pressure warning display
NOTE than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal N00558700074
 Under conditions such as sporty driving, the may go all the way to the floor.
brake fluid in the tank may move and the
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
warning display may appear temporarily.
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
If the warning display goes out after a while,
parking brake.
there is not a problem with the brake system
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
and the vehicle can be driven normally.
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
If the engine oil pressure drops while the
engine is running, the warning display is dis-
Charging system warning displayed on the information screen in the multi-
play information display.
N00558600086
CAUTION
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-
ing is displayed, the engine may overheat
and damage may result.

Combination headlights and dimmer switch
CAUTION NOTE Type 1

 If the warning is displayed while the engine  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place washed, the inside of the lens sometimes Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
as soon as possible and check the engine oil becomes foggy. This is the same as when
level. window glass mists up on a humid day, and
 If this warning display comes on when the does not indicate a problem. When the light
engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.
5 checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
However, if water collects inside the light,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
choice.
NOTE
 The oil pressure warning display does not
show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
checked using the dipstick.
The combinations of switch operations and
illuminated lights differ in accordance with
Combination headlights and the following conditions.
dimmer switch Except for vehicles equipped with daytime

N00522501788 running lights
OFF All lights off
Headlights Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
NOTE
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights Headlights and other lights on
on for a long period of time when the engine
is not running. The battery will run down.

Vehicles equipped with daytime running Parking, tail, front and rear side- Parking, tail, front and rear side-
lights marker lights, license plate and marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on instrument panel lights on
[When the engine is started, and the parking
Headlights and other lights on Headlights and other lights on
brake is released]
The daytime running lights will be illumi- Type 2 Vehicles equipped with daytime running
nated: lights 5
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
The daytime running lights illumi- [When the engine is started, and the parking
OFF
nated brake is released]
The daytime running lights illumi- The daytime running lights will be illumi-
nated nated:
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and
The daytime running lights illumi-
instrument panel lights on OFF
nated
Headlights and other lights on The daytime running lights illumi-
nated
AUTO Headlights and other lights turn on
NOTE and off automatically in accor-
 Once the daytime running light come on, dance with outside light level.
they do not go out until the ignition switch is The combinations of switch operations and
turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position. illuminated lights differ in accordance with The daytime running lights illumi-
the following conditions. nated
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
[When the engine is not running, or when the Except for vehicles equipped with daytime marker lights, license plate and
engine is running but the parking brake is not running lights instrument panel lights on
released]
OFF All lights off Headlights and other lights on
The engine starts when the lights are off. Headlights and other lights turn on
AUTO and off automatically in accor-
OFF All lights off dance with outside light level.


• If the driver’s door is opened after the
NOTE NOTE key is removed from the ignition switch,
 Once the daytime running light come on,  Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
a high-pitched constant tone will sound
they do not go out until the ignition switch is on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
to remind you to turn off the lights.
turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position. the windshield.
• If the driver’s door is opened with the
key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched
[When the engine is not running, or when the beep will sound to remind you to remove
engine is running but the parking brake is not the key.
5 released]
[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
The engine starts when the lights are off. engine]
OFF All lights off • If the ignition switch is turned to the

 If the lights do not turn on or off with the “LOCK” position and the driver’s door
Headlights and other lights turn on
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually is opened, a high-pitched constant
AUTO and off automatically in accor- operate the switch. Have the system checked
dance with outside light level. buzzer will sound to remind you to turn
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
off the lights.
Parking, tail, front and rear side- a repair facility of your choice.
• If the ignition switch is turned to any
marker lights, license plate and position other than “LOCK” and the
instrument panel lights on Light auto-cutout function driver’s door is opened, a low-pitched
Headlights and other lights on (headlights and other lights) constant buzzer will sound to remind
N00532601610
you to return the ignition switch.
 With the combination headlights and dim-
NOTE mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
 With the combination headlights and dim-
 The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con- if the key is turned to the “LOCK” or mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
trol can be adjusted.
“ACC” position or removed from the if the key is turned to the “LOCK” or
For further information, please contact your “ACC” position or removed from the
ignition switch and the driver’s door is
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a ignition switch and the driver’s door is not
repair facility of your choice. opened, the lights automatically turn off.
opened, the lights automatically turn off
[When using a key to start the engine] after about 3 minutes.


In either case, the lights will turn off automat-
NOTE NOTE ically and so will the tone.
 The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-  When the engine is started using the
Or you can turn the light switch to the “OFF”
vated. F.A.S.T.-key, if the driver’s door is opened
position to stop the tone.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors and the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
dealer for details. position, the headlight reminder buzzer inter-
mittently emits a high-pitched sound. If the Dimmer (high/low beam
ignition switch is in any position other than
change)
When you want to keep the lights “LOCK”, the ignition switch on reminder
buzzer intermittently emits a low-pitched N00549900142 5
on: sound. To change the headlights from high beam to
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
If the combination headlights and dimmer closed. (A warning is also displayed in the lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low
multi-information display.)
switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi- beam as a courtesy whenever there are
tion again after the engine is turned off, the oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic
about 3-minute auto-cutout function Headlight reminder buzzer moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue
described above will not work. The lights (the N00549800183 light in the instrument cluster indicates when
parking lights, tail lights and license plate [When using a key to start the engine] the headlights are on high beam.
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto- If the driver’s door is opened with the key in
matically. the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed
from the ignition switch while the lights are
NOTE on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn
 When the engine is started using the key, if off the lights.
the driver’s door is opened and the key is
removed, the headlight reminder buzzer [When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
intermittently emits a high-pitched sound. If engine]
the key is still in the ignition switch the key If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition
reminder buzzer intermittently emits a low- switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, or
pitched sound. if the ignition switch is moved to the
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is “LOCK” position while the lights are on, the
closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
tone will sound to remind you to turn off the
multi-information display.)
lights.

Headlight flasher NOTE

N00550000185 • The welcome light function can be deacti-
You can flash the high beams by pulling the vated.
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
go back to normal when you let go. While the
high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
the instrument panel. Coming home light
5 N00547301136
NOTE This function turns on the headlights in the

 You can flash the high beams by pulling the low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
lever toward you, even if the light switch is the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
off. NOTE position.
 If you turn the lights off with the head lights  While the welcome light function is operat-
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights ing, perform one of the following operations 1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
are automatically returned to their low-beam to cancel the function. mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”
setting when the light switch is next turned • Push the LOCK button (B) on the remote position (for vehicles equipped with the
to the “ ” position. control transmitter. automatic light control).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position. Also, if a key was used to start
Welcome light the engine, remove the key from the igni-
N00563201159 tion switch.
This function turns on the front side-marker 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
and parking lights for about 30 seconds after switch to the “LOCK” position, pull the
the UNLOCK button (A) on the remote con- turn signal lever toward you.
trol transmitter is pressed when the combina- • Turn the combination headlights and dim-
tion headlights and dimmer switch is in the
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
“OFF” or “AUTO” position (for vehicles
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
equipped with the automatic light control).
tion.
On vehicles equipped with the automatic light
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
control, the welcome light function will oper-
• The headlights can be set to come on in the
ate only when it is dark outside the vehicle. low beam setting.

Turn signal lever
NOTE
• The time that the headlights remain on can
be changed.
• The coming home light function can be
deactivated.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer. 5
Headlights leveling switch (if so
4. The headlights will come on in the low equipped)
beam setting for about 30 seconds. After N00542800038
WARNING
 To avoid distraction while driving, always
the headlights go off, the headlights can
The direction of the headlight beam (the perform headlight adjustments before
be turned on again in the low beam setting
direction which the light shines in) alters vehicle operation.
for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn
according to the number of people and the
signal lever toward you within 60 seconds
load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle
of turning the ignition switch to the
if it is too high due to the number of people NOTE
“LOCK” position. To turn on the head-
and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head-  Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0”
lights again after 60 seconds of turning
lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of position (when the beam is at its highest).
approaching vehicles. First set the light  Keep the knob in the “0” position except
tion, repeat the process from step 1. when using the knob to lower the headlight
switch to the “ ” position, then turn the
beam angle.
NOTE headlight leveling switch knob to lower the
 Always return the knob to the “0” position
 While the coming home light function is beam. The greater the number on the head- when the load is removed and the people
operating, perform one of the following light leveling switch knob, the lower the have left the vehicle.
operations to cancel the function. beam will point.
• Pull the turn signal lever toward you. Set the switch to the appropriate position so
that the headlight beam is level with the road.
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
Turn signal lever
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position. N00522601558
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion. When changing lanes, or to making a gradual
turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-
Hazard warning flasher switch

tion (1). It will return to the neutral position If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
when you let go. Use the full position (2)
NOTE will keep working after the ignition switch is
 A light in the instrument panel flashes to
when making a normal turn. The lever will turned off.
show when the front and rear turn signal
return to the neutral position when the turn is
lights are working properly.
complete. There may be times when the lever If this light flashes faster than usual, check
does not return to the neutral position. This for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
usually happens when the steering wheel is functioning connection in the signal.
turned only slightly. You can easily return the
5 lever by hand.
If the panel light does not come on when the
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly burned out bulb in the panel.
then release it, the turn signal lights and the Have the system inspected by your autho-
indicator light in the instrument cluster will rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
flash three times.
• Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
function for lane changes.
• Adjust the time required to operate the NOTE
lever for the 3-flash function.  If the flashers are used for several hours, the
For further information, please contact your battery will run down. This could make it
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.
Hazard warning flasher Front fog light switch

switch N00522800351
N00522700288 The front fog lights illuminate only when the

If you press the flasher switch, the front and headlights are on low beam.
rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”
so will the hazard warning lights. This is an position turns on the front fog lights as well
emergency warning system and should not be as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
used when the vehicle is in motion, except for turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
emergencies. the “OFF” position.


The knob will return to the neutral position
when it is released. Wiper and washer switch
N00523001692
CAUTION
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
the glass with the defroster before using the
washer.
5
MIST- Misting function

Windshield wipers The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
NOTE Except for vehicles equipped with LO- Slow
 If the headlights are switched to high beam, rain sensor HI- Fast
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
minate again when the headlights are
The windshield wiper and washer can be
switched back to low beam. To adjust intermittent intervals
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or
operated with the ignition switch in the “ON”
or “ACC” position. With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
“ ” position while the front fog lights are
illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
They can be turned back on again by rotating not operate the wipers until the ice has melted tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
the combination headlights and dimmer and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper knob (A).
switch back to “ ” position, and turning motor may be damaged.
the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-
tion.
 Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.

1- Fast MIST- Misting function

2- Slow The wipers will operate once.
Vehicles equipped with rain sensor OFF- Off
AUTO- Auto-wiper control
NOTE The windshield wipers can be operated with Rain sensor
 The speed-sensitive-operation function of the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” The wipers will automatically
the windshield wipers can be deactivated. position. operate depending on the amount
For further information, please contact your of moisture on the windshield.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a LO- Slow
repair facility of your choice.
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
the ice has melted and the blades are freed, HI- Fast
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
Misting function
Rain sensor (if so equipped)
The misting function can be used when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” Can only be used when the ignition switch is
position. “ON” position.
The wipers will operate once if the wiper If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and rain sensor (B) will detect the extent of rain
released. This operation is useful when it is (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to wipers will operate automatically.
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
position. windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.

Wiper operation under these conditions can
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
CAUTION NOTE
If your hands get trapped, you could be  The wipers may automatically operate when
ers.
injured and the wipers could malfunction or things such as insects or foreign objects are
become damaged. To deactivate the rain sen- affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
sor, place the lever in the “OFF” position. sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
NOTE them. To operate the wipers again, move the
5
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.
operation of the wipers does not take place Also, the wipers may operate automatically
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi- due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
ent temperature is about 32 °F (0 °C) or netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the
lower. lever to the “OFF” position.
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put dealer or a repair facility of your choice
any water-repellent coating on the wind- when replacing the windshield glass.
CAUTION shield. The rain sensor would not be able to
 With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- detect the extent of rain, and the wipers To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor
tion and the lever in the “AUTO” position, might stop working normally.
the wipers may automatically operate in the  In the following cases, the rain sensor may With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor)
situations described below. be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity
• When cleaning the outside surface of the at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or of the rain sensor by turning the knob (C).
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor. a repair facility of your choice
• When cleaning the outside surface of the • When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain val despite changes in the extent of rain.
sensor. • When the wipers do not operate even
• When using an automatic car wash. though it is raining.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind-
shield.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
sor.


“ACC” position. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
Windshield washer
C N00504601338
position.
To turn on the windshield washer, pull the
lever toward you with the ignition switch in
either the “ON” or “ACC” position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
5 When the wipers are not in operation or in
intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
toward you, the wipers will operate several
“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain Also, by releasing the lever soon after pulling
it toward you, the washer fluid will be
sprayed several times while the wipers are
NOTE The wipers will operate once if the lever is operating several times. (Intelligent washer)
 Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive) Intelligent washer will stop operating with
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
can be changed to intermittent operation any operation of the lever.
(vehicle-speed sensitive, or at adjustable
(D) is turned in the “+”direction when the
intervals). ignition switch is “ON” position.
For further information, please contact your
repair facility of your choice. D
Misting function
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow

and release, to operate the wipers once.
Use this function when you are driving in

mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released NOTE
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or  It is possible to modify functions as follows:

Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE NOTE
• Intelligent washer can be deactivated.  If the wipers become blocked by ice or other
• The wipers can be set to operate again after deposits on the glass, the motor may still
about 6 seconds. burn out even if the wiper switch is OFF. If
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors deposits form on the windshield, park your
dealer. vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine,
and clean the glass so that the wipers can
Precautions to observe when

operate smoothly.
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
5
using wipers and washers onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
N00523500212
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
the pump may fail.
After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-
CAUTION  During cold weather, add a recommended
tem will shut off automatically.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer solution that will not freeze in the
To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer
may not work or may be damaged. utes have passed, press the switch again. The
freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass indicator light will go out and the defogger
with the defroster before using the washer.  Replace the wiper blades when they are
worn. Use the proper size replacement will turn off.
blades. For further information, please con- If you need the defogger for more than
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors 20 minutes, press the switch again. This will
NOTE dealer. add 20 more minutes.
 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
wiper blades prematurely. Electric rear window defog- CAUTION
 Before using the wipers in cold weather,  The rear window defogger is not designed to
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
ger switch melt snow. Remove any snow manually
N00523701442
frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers before using the rear window defogger.
while the blades are frozen could cause the The rear window defogger can be used when  Use the rear window defogger only after the
wiper motor to burn out. the engine is running. engine has started and is running. Be sure to
The indicator light (A) will come on when turn the defogger switch off immediately
you press the electric rear window defogger after the window is clear to save on battery
switch. Electric current will flow through the power.
heating wires on the rear window to help
clear away moisture or frost.

Horn switch
their end user license agreements, please go
CAUTION Link System to the following website.
 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items N00563701109
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-
that are attached with adhesive over the grid
The Link System control of the devices con- closure.pdf
wires on the rear window.
nected via the USB input terminal or the
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid Bluetooth® 2.0 interface; the system allows Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
wires. the connected device to be operated by using
N00563901231
5 the switches in the vehicle or voice com-

mands. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak-
NOTE See the following section for details on how ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle
 As your vehicle is equipped with heated mir- to operate. using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
rors, mist can also be removed from the out- based on the wireless communication tech-
side rearview mirrors when the rear window Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page nology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to 5-136.
“Heated mirror” on page 5-50.) also allows the user to play music, saved in a
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-157.
Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle’s
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for a
speakers.
DISPLAY AUDIO.
Horn switch The system is equipped with a voice recogni-
tion function, which allows you to make
N00523800130 Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
hands-free calls by simple switch operations
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
To honk the horn, press the “ ” mark on the and voice command operations using a
steering wheel. defined voice tree.
Link System End User License
Agreement The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used
N00563801038 when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
You have acquired a device that includes soft-
ware licensed to Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the
automotive experience business unit), and face, you must pair the Bluetooth® device
their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con-
complete list of these 3rd party products and necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
Bluetooth® device” on page 5-142.

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Operating a music player connected via Blue-
NOTE
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. tooth®  P.5-147
 Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible
How to make or receive hands-free calls
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  P.5-147
WARNING  You can confirm the Link System software Phonebook function  P.5-149
 Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface version by pressing the HANG-UP button
allows you to make hands-free calls, if you 3 times (press and hold 2 times and then
choose to use the cellular phone while press briefly) within 10 seconds. Steering control switch and
driving, you must not allow yourself to be  For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, microphone 5
distracted from the safe operation of your refer to the following website: N00564001141
vehicle. Anything, including cellular [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
phone usage, that distracts you from the You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
safe operation of your vehicle increases America website.
your risk of an accident. [For vehicles sold in Canada]
 Refer to and comply with all state and You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
local laws in your area regarding cellular site.
phone usage while driving. Please read and agree to the “Warning about
Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”,
the websites mentioned above may connect
NOTE you to websites other than the Mitsubishi
 If the ignition switch is left in the “ACC” Motors website.
position, the accessory power will automati- http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
cally turn off after a certain period of time ucts/index.html
and you will no longer be able to use the  Software updates by cellular phone/digital
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory audio device manufacturers may
power comes on again if the ignition switch change/alter device connectivity.
1- Volume up button
is turned from the “ACC” position. Refer to
“ACC power auto-cutout function” on page
Steering control switch and microphone 2- Volume down button
5-51.  P.5-137 3- SPEECH button
Voice recognition function  P.5-139 4- PICK-UP button
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used
Useful voice commands  P.5-139 5- HANG-UP button
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
Speaker enrollment function  P.5-141 6- Microphone
or the device power is turned off.
 Hands-free calls will not be possible if your Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
phone does not have service available. the Bluetooth® device  P.5-142


 Pressing this button briefly during a call
Volume up button HANG-UP button
will enable voice recognition and allow
voice command input.  Press this button when an incoming call is
Press this button to increase the volume.
received to refuse the call.
PICK-UP button  Press this button during a call to end the
Volume down button current call.
 Press this button when an incoming call is When another call is on hold, you will
5 Press this button to decrease the volume. received to answer the telephone. switch to that call.
 If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
SPEECH button NOTE nition mode, the voice recognition mode
 When not receiving incoming calls, pressing will be deactivated.
 Press this button to change to voice recog- the PICK-UP button on vehicles equipped
with the Mitsubishi Multi-Communication
nition mode. NOTE
System, will activate the voice recognition of
While the system is in voice recognition ®  When you press the SPEECH button to enter
mode, “Listening” will appear on the the Bluetooth 2.0 interface.
voice recognition mode with a cellular phone
audio display. paired to the system, current information on
 When another call is received during a the cellular phone, such as “remaining bat-
NOTE call, press this button to put the first caller tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”
 On vehicles equipped with the Mitsubishi on hold and talk to the new caller. will be displayed on the audio display.*
Multi-Communication System, pressing the • In such circumstances, you can press the *: Some cellular phones will not send this
SPEECH button will activate the voice rec- button briefly to switch between callers. information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
ognition mode (a beep will sound when suc- You will switch to the first caller and the  Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
cessfully activated). To use the voice other caller will be put on hold. by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is
recognition of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, • To establish a three-way call in such situ- possible to use those services with your cel-
press the PICK-UP button. ations, press the SPEECH button (except lular phone.
for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Com-
 If you press the button briefly while in munication System) or PICK-UP button
voice recognition mode, it will interrupt (for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- Microphone
prompting and allow voice command Communication System) to enter voice N00575800025
input. recognition mode and then say “Join Your voice will be recognized by a micro-
Pressing the button longer will deactivate calls.” phone in the overhead console, allowing you
the voice recognition mode.


to make hands-free calls with voice com-
mands.
NOTE NOTE
 For best performance and further reduction  The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
of ambient noise, the vehicle windows sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
NOTE should be closed, lower the blower speed and rent language, and the second message is in
 If a cellular phone is within close proximity refrain from conversation with your passen- the selected language.
of the microphone, it may distort the sound gers while engaging the voice recognition  If many entries are registered in the vehicle
quality. In this case, place the cellular phone function. phonebook, changing the language will take
as far as possible from the microphone.  Some voice commands have alternative
commands.
a longer time.
 Changing the language deletes the mobile
5
 Depending on the selected language, some phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
Voice recognition function functions may not be available. interface. If you wish to use it, you will have
N00564101100 to import it again.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped

Selecting the language
with a voice recognition function. 6. When the voice guide says “English
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
Simply say voice commands and you can per- (Spanish or French) selected,” the lan-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
form various operations and make or receive guage change process will be completed
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
hands-free calls. and the system will return to the main
menu.
nication System).
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec- 2. Say “Setup.”
ognition is possible for US English, North 3. Say “Language.” Useful voice commands
American Spanish and Canadian French. The 4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan- N00564200016
factory setting is “English.” guage: English, Spanish or French.” Say
the desired language. (Example: “Eng- Help function
NOTE lish”) N00564300017
 If the voice command that you say differs 5. The voice guide will say “English (Span-
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
from the predefined command or cannot be ish or French) selected. Is this correct?”
recognized due to ambient noise or some with a help function.
Say “Yes.”
If you say “Help” when the system is waiting
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface If you say “No,” the system will return to
will ask you for the voice command again up for a voice command input, the system will
Step 4.
to 3 times. tell you a list of the commands that can be
used under the circumstances.


Answer “Yes” to change the setting or Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the
Canceling
answer “No” to keep the current setting. passcode and return to the main menu.
N00564400018
5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
There are 2 cancel functions. prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys- digit passcode. Remember this passcode.
If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to tem will return to the main menu. It will be required to use this system.”
exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Say a 4-digit number which you want to
If you are anywhere else within the system, set as a passcode.
Security function
say “Cancel” to return to the main menu. 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
5 N00564601121
guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-
It is possible to use a passcode as a security code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
Confirmation function setting function by setting a passcode of your choice
N00564501029
Answer “No” to return to the passcode
for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. input in Step 5.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped When the security function is turned on, it is 7. When the registration of the passcode is
with a confirmation function. necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-
With the confirmation function activated, you passcode in order to use all functions of the code is enabled” and the system will
are given more opportunities than normal to Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep- return to the main menu.
confirm a command when making various tion.
settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This
allows you to decrease the possibility that a Setting the passcode NOTE
 Passcode will be required to access the sys-
setting is accidentally changed.
Use the following procedure to turn on the tem after the next ignition cycle.
The confirmation function can be turned on
security function by setting a passcode.  It is required for a little time after engine
or off by following the steps below.
stop that the entered passcode is actually
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for recorded in the system.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- If the ignition switch is made to “ACC” or
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- “ON” or the engine is started immediately
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for after engine stop, there is a case when the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- entered passcode is not recorded in the sys-
nication System).
nication System). tem. At this time, please try to enter the pass-
2. Say “Setup.”
2. Say “Setup.” code again.
3. Say “Passcode.”
3. Say “Confirmation prompts.”
4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
abled. Would you like to enable it?”
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to
Answer “Yes.”
turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.”

You can turn a voice model registered with
Entering the passcode NOTE the speaker enrollment function on and off
 System must be unlocked to disable the pass-
If a passcode has been set and the security whenever you want.
code.
function is enabled, the voice guide will say
“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass- Speaker enrollment
code to continue” when the SPEECH button 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for N00564801107
(except for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the
Communication System) or PICK-UP button
(for vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
speaker enrollment process. 5
To ensure the best results, run through the
nication System) is pressed to enter voice rec- nication System).
process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-
ognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode 2. Say “Setup.”
ronment that is as quiet as possible (when
number to enter the passcode. 3. Say “Passcode.”
there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-
4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is
If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice cle windows are closed). Please turn off your
enabled. Would you like to disable it?”
guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent
Answer “Yes.”
passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct interruption of the process.
Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of
passcode. Use the following procedure for speaker
the passcode and return to the main menu.
enrollment.
5. When the disabling of the passcode is
NOTE completed, the voice guide will say “Pass- 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
 You can reenter the passcode as many times code is disabled” and the system will gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
as you want. return to the main menu. tion (manual transaxle), or the gearshift
 If you have forgotten your passcode, say lever in the “P” (PARK) position (Twin
“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and Speaker enrollment function Clutch SST) and pull the parking brake
then check with an authorized Mitsubishi lever.
N00564700011
Motors dealer.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the
NOTE
Disabling the passcode speaker enrollment function to create a voice
 Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the
model for one person per language. vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the
Use the following procedure to turn off the This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 vehicle in a safe area before attempting
security function by disabling the passcode. interface to recognise voice commands said speaker enrollment.
by you.


2. Press the SPEECH button (except for The system will register your voice and You can also retrain the system.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- then move on to the registration of the Use the following procedure to perform these
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for next command. Continue the process until actions.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- all phrases have been registered.
nication System). 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
3. Say “Voice training.” NOTE vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
4. The voice guide will say “This operation  To repeat the most recent voice training com- nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
must be performed in a quiet environment mand, press and release the SPEECH button. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
5 while the vehicle is stopped. See the  If you press the HANG-UP button anytime nication System).
owner’s manual for the list of required during the process, the system will beep and 2. Say “Voice training.”
training phrases. Press and release the stop the speaker enrollment process. 3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-
SPEECH button when you are ready to ment process once already, the voice
begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can- 6. When all enrollment commands have guide will say either “Enrollment is
cel at any time.” been read out, the voice guide will say enabled. Would you like to disable or
Press the SPEECH button to start the “Speaker enrollment is complete.” The retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled.
speaker enrollment process. system will then end the speaker enroll- Would you like to enable or retrain?”
ment process and return to the main 4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice
NOTE menu. model is on; when enrollment is “dis-
 If you do not start the speaker enrollment abled,” the voice model is off. Say the
process within 3 minutes after pressing the NOTE command that fits your needs.
SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment  Completing the speaker enrollment process
Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll-
function will time out. will turn on the voice model automatically. ment process and recreate a new voice
The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll-  The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on
ment has timed out.” The system will then work in this mode. page 5-141.)
beep and the voice recognition mode will be
deactivated.
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0
Enabling and disabling the voice
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.
interface and Bluetooth® device
model and retraining N00565001252
Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in N00564901065
table “Enrollment commands” on page Before you can make or receive hands-free
You can turn a voice model registered with
5-157. calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0
the speaker enrollment function on and off
whenever you want.


interface function, you must pair the Blue- 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
NOTE
tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.  If 7 devices have already been paired, the
tion (manual transaxle), or the gearshift
voice guide will say “Maximum devices
lever in the “P” (PARK) position (Twin
NOTE Clutch SST) and pull the parking brake
paired” and then the system will end the
 Pairing is required only when the device is pairing process. To register a new device,
lever. delete one device and then repeat the pairing
used for the first time. Once the device has
process.
been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
NOTE
face, all you need is to bring the device into
(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a
device” on page 5-145.)
5
the vehicle next time and the device will  You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with
connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto- the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-
matically (if supported by the device). The cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® 6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-
device must have Bluetooth® turned ON to device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.
connect. confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe When the confirmation function is on, the
location. system will confirm whether the number
said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”
Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired Answer “No” to return to pairing code
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. selection.
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE
music player most recently connected is auto- nication System).  Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 3. Say “Setup.” pairing code. Please refer to the device man-
interface. 4. Say “Pairing Options.” ual for pairing code requirements.
5. The voice guide will say “Select one of
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
be connected. Say “Pair.”
To pair
To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-

tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below.

NOTE NOTE matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0

interface.
 The pairing code entered here is only used  If you enter the wrong number, the voice
guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair- You can connect to the other paired cellular
for the Bluetooth® connection certification.
ing process will be cancelled. phone or music player by following setting
It is any 4-digit number the user would like
to select. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing change procedures.
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be it again.
keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the  To select a cellular phone
8. The voice guide will say “Please say the
5 pairing process.
name of the device after the beep.” You
N00582200021
Depending on the connection settings of the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
can assign a desired name for the Blue- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be
entered each time you connect the Blue- tooth® device and register it as a device nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- tag. Say the name you want to register vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
face. For the default connection settings, after the beep. nication System).
refer to the instructions for the device. 2. Say “Setup.”
NOTE 3. Say “Select phone.”
7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing  When the confirmation function is on, after 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
procedure on the device. See the device repeating the device tag you have said, the the numbers of the cellular phones and
manual for instructions.” Enter in the voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” device tags of corresponding cellular
Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you Answer “Yes.” phones will be read out in order, starting
have registered in Step 6. To change the device tag, answer “No” and with the cellular phone that has been most
then say the device tag again.
recently connected.
NOTE Say the number of the cellular phone that
 Depending on the Bluetooth® device, it may 9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com- you want to connect to.
take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue- plete,” and the pairing process will end. When the confirmation function is on, the
tooth® 2.0 interface. system will ask you again whether the
phone that you want to connect to is cor-
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- Selecting a device
rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con-
nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide N00565101077
nect to the cellular phone.
will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair- If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are Answer “No,” and the voice guide will
ing process will be cancelled.
available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or say “Please say.” Say the number of the
Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-
music player most recently connected is auto- phone that you want to connect to.
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.


When the confirmation function is on, the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
NOTE system will ask you again whether the vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
 You can connect to a phone at any time by
music player that you want to connect to nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
number, even before all of the paired num-
bers and device tags of corresponding cellu- connect to the music player. nication System).
lar phones are read out by the system. Answer “No,” and the voice guide will 2. Say “Setup.”
say “Please say.” Say the number of the 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
music player that you want to connect to. 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
5. The selected phone will be connected to
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”
5
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice NOTE Say “Delete.”
guide will say “<device tag> selected”  You can connect to a music player at any 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,”
and then the system will return to the time by pressing the SPEECH button and the numbers of the devices and device
main menu. saying the number, even before all of the tags of corresponding devices will be read
paired numbers and device tags of corre- out in order, starting with the device that
 To select a music player sponding music players are read out by the has been most recently connected. After it
system.
N00582300022 completes reading all pairs, the voice
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for guide will say “or all.”
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- 5. The selected music player will be con- Say the number of the device that you
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for want to delete from the system.
nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- If you want to delete all paired phones
The voice guide will say “<device tag>
nication System). from the system, say “All.”
selected” and then the system will return
2. Say “Setup.” 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice
to the main menu.
3. Say “Select music player.” guide will say “Deleting <device tag>
4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” <number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting
the numbers of the music players and  Deleting a device all devices. Is this correct?”
N00582400023
device tags of corresponding music play- Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s).
ers will be read out in order, starting with Use the following procedure to delete a Answer “No,” the system will return to
the music player that has been most paired Bluetooth® device from the Blue- Step 4.
recently connected. tooth® 2.0 interface. 7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and
Say the number of the music player that then the system will end the device dele-
you want to connect to. tion process.


To hear the list again from the beginning, 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
NOTE answer “Yes.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
 If the device deletion process fails for some
When you are done, answer “No” to nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete
return to the main menu. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
failed” and then the system will cancel delet-
ing the device. nication System).
2. Say “Setup.”
NOTE 3. Say “Pairing Options.”
 If you press and release the SPEECH button
To check a paired Bluetooth® 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of
5 and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
device list is being read, the system will advance or
Say “Edit.”
N00565201023
rewind the list.
Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with 5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and
®
You can check a paired Bluetooth device by the next highest number or “Previous” to read out the numbers of the Bluetooth®
following the steps below. return to the phone with the previous num- devices and device tags of corresponding
ber. devices in order, starting with the Blue-
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for  You can change the device tag by pressing
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- and releasing the SPEECH button and then
tooth® that has been most recently con-
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for saying “Edit” while the list is being read. nected.
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-  You can change the phone to be connected After all paired device tags have been
nication System). by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but- read, the voice guide will say “Which
2. Say “Setup.” ton and then saying “Select phone” while the device, please?” Say the number of the
3. Say “Pairing Options.” list is being read. device tag you want to change.
 You can change the music player to be con-
nected by pressing and releasing the NOTE
SPEECH button and then saying “Select  You can press and release the SPEECH but-
Say “List.” music player” while the list is being read. ton while the list is being read, and immedi-
5. The voice guide will read out device tags
ately say the number of the device tag you
of corresponding devices in order, starting
want to change.
with the Bluetooth® device that has been Changing a device tag
most recently connected. N00565301024
6. After the device tags of all paired Blue- 6. The voice guide will say “New name,
You can change the device tag of a paired cel- please.” Say the name you want to regis-
tooth® devices have been read, the system lular phone or music player. ter as a new device tag.
will say “End of list, would you like to Follow the steps below to change a device
start from the beginning?” tag.


When the confirmation function is on, the  By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s
voice guide will say “<New device tag>.
How to make or receive hands-
phonebook
Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.” free calls  By redialing a telephone number
Answer “No,” you can say the new device N00565500074
tag you want to register again. You can make or receive hands-free calls
Making a call by using the telephone
7. The device tag is changed. using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone number
When the change is complete, the voice
connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
guide will say “New name saved” and
then the system will return to the main
You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue- You can make a call by saying the telephone 5
number.
menu. tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without
dialing telephone numbers. 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
Operating a music player con- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
To make a call P.5-147
nected via Bluetooth® Send function P.5-149
Receiving calls P.5-149
N00565401100
nication System).
Mute function P.5-149
For the operation of a music player connected 2. Say “Dial.”
Switching between hands-free mode and pri-
via Bluetooth®, refer to the following sec- vate mode P.5-149
3. After the voice guide says “Number
tions. please,” say the telephone number.
4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num-
For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY NOTE ber recognized>.”
AUDIO  Hands-free calls may not operate correctly
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
when you place or receive the call directly
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. make the call.
from your cellular phone, instead of using
When the confirmation function is on, the
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
system will confirm the telephone number
For vehicles equipped with the again. To continue with that number,
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- answer “Yes.”
tem To make a call To change the telephone number, answer
N00565601085
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. “No.” The system will say “Number
You can make a call in the following 3 ways please” then say the telephone number
using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: again.
 By saying a telephone number


5. If only 1 telephone number is registered
NOTE NOTE under the name you just said, the voice
 In the case of English, the system will recog-  If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone-
guide will proceed to Step 6.
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the book and the mobile phonebook are empty,
If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis-
number “0.” the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone-
book is empty. Would you like to add a new tered that match the name you just said,
 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num- the voice guide will say “Would you like
bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *). entry now?”
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say to call <name> at [home], [work],
 The maximum supported telephone number
[mobile], or [other]?” Select the location
5 length is as follows:
“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”
You can now create data in the vehicle to call.
• International telephone number: + and tele-
phonebook.
phone numbers (to 18 digits).
• Except for international telephone number:
Answer “No,” the system will return to the NOTE
main menu.
telephone numbers (to 19 digits).  If the name you selected has matching data
in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone
3. After the voice guide says “Name please,” number is registered under the selected loca-
Making a call using a phonebook
tion, the voice guide will say
say the name you want to call, from those
You can make calls using the vehicle phone- “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
registered in the phonebook.
<name>. Would you like to add location or
book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® 4. If there is only 1 match, the system will try again?”
2.0 interface. proceed to Step 5. Say “Try again,” and the system will return
If there are 2 or more matches, the voice to Step 3.
For details on the phonebooks, refer to guide will say “More than one match was Say “Add location” and you can register an
“Phonebook function” on page 5-149. found, would you like to call <returned additional telephone number under the
name>.” If that person is the one you want selected location.
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for to call, answer “Yes.”  If the name you selected has matching data
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- Answer “No,” the name of the next in the mobile phonebook but no telephone
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for matching person will be uttered by the number is registered under the selected loca-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- voice guide. tion, the voice guide will say
nication System). “{home/work/mobile/other} not found for
2. Say “Call.” <name>. Would you like to try again?”
NOTE Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to
 If you say “No” to all names read by the sys- Step 3.
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.
found, returning to main menu” and the sys- Start over again from Step 1.
tem will return to the main menu.


6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name> “<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF
Mute function
<location>” and then the system will dial tones.
N00565900010
the telephone number. For example, if during a call you need to sim-
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a At any time during a call, you can mute the
NOTE response to an automated system, press the vehicle microphone.
 When the confirmation function is on, the SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
system will check if the name and location of send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel- “Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute
the receiver are correct. If the name is cor- lular phone. function and mute the microphone.
rect, answer “Yes.” Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn 5
To change the name or location to call, off the mute function and cancel the mute on
answer “No.” The system will return to Step Receiving calls the microphone.
3. N00565800019
If an incoming phone call is received while

Switching between hands-free
the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
Redialing position, the audio system will be automati- mode and private mode
N00566600014
You can redial the last number called, based cally turned on and switched to the incoming
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- call, even when the audio system was origi- The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch
lular phone. nally off. between hands-free mode (hands-free calls)
The voice guide announcement for the and private mode (calls using cellular phone).
Use the following procedure to redial. incoming call will be output from the front If you press the SPEECH button and say
passenger’s seat speaker. “Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for If the CD player or radio was playing when can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- the incoming call was received, the audio sys- vate mode.
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for tem will mute the sound from the CD player To return to hands-free mode, press the
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- or radio and output only the incoming call. SPEECH button again and say “Transfer
nication System). To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button call.”
2. Say “Redial.” on the steering wheel control switch.
When the call is over, the audio system will
return to its previous state.
Phonebook function
Send function N00566000018
N00565700018
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
During a call, press the SPEECH button to
unique phonebooks that are different from the
enter voice recognition mode, then say
phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They


are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile  To register a telephone number in
phonebook.
NOTE
the vehicle phonebook  If the maximum number of entries are
These phonebooks are used to register tele- N00580500033
already registered, the voice guide will say
phone numbers and make calls to desired
You can register a telephone number in the “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
numbers via voice recognition function. delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways:
Reading out a telephone number, and select- delete a registered name.
NOTE ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from If you say “No,” the system will return to the
5  Disconnecting the battery cable will not the phonebook of the cellular phone. main menu.
delete information registered in the phone-
book. 5. When the name has been registered, the
 To register by reading out a tele-
voice guide will say “home, work,
phone number
N00580600047
mobile, or other?” Say the location for
Vehicle phonebook 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for which you want to register a telephone
N00566101117
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- number.
This phonebook is used when making calls nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
with the voice recognition function. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- NOTE
Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi- nication System).  When the confirmation function is on, the
cle phonebook per language. 2. Say “Phonebook.” voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
Also, each entry has 4 locations associated rect?” Answer “Yes.”
If a telephone number has been registered for
with: home, work, mobile and other. You can the following: new entry, edit number,
the selected location, the voice guide will say
register one telephone number for each loca- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or “The current number is <telephone number>,
tion. import contact.” Say “New entry.” number please.”
4. The voice guide will say “Name please.” If you do not want to change the telephone
You can register a desired name as a name for Say your preferred name to register it. number, say “cancel” or the original number
any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle to keep it registered.
phonebook.
Names and telephone numbers can be
changed later on. 6. The voice guide will say “Number
please.” Say the telephone number to reg-
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all ister it.
paired cellular phones.

 To select and transfer one phone- 2. Say “Phonebook.”

NOTE 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
 In the case of English, the system will recog- book entry from the phonebook of
the following: new entry, edit number,
nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the the cellular phone
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
number “0.” N00580700035
import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the
4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone phonebook of the cellular phone and register
to import a single entry or all contacts?”
number you have just read, and then reg- it in the vehicle phonebook.
Say “Single entry.”
ister the number. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become
5
When the telephone number has been reg- NOTE ready to receive transferred phonebook
istered, the voice guide will say “Number  Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is data.
saved. Would you like to add another parked. Before transferring, make sure that
number for this entry?” the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
NOTE
To add another telephone number for a  All or part of data may not be transferred,
 If the maximum number of entries are
new location for the current entry, answer even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
already registered, the voice guide will say
“Yes.” The system will return to location tooth®, depending on the compatibility of “The phonebook is full. Would you like to
selection in Step 5. the device. delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to
Answer “No” to end the registration pro-  The maximum supported telephone number delete a registered name.
cess and return to the main menu. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of If you say “No,” the system will return to the
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first main menu.
19 digits.
NOTE  If telephone numbers contain characters
 When the confirmation function is on, after other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to
repeating the telephone number you have are deleted before the transfer. receive a contact from the phone. Only a
read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-
 For the connection settings on the cellular home, a work, and a mobile number can
rect?” Answer “Yes.”
phone side, refer to the instructions for the be imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
Answer “No” to return to telephone number
cellular phone.
registration in step 6. face will receive the phonebook data from
the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
nication System).


6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu- 8. The voice guide will say “Adding  Editing a telephone number
lar phone to set it up so that the phone- <name>.” N00579900040
book entry you want to register in the When the confirmation function is on, the 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
vehicle phonebook can be transferred to system will ask if the name is correct. vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
Answer “Yes.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Answer “No,” the voice guide will say vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
“Name please.” Register a different name. nication System).
NOTE
9. The voice guide will say “Numbers 2. Say “Phonebook.”
5  If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- saved.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular 10. The voice guide will say “Would you like the following: new entry, edit number,
phone or the connection takes too much to import another contact?” edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue import contact”. Say “Edit number.”
tact has timed out” and then the system will
with the registration. You can continue to 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
cancel the registration. In such case, start
over again from Step 1.
register a new phonebook entry from Step name of the entry you would like to edit,
 Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
5. or say list names.” Say the name of the
and holding the SPEECH button will cancel Answer “No,” the system will return to phonebook entry you want to edit.
the registration. the main menu.
NOTE
7. When the reception is complete, the voice  To change the content registered in  Say “List names,” and the names registered
in the phonebook will be read out in order.
guide will say “<Number of telephone the vehicle phonebook
Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to
numbers that had been registered in the N00579800036
the list of registered names” on page 5-153.
import source> numbers have been You can change or delete a name or telephone
imported. What name would you like to number registered in the vehicle phonebook.
use for these numbers?” You can also listen to the list of names regis- 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work,
Say the name you want to register for this tered in the vehicle phonebook. mobile or other?” Select and say the loca-
phonebook entry. tion where the telephone number you
want to change or add is registered.
NOTE
NOTE  The system must have at least one entry.
When the confirmation function is on, the
 If the entered name is already used for other system will check the target name and
phonebook entry or similar to a name used location again. Answer “Yes” if you want
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot to continue with the editing.
be registered.


Answer “No,” the system will return to  Editing a name 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”
Step 3. N00580100042 Say the new name you want to register.
6. The voice guide will say “Number, 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for 7. The registered name will be changed.
please.” Say the telephone number you vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- When the change is complete, the system
want to register. nication System) or PICK-UP button (for will return to the main menu.
NOTE nication System).  Listening to the list of registered names
2. Say “Phonebook.”
 If the telephone number is already registered
5
N00580200030
in the selected location, the voice guide will 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
say “The current number is <current num- the following: new entry, edit number, vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele- edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
phone number to change the current number. import contact.” Say “Edit name.” vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the nication System).
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone name of the entry you would like to edit, 2. Say “Phonebook.”
number. or say list names.” Say the name you want 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
When the confirmation function is on, the to edit. the following: new entry, edit number,
system will ask if the number is correct. edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
Answer “Yes.” NOTE import contact.” Say “List names.”
Answer “No,” the system will return to  Say “List names,” and the names registered 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the
the Step 3. in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer entries in the phonebook in order.
8. Once the telephone number is registered, to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list 5. When the voice guide is done reading the
of registered names” on page 5-153. list, it will say “End of list, would you like
the voice guide will say “Number saved”
and then the system will return to the to start from the beginning?” When you
main menu. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing want to check the list again from the
<name>.” beginning, answer “Yes.”
NOTE When the confirmation function is on, the When you are done, answer “No” to
 If the location where a telephone number system will check if the name is correct. return to the previous or main menu.
was already registered has been overwritten Answer “Yes” if you want to continue
with a new number, the voice guide will say with the editing based on this information.
“Number changed” and then the system will Answer “No,” the system will return to
return to the main menu.
Step 4.


4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 6. The system will ask if you really want to
NOTE name of the entry you would like to delete the selected telephone number(s) to
 You can call, edit or delete a name that is
delete, or say list names.” Say the name of go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”
being read out.
the phonebook entry in which the tele- Answer “No,” the system will cancel
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to
call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or phone number you want to delete is regis- deleting the telephone number(s) and then
“Delete” to delete it. tered. return to Step 4.
The system will beep and then execute your 7. When the telephone number deletion is
NOTE complete, the voice guide will say
5 command.
 If you press the SPEECH button and say  Say “List names,” and the names registered “<name> <location> deleted” and then
“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer the system will return to the main menu.
being read, the system will advance or to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list If all locations are deleted, the system will
rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to of registered names” on page 5-153. say “<name> and all locations deleted”
the next entry or “Previous” to return to the and the name will be removed from the
previous entry.
5. If only one telephone number is registered phonebook. If numbers still remain under
in the selected phonebook entry, the voice the entry, the name will retain the other
guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- associated numbers.
 Deleting a telephone number
N00580300044 tion>.”
1. Press the SPEECH button (except for If multiple telephone numbers are regis-  Erasing the phonebook
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- tered in the selected phonebook entry, the N00580400032
nication System) or PICK-UP button (for voice guide will say “Would you like to You can delete all registered information
vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu- delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], from the vehicle phonebook.
nication System). or all?”
2. Say “Phonebook.” Select the location to delete, and the voice 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca- vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
the following: new entry, edit number, tion>.” nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
import contact.” Say “Delete.” NOTE nication System).
 To delete the telephone numbers from all 2. Say “Phonebook.”
locations, say “All.” 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number,
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
import contact.” Say “Erase all.”


4. For confirmation purposes, the voice The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically
guide will ask “Are you sure you want to
NOTE
converts from text to voice the names regis-
 All or part of data may not be transferred,
erase everything from your hands-free tered in the transferred phonebook entries, even when the cellular phone supports Blue-
system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.” and creates names.
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all tooth®, depending on the compatibility of
the device.
registered information in the phonebook
and return to the main menu.
NOTE  Only a home, a work, and a mobile number
 Only the mobile phonebook transferred from can be imported.
5. The voice guide will say “You are about
to delete everything from your hands-free
the connected cellular phone can be used  The maximum supported telephone number 5
with that cellular phone. length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
system phonebook. Do you want to con- 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first
 You cannot change the names and telephone
tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue. numbers in the phonebook entries registered 19 digits.
Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select  If telephone numbers contain characters
registered information in the phonebook and delete specific phonebook entries, either. other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters
and return to the main menu. To change or delete any of the above, change are deleted before the transfer.
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, the applicable information in the source  For the connection settings on the cellular
erasing the hands-free system phone- phonebook of the cellular phone and then phone side, refer to the instructions for the
book” and then the system will delete all transfer the phonebook again. cellular phone.
data in the phonebook.
To import a devices phonebook 1. Press the SPEECH button (except for
When the deletion is complete, the voice
guide will say “Hands-free system phone-
Follow the steps below to transfer to the nication System) or PICK-UP button (for
book erased” and then the system will
mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in vehicles with Mitsubishi Multi-Commu-
return to the main menu.
the cellular phone. nication System).
2. Say “Phonebook.”
Mobile phonebook 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of
NOTE
N00566201062 the following: new entry, edit number,
 Transfer should be completed while the vehi-
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel- cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or
lular phone can be transferred in a batch and that the vehicle is parked in a safe location. import contact.” Say “Import contact.”
registered in the mobile phonebook.  The already stored phonebook in the mobile 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like
Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing phonebook is overwritten by the stored to import a single entry or all contacts?”
up to 1,000 names, can be registered. phonebook in the cellular phone. Say “All contacts.”


5. The voice guide will say “Importing the 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice The term “IC:” before the radio certification
contact list from the mobile phonebook. guide will say “Import complete” and number only signifies that Industry Canada
This may take several minutes to com- then the system will return to the main technical specifications were met.
plete. Would you like to continue?” menu. The antenna used for this transmitter must not
Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile be co-located or operating in conjunction
phonebook the phonebook stored in the with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
cellular phone will start.
General information users and installers must be provided with
N00566301106
Answer “No,” the system will return to installation instructions and transmitter oper-
5 the main menu. MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10 ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
IC: 279B-MDGMY10 compliance.
NOTE Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
 The transfer may take some time to complete radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- and found to comply with the limits for a
depending on the number of contacts. cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
 If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel- Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This provide reasonable protection against harmful
lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable device complies with Part 15 of the FCC interference in a residential installation.
to transfer contact list from phone” and then Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada This equipment generates, uses and can radi-
the system will return to the main menu. Rules. Operation is subject to the following ate radio frequency energy and, if not
 If you press the HANG-UP button or press two conditions: installed and used in accordance with the
and hold the SPEECH button during the data instructions, may cause harmful interference
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and  This device may not cause harmful inter- to radio communications.
the system will return to the main menu. ference. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
 If an error occurs during the data transfer, all  This device must accept any interference ence will not occur in a particular installation.
transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide received, including interference that may If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
will say “Unable to complete the phonebook cause undesired operation. ence to radio or television reception, which
import” and then the system will return to
the main menu.
can be determined by turning the equipment
 If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the CAUTION off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
voice guide will say “There are no contacts  Changes or modifications made to this correct the interference by one or more of the
on the connected phone.” equipment not expressly approved by the following measures:
manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
tion to operate this equipment.  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
USB input terminal

 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
circuit different from that to which the Inc. in the United States and other coun-
receiver is connected. tries.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus How to connect a USB memory
complies with Canadian ICES-003. device
N00566800074
5
Enrollment commands 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
N00566401093 the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion. 4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in the USB input terminal (D).
the glove compartment.
USB input terminal

N00566701096
You can connect your USB memory device or WARNING

iPod* to play music files stored in the USB 3. Connect a commercially available USB  An open glove compartment door can
memory device or iPod. connector cable (C) to the USB memory cause a serious injury or death to the front
The following explains how to connect and device (B). passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
remove a USB memory device or iPod. senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.

USB input terminal

3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
NOTE iPod (B).
WARNING
 Do not connect the USB memory device to  An open glove compartment door can
the USB input terminal directly. cause a serious injury or death to the front
The USB memory device may be damaged. passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
 When closing the glove compartment, be senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
careful not to trap the USB connector cable. keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
5 5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- NOTE
tion first and perform the installation steps  When closing the glove compartment, be
in reverse. careful not to trap the connector cable.
How to connect an iPod NOTE 5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the
N00566900046
 Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple ignition switch to the “LOCK” position
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn Inc. first and perform the installation steps in
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi- reverse.
tion. 4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in USB input terminal (D). Types of connectable devices
the glove compartment.
and supported file specifica-
tions
N00567001054
Except for vehicles equipped with

the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
N00583200031
For details about the types of connectable

devices and supported file specifications,
refer to the following manuals.

USB input terminal

For these connectable device types, “iPod*,”
For vehicles equipped with the DISPLAY
“iPod classic*,” “iPod nano*,” “iPod touch*”
NOTE
AUDIO  Do not keep your USB memory device or
and “iPhone*,” refer to the following web-
iPod in your vehicle.
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. site:
 It is recommended that you back up the files
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
in case of data damage.
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
For vehicles equipped with the  Do not connect to the USB input terminal
America website.
Mitsubishi Multi-Communication Sys- any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
[For vehicles sold in Canada]
tem
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-
reader, etc.) other than the connectable
devices specified in the previous section.
5
Refer to the separate owner’s manual. site. Please read and agree to the “Warning The device and/or data may be damaged. If
about Links to the Web Sites of Other Com- any of these devices was connected by mis-
panies”. The websites mentioned above may take, remove it after turning the ignition
For vehicles equipped with the switch to the “LOCK” position.
connect you to websites other than the
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface Mitsubishi Motors website.
N00583300029
http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-  File specifications
For details about the types of connectable ucts/index.html N00583500021
devices and supported file specifications, You can play music files of the following
refer to the following section. *: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
“iPod touch,” and “iPhone” are regis- ory device or other device supporting mass
 Device types tered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the storage class. When you connect your iPod,
N00583400033 United States and other countries. playable file specifications depend on the
Devices of the following types can be con- connected iPod.
nected.
NOTE Item Condition
Model name Condition  Depending on the type of the USB memory
MP3, WMA, AAC,
device or other device connected, the con- File format
Storage capacity of WAV
USB memory device nected device may not function properly or
256 Mbytes or more the available functions may be limited. Maximum number of
Models other than Digital audio player  It is recommended to use an iPod with firm- levels Level 8
USB memory supporting mass ware updated to the latest version. (including the root)
devices and iPods storage class  You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
Number of folders 700
the USB input terminal when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Number of files 65,535

Sun visors
Sun visors 12 V power outlet

N00524600281 N00525000585
Fold the sun visor downward (1) to reduce To use a “plug-in” type accessory, pull out the
front glare while driving. To reduce side plug located in front of the floor console box,
glare, turn the visor to the side (2). then insert the plug in the socket.
The accessory can be operated when the igni-
tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
5
Type 1
Card holder
Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the
lid of the vanity mirror.
Vanity mirror
Type 2
The vanity mirrors are located on the back of
the sun visors.

Interior lights
However, the light goes off immedi-
CAUTION Dome light (Front)/Reading ately if:
 Be aware that using electronic equipment lights  The door is closed while the igni-
with the engine off may run the battery
down.
N00525801274
tion switch is in the “ON” position.
 When the 12 V power outlet is not in use, be  The driver’s door is closed after all
sure that the plug is installed. This will pre-
Dome light (Front) the other doors are closed while the
vent the 12 V power outlet from becoming lock knob of the driver’s door is in
the lock position.
dirty and possibly short-circuiting. The dome light can be turned on by sliding
 The door is closed and the power
5
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory the dome light switch.
operating at 12 V and 120 W or less. door lock switch is used to lock the
doors.
 The keyless entry system remote
Interior lights control transmitter is used to lock
N00525300429
the doors.
 In vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors are locked
using the F.A.S.T.-key.
NOTE
 When the engine is started using the key
1- (DOOR) while the doors are closed, if you remove the
key, the dome light will illuminate for
The dome light comes on when any
approximately 30 seconds then go off.
door is opened. After all doors are
 When the engine is started using the
closed, the dome light will stay on for
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors are closed, if
1- Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)  approximately 30 seconds and then go the ignition switch is moved to the “LOCK”
P.5-162 off. position, the dome light will illuminate for
2- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights  approximately 30 seconds and then go off.
P.5-161  The time until the light goes off can be
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi

Interior lights
2-(OFF)  In vehicles equipped with the
The dome light goes off. F.A.S.T.-key, the doors are locked
using the F.A.S.T.-key.
Reading lights NOTE

N00553800025  When the engine is started using the key
while the doors are closed, if you remove the
Regardless of the dome light switch position,
5 when you press the lens, the light on the side
key, the dome light will illuminate for
approximately 30 seconds then go off.
that is pressed illuminates; when you press  When the engine is started using the
the lens again, the light goes out. F.A.S.T.-key while the doors are closed, if
1- (OFF) the ignition switch is moved to the “LOCK”
The dome light turns off. position, the dome light will illuminate for
2- () approximately 30 seconds and then go off.
The dome light comes on when any  The time until the light goes off can be
door is opened. After all doors are adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
closed, the dome light will stay on for Motors dealer for details.
approximately 30 seconds and then go
off. However, the light goes off imme- 3-(ON)
diately if: The dome light comes on.
 The door is closed while the igni-
tion switch is in the “ON” position.
 The driver’s door is closed after all
the other doors are closed while the Interior light auto-cutout func-
Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)
lock knob of the driver’s door is in tion (dome light and other
the lock position. lights)
N00525401498
 The door is closed and the power
N00526301465
The dome light can be turned on by sliding door lock switch is used to lock the
doors. If any of the interior lights are left on with the
the dome light switch. ignition switch in the “LOCK” position, the
 The keyless entry system remote
control transmitter is used to lock lights go off automatically after about 30
the doors. minutes.

Storage spaces
The lights come on again if the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” or “ACC” posi-
NOTE
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space
tion, any door or the trunk lid is opened and
when leaving the vehicle.
closed, or the keyless entry system or
F.A.S.T.-key is operated.
NOTE
 The interior light auto-cutout function can be 5
deactivated. The time until the lights auto-
matically go off can be adjusted. See your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
details.
WARNING
 An open glove compartment door can
cause a serious injury or death to the front
Storage spaces passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
N00526400515 1- Floor console box with lid senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
2- Front console tray (if so equipped) keep the glove compartment door closed
CAUTION 3- Front console boxes (if so equipped) when driving.
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans, 4- Glove compartment
or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will NOTE
become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
Glove compartment  The USB input terminal is located in the
N00551501285 glove compartment. For details, refer to
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
“USB input terminal” on page 5-157.
may rupture. The heat may also deform or To open the glove compartment, pull the
crack plastic spectacle parts. lever (A).
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a Card holder
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
during a sudden stop. There is a card holder on the inside of the
glove compartment.

Storage spaces
CAUTION Lower box

 Do not use the front console tray as an ash-
tray.
This could cause a fire.
Front console boxes (if so equipped)

5 N00546401084
To open, push the lid.
NOTE Upper box

 Up to 2 cards will fit in the card holder.
CAUTION
 Do not use the front console boxes as an ash-
Front console tray (if so equipped) tray.
N00547800017
This could cause a fire.
The front console tray is on the front console

part. Floor console box with lid
N00551600205
To open the floor console box, lift the release

lever (A) and raise the lid.

Cup holder
Cup holder For the rear seat

N00527301446 N00537000120
This cup holder is located in the rear seat arm

For the front seat rest (A).
Pull the rear arm rest down to use the cup
holder.
The cup holder is located the middle of the
floor console. 5
The cup holder is designed for holding cups
or drink-cans securely.
Tissue holder
The tissue holder (A) is located on the under-

side of the floor console box lid.
Bottle holder
N00502800036
CAUTION CAUTION
 Do not drink beverages while driving your
 Do not drink beverages while driving your
vehicle. This is distracting and could cause
vehicle. This is distracting and could cause
an accident.
an accident.
 Vibration and shaking while driving may
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.

Assist grip
NOTE
 Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc.
 Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
tles, etc.
5
There are bottle holders located on both sides
of the front seats.
CAUTION WARNING
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
or out of the vehicle. pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
The assist grips could detach and cause an tain airbag was activated, any such item
accident. could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Coat hook Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
N00553600081
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist hang on the coat hook.
grip of the driver’s side.
Assist grip
N00559000029
These grips are to support the body by hand

while seated in the vehicle.

Driving safety
Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 6
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-5
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-10
Fuel economy
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
N00628800107 N00628900010
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents. tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
nificant effect on your fuel use. Several rec- Your driving ability can be seriously impaired from moving forward and possibly interfering
ommendations for achieving the greatest fuel even with blood alcohol levels far below the with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking, genuine floor mats are recommended.
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
 Whenever accelerating from a stop,
6 always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
To install the floor mat
 When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
N00628700050
not idle the engine. Shut it off. 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary floorboard.
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
stops. 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- holes over the retaining clips.
pharmacist before driving while under the
mended pressures. 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
influence of any of these medications.
 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
WARNING
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
safely permit.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
lubricated according to the recommenda- impaired.
tions in this manual.
 Always keep your vehicle well main-
tained. A poorly maintained engine
wastes fuel and costs money. Floor mat
 Do not overload your vehicle. N00628600017
The original equipment floor mat provided

with your vehicle was specifically designed NOTE
for your vehicle. Always properly position  The shape of the mat and the number of
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere retaining clips may vary depending on the
with operation of the pedals. Always use the vehicle model.
6-2 Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
WARNING possible, while still keeping good visibil-
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
ity, and good control of the steering
properly installed, it can interfere with the
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls.
operation of the pedals. Interference with
the pedals can cause unintended accelera- Check the instrument panel indicators and
tion and/or increased stopping distances multi-information display for any possible
resulting in a crash and injury. Always problem.
make sure the floor mat does not interfere  Move the front passenger seat as far back
with the accelerator or brake pedal. as possible.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
 Make sure that infants and small children 6
are properly restrained in accordance with
mat. all laws and regulations.
 Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down. Vehicle preparation before
 Never install a second mat over or under Defrosters
an existing floor mat.
driving
N00629001712
 Do not use a floor mat designed for Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
another model vehicle even if it is a Mit- For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always and set the blower switch on high. You should
subishi genuine floor mat. observe the following: be able to feel the air blowing against the
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol- windshield.
lowing:
• Periodically check that the floor mat is
Seat belts and seats {Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door window)” on page 7-8, 7-13.}
properly secured with the retaining clips.
 Before starting the vehicle, make certain
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
that you and all passengers are seated and
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
wearing their seat belts properly (with
Tires
other reason, always check the condition
of the floor mat after it has been rein- children in the rear seat, in appropriate
stalled. restraints), and that all the doors are Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
• While the vehicle is stopped with the locked. uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,
engine off, check that the floor mat is not glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look
interfering with the pedals by depressing for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
the pedals fully. the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
(including spare tire) for proper pressures.
Driving safety 6-3

Safe driving techniques

Replace your tires before they are heavily can avoid an accident or injury. However, if Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
worn out. you give extra attention to the following the engine runs at the proper speed and if
As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- areas, you can better protect yourself and the headlights are as bright as normally.
sure monitoring system, there is a risk of your passengers: Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, ble that a very low battery could freeze.
replacement should, therefore, be performed road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors of stopping distance between your vehicle WARNING
dealer. and the vehicle ahead.  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
 Before changing lanes, check your mir-
6 rors and use your turn signal light.
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
tery to explode, which could cause serious
Lights  While driving, keep a tight grip on the injury or death.
steering wheel. Always wear protective clothes and a face
Have someone watch while you turn all the  While driving, watch the behavior of mask when working with your battery, or
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. let a skilled mechanic do it.
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on  Always obey applicable laws and regula-
the instrument panel. tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
leave room for unexpected events, such as ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
sudden braking. time to distribute oil to all cylinders and
Fluid leaks
 If you plan to drive in another country, turbocharger. Then drive your vehicle
obey their vehicle registration laws and slowly.
Check the ground under the vehicle after make sure you will be able to get the right  Stay at low speeds at first so that the
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or fuel. transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are have time to spread to all the lubrication
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need points.
to find out why immediately and have it Driving during cold weather  Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in
fixed. N00629400432
cold weather conditions. This is normal
 Check the battery, including terminals and
and shifting will get easier as the transaxle
cables. During extremely cold weather,
Safe driving techniques the battery will not be as strong. Also, the
warms up.
 Check the engine antifreeze.
N00629200108
battery power level may drop because
Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and more power is used for cold starting and
your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you driving.
6-4 Driving safety

Braking
If there is not enough coolant because of a authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
leak or from engine overheating, add Mit- repair facility of your choice at regular inter-
When driving downhill
subishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life vals according to the “WARRANTY AND
Coolant Premium or equivalent. MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. It is important to take advantage of the engine
Please read this section in conjunction braking by shifting to a lower gear while
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7. driving on steep downhill roads in order to
When brakes are wet prevent the brakes from overheating.
WARNING
Check the brake system while driving at a
 Never open the radiator cap when the
low speed immediately after starting, espe- Parking
radiator is hot. You could be seriously
burned. cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm N00629600320 6
they work normally.
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that the
A film of water can be formed on the brake Parking on a hill
discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
standard equipment tires be replaced with
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
winter tires when the vehicle is going to
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
be used in winter.
the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
The standard equipment tires provided
depressing the brake pedal. If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
with this vehicle are summer tires and use
a high-grip compound that provides supe-
rior grip. When driving in cold weather For vehicles with manual trans-
The road grip, however, is reduced in win- axle
ter. On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking
When replacing the standard equipment system, making the brakes less effective. Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
tires with winter tires, all four tires must While driving in such conditions, pay close (Reverse) position when parking on a down-
be replaced using radial identicalsize win- attention to preceding and following vehicles hill slope, into the 1st position when parking
ter tires. and to the condition of the road surface. From on an uphill slope.
time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal
Braking and check how effective the brakes are.
N00629500374
All the parts of the brake system are critical

to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
Driving safety 6-5

Loading information
mation placard located on the driver’s door
For vehicles with Twin Clutch SST Where you park sill of your vehicle will show how much
weight it may properly carry.
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set Your front bumper can be damaged if you
when parked and that the gearshift lever is in scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.
the “P” (PARK) position. Be careful when traveling up or down steep
WARNING
When parking on a hill, it is important to set  Never overload your vehicle. Overloading
slopes where your bumper can scrape the
can damage your vehicle, adversely affect
the parking brake before moving the gearshift road. vehicle performance, including handling
lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
and braking, cause tire failure, and result
vents loading the parking brake against the
6 transmission gear. When this happens, it is
WARNING in an accident.
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where
difficult to move the gearshift lever out of the
combustible materials such as dry grass or It is important to familiarize yourself with the
“P” (PARK) position. leaves can come in contact with a hot following terms before loading your vehicle:
exhaust, since a fire could occur.
Parking with the engine run-  Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load
ning on an individual tire that is determined by
When leaving the vehicle distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight and
Never leave the engine running while you dividing by two.
take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the When leaving the vehicle unattended, always
carry the key and lock all doors.  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an
engine running in a closed or poorly venti- individual tire that is determined by dis-
lated place. Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
area. tributing to each axle its share of the curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal
WARNING occupant weight and dividing by two.
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or Loading information  Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum
death from accidentally moving the gear- N00629900365 of -
shift lever (manual transaxle) or the gear- It is very important to know how much (a) Curb weight;
shift lever (Twin Clutch SST) or from the (b) Accessory weight;
weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is
accumulation of toxic exhaust fumes in the (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and
passenger compartment.
called the vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo (d) Production options weight.
(including the roof load) and non-factory-
installed options. The tire and loading infor-
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
 Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi- *:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
cle with standard equipment including the person as defined by U.S.A. and information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-12.
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool- Canadian regulations.
ant. Type 1
 Accessory weight: the combined weight
(in excess of those standard items which
may be replaced) of automatic transmis- Tire and loading information
sion, power steering, power brakes, power placard
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, N00630100338
to the extent that these items are available The tire and loading information placard is 6
as factory- installed equipment (whether located on the driver’s door sill.
installed or not).
 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*
times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity.
Type 2
 Production options weight: the combined
weight of those installed regular produc-
tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
in excess of those standard items which
they replace, not previously considered in
curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. This placard shows the maximum number of
 Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
times the number of specified occupants. well as “the combined weight of occupants
(In your vehicle the number is 3) and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
 Occupant distribution: distribution of capacity weight. The weight of roof road is
occupants in a vehicle as specified. (In included in the definition of “cargo” when
your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, determining the vehicle capacity weight. This
1 in second row seat) placard also tells you the size and recom-
mended inflation pressure for the original
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201248
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the NOTE
available amount of cargo and  The above steps for determining
luggage load capacity. For exam- correct load limit were written in
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals accordance with U.S.A. regula-
1400 lbs. and there will be five tions.
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi- Your vehicle cannot tow a
cle, the amount of available cargo trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of
this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING Trailer towing

N00629700507  To reduce the risk of serious injury or N00629801332
death, the combined weights of the driver,
passengers and cargo and must never
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance,
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident.
6 For added information, if needed, refer to  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
on page 6-8. cargo or luggage cannot move when your
vehicle is in motion.
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin
listed on the safety certification label (A) if you suddenly have to brake can cause a WARNING
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door serious accident or injury or death.  Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of It may not be possible to maintain control
weight. your vehicle. Try to spread the weight or adequate braking.
evenly.
6-10 Driving safety

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Automatic air conditioning with Fahrenheit scale (if so equipped) .7-4
Automatic air conditioning with Celsius scale (if so equipped).......7-9
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-14
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-15
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-15
General information about your radio ...........................................7-15
7
Vents
Vents Left Right Left Right

N00729900223
A- Knob A- Knob
7 1- Close 1- Close
2- Open 2- Open
1- Center vents
2- Side vents
Side vents NOTE
 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
Air flow and direction adjust- Move the knob to make adjustments. air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
ments To close the vent, move the knob to the out-
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
indicate a problem.
N00730200242 side as far as possible.
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
Center vents ing from operating normally.
Move the knob to make adjustments.

To close the vent, move the knob to the inside Changing the mode selection
as far as possible. N00736401618
To change the position and amount of air

flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-
tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on
page 7-5, 7-10.
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-

ger compartment. 7
NOTE
 With the mode selection dial between the Foot/Defroster position
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the upper part of the passenger compart- Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
ment. With the mode selection dial between the door windows.
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
Foot/Face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.
Comfort controls 7-3

Automatic air conditioning with Fahrenheit scale (if so equipped)
NOTE Automatic air conditioning NOTE

 With the mode selection dial between the
with Fahrenheit scale (if so  There is an interior air temperature sensor
(A) in the illustrated position.
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the leg area. With the mode selection dial equipped) Never place anything over the sensor, since
doing so will prevent it from functioning
between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air N00731500242
properly.
flows mainly to the windshield and the door
windows.
Control panel
N00711800470
Defroster position
7
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
door windows.
1- Temperature control dial Blower speed selection dial

2- Air selection switch N00736900094
3- Blower speed selection dial
4- Air conditioning switch When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
5- Mode selection dial tion, select the blower speed by turning the
6- Electric rear window defogger switch blower speed selection dial.
 P.5-135 Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.

NOTE Mode selection dial

 While the engine coolant temperature is low, N00737100093
the temperature of the air from the heater To change the amount of air flowing from the
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
even if you have selected warm air with the “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
dial.
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting) 7
Outside air will be introduced and the air
Temperature control dial conditioning will stop. In this case, manual
N00737001363 operation is possible.
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature to the lowest setting)
control dial clockwise to make the air Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate. In this case, you
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
cannot select outside air and turn the air
air cooler. conditioning off. Air selection switch
N00737200238
The above indicates the factory settings. You Normally, use the outside air position to keep
can personalize the air selection switch and the windshield and side windows clear and to
air conditioning switch to match your per- quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
sonal preferences. shield.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a To change the air selection, simply press the
repair facility of your choice for assistance. air selection switch. A sound will be made
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning every time you press the switch.
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page 7-7.  Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection Outside air is introduced into the passen-
(Changing the function setting)” on page 7-6. ger compartment.

 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} Press the air selection switch for about 10
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
NOTE seconds or longer.
 If the mode selection dial is set between
compartment. When the setting has changed, the system
“ ” and “ ”, you cannot turn the air con- will beep and the indicator light will flash.
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi- • When the setting has changed from
tion.
enabled to disabled,
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
the system will beep three times and the
 When the mode selection dial or the blower
speed selection dial is set to the “AUTO”
indicator will flash three times.
position again after manual operation, the air • When the setting has changed from dis-
selection switch will also be automatically abled to enabled,
controlled. the system will beep two times and the
7 indicator light will flash three times.
Personalizing the air selection NOTE

(Changing the function setting)  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
When the air conditioning turns on, the air N00760000034 control”.
selection is controlled automatically. When  While the mode selection dial is set between
You can change the following functions to
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
match your preference. “ ” and “ ” position, the air selection
automatically goes back to the outside air will automatically change to the outside air
position.  Enable automatic air control: position, even if the system is set to “Disable
If high cooling performance is desired, or if When the mode selection dial or the automatic air control”, in order to prevent
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in blower speed selection dial is set to the windows from fogging up.
some way, use the recirculation position. “AUTO” position, the air selection switch
Switch to the outside air position every now will also be automatically controlled.
and then to keep the windows from fogging Air conditioning switch
up.  Disable automatic air control: N00737300200
Even when the mode selection dial or the Push the switch, and the air conditioning
CAUTION blower speed selection dial is set to the compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch indicator light (A) will come on.
cause the windows to fog up. will not be automatically controlled. A sound will be made every time you push
the switch.
 Changing the settings:


Press the air conditioning switch for about
NOTE 10 seconds or longer.
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
When the setting has changed, the system
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press • When the setting has changed from
the air conditioning switch once to turn the enabled to disabled,
system off, then once more to turn it back on. the system will beep three times and the
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will indicator will flash three times.
stop. • When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
Personalizing the air conditioning the system will beep two times and the
Push the switch again and the air condition- switch (Changing the function set- indicator light will flash three times. 7
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
ting)
light (A) goes off. NOTE
N00759800032
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
CAUTION match your preference.
conditioning control”.
 Using the air conditioning slightly increases  While the mode selection dial is set between
the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure  Enable automatic air conditioning control: “ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when When the mode selection dial or blower ing will run automatically, even if the system
shifting the transaxle into drive. speed selection dial has been set to the is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning
control”, in order to prevent windows from
“AUTO” position or when the tempera-
fogging up.
ture control dial has been set to the mini-
NOTE mum temperature, the air conditioning
 If a problem is detected in the air condition- switch is automatically controlled.
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then trol:
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
The air conditioning switch is not auto-
tioning indicator light does not blink there is
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked
matically controlled, unless the air condi-
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or tioning switch is used.


To remove frost or mist from the windshield
Operating the air conditioning NOTE and door windows, use the mode selection
system (automatic mode)  Set the temperature at about 75 under normal
dial (“ ” or “ ”).
N00731701384
conditions.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
For ordinary defrosting
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Use this setting to keep the windshield and
even if you have selected warm air with the
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
from fogging up, the vent mode will be
snow).
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.
7
Operating the air conditioning
In normal conditions, use the system in the
system (manual mode)
N00731800072
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the trolled manually by setting the blower speed
“AUTO” position. selection dial and the mode selection dial to
2. Select the temperature control dial to the the desired positions. To return to automatic
desired temperature. The temperature can operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
be set within a range of around 61 to 89. tion.
position.
The temperature will increase as the dial
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
is turned to the right. Defrosting or defogging (winding the blower speed selection dial.
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
“AUTO” position.
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired temperature by turn-
N00732400280 ing the temperature control dial.
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
CAUTION
speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
be controlled automatically.
through all the windows.

Automatic air conditioning with Celsius scale (if so equipped)

For quick defrosting 6- Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE  P.5-135
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial to the maximum cool position.
This will blow cool air on the window glass NOTE
and fog it up.  There is an interior air temperature sensor
(A) in the illustrated position.
Never place anything over the sensor, since
Automatic air conditioning doing so will prevent it from functioning
with Celsius scale (if so properly.
equipped)
N00731500255
7
position.
Control panel
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
N00711800483
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
NOTE
 While the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
ing compressor will run automatically. The
outside air position will also be selected
Blower speed selection dial
automatically.
N00736900111
 If the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” you cannot turn the air con-
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
1- Temperature control dial tion, select the blower speed by turning the
tion. This prevents the windows from 2- Air selection switch blower speed selection dial.
fogging up. 3- Blower speed selection dial Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the 4- Air conditioning switch blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
side vents toward the door windows. 5- Mode selection dial wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to


the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow The above indicates the factory settings. You
will stop. can personalize the air selection switch and
air conditioning switch to match your per-
sonal preferences.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page 7-12.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on page
7 7-11.
NOTE
Mode selection dial
N00737100136
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
Temperature control dial even if you have selected warm air with the To change the amount of air flowing from the
N00737000236 dial. vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the  When the temperature is set to the highest or “Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
control dial clockwise to make the air tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
air cooler.
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioning will stop.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate.


automatically goes back to the outside air  Changing the settings:
Air selection switch
position. Press the air selection switch for about 10
N00737200241
If high cooling performance is desired, or if seconds or longer.
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the outside air is dusty or contaminated in When the setting has changed, the system
the windshield and side windows clear and to some way, use the recirculation position. will beep and the indicator light will flash.
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Switch to the outside air position every now • When the setting has changed from
shield. and then to keep the windows from fogging enabled to disabled,
up. the system will beep three times and the
To change the air selection, simply press the
indicator will flash three times.
air selection switch. A sound will be made
CAUTION • When the setting has changed from dis-
every time you press the switch.
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
abled to enabled,
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} cause the windows to fog up. the system will beep two times and the 7
Outside air is introduced into the passen- indicator light will flash three times.
ger compartment.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} Personalizing the air selection NOTE
Air is recirculated inside the passenger (Changing the function setting)  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
compartment. N00760000047 control”.
You can change the following functions to  While the mode selection dial is set to the
match your preference. “ ” position, the air selection will auto-
matically change to the outside air position,
 Enable automatic air control: even if the system is set to “Disable auto-
When the mode selection dial or the matic air control”, in order to prevent win-
blower speed selection dial is set to the dows from fogging up.
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will also be automatically controlled.
Air conditioning switch
 Disable automatic air control: N00737300239
Even when the mode selection dial or the Push the switch, and the air conditioning
blower speed selection dial is set to the compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
When the air conditioning turns on, the air “AUTO” position, the air selection switch indicator light (A) will come on.
selection is controlled automatically. When will not be automatically controlled. A sound will be made every time you push
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection the switch.


Press the air conditioning switch for about
NOTE 10 seconds or longer.
 Sometimes, for example after using a high-
When the setting has changed, the system
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press • When the setting has changed from
the air conditioning switch once to turn the enabled to disabled,
system off, then once more to turn it back on. the system will beep three times and the
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will indicator will flash three times.
stop. • When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
Personalizing the air conditioning the system will beep two times and the
7 Push the switch again and the air condition- switch (Changing the function set- indicator light will flash three times.
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
ting)
light (A) goes off. NOTE
N00759800058
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
CAUTION match your preference.
conditioning control”.
 Using the air conditioning slightly increases  While the mode selection dial is set to the
the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure  Enable automatic air conditioning control: “ ” position, the air conditioning will run
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when When the mode selection dial or blower automatically, even if the system is set to
shifting the transaxle into drive. speed selection dial has been set to the “Disable automatic air conditioning control”,
in order to prevent windows from fogging
“AUTO” position or when the tempera-
up.
ture control dial has been set to the mini-
NOTE mum temperature, the air conditioning
 If a problem is detected in the air condition- switch is automatically controlled.
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then trol:
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
The air conditioning switch is not auto-
tioning indicator light does not blink there is
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked
matically controlled, unless the air condi-
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or tioning switch is used.


To remove frost or mist from the windshield
Operating the air conditioning NOTE and door windows, use the mode selection
system (automatic mode)  Set the temperature at about 25 under normal
dial (“ ” or “ ”).
N00731701430
conditions.
For ordinary defrosting
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, Use this setting to keep the windshield and
even if you have selected warm air with the
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
from fogging up, the vent mode will be
snow).
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.
7
Operating the air conditioning
In normal conditions, use the system in the
system (manual mode)
N00731800098
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the trolled manually by setting the blower speed
“AUTO” position. selection dial and the mode selection dial to
2. Select the temperature control dial to the the desired positions. To return to automatic
desired temperature. The temperature can operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
be set within a range of around 18 to 32. tion.
position.
The temperature will increase as the dial
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the out-
is turned to the right. Defrosting or defogging (wind- side air position.
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
“AUTO” position.
shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
N00732400437 ing the blower speed selection dial.
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower 4. Select your desired temperature by turn-
CAUTION ing the temperature control dial.
speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
be controlled automatically.
through all the windows.

Important air conditioning operating tips

For quick defrosting
NOTE Air conditioning system refrig-
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature erant and lubricant recommen-
control dial to the maximum cool position.
This will blow cool air on the window glass dations
and fog it up.
If the air conditioning seems less effective
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
Important air conditioning leak.
operating tips Have the system inspected by your authorized
N00733700280 Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever of your choice.
7 possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” vehicle interior extremely hot which then
position. CAUTION
requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.  The air conditioning system in your vehicle
sary to park in the sun, open the windows must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- for the first few minutes of air condition-
tion. 134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56.
ing to expel the hot air. Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed cause severe damage and may require replac-
NOTE when the air conditioning is in use. The ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning
 While the mode selection dial is set to the entry of outside air through open windows system.
will reduce cooling efficiency. The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
3. When running the air conditioning, make sphere is not recommended.
pressor will run automatically. The outside
sure the air intake, which is located in The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi-
air position will also be selected automati-
cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone
cally. front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to
 While the “ ” position is selected, you tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in global warming.
cannot turn the air conditioning off or select the air-intake chamber may reduce air It is recommended that the old refrigerant be
the recirculation position. This prevents the flow and plug the water drains. saved and recycled for future use.
windows from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.

Air purifier
During a long period of disuse Antenna NOTE

N00734200455 • When driving into a structure that has a low
The air conditioning should be operated for at ceiling.
least five minutes each week, even in cold To remove
weather. This includes the quick defrosting General information about
mode. Operating the air condition system
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise. your radio
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning N00733901494
in the best operating condition. Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and
FM stations.
Air purifier
The quality of your reception is affected by 7
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
N00733800151
The air conditioning system is equipped with This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal
an air filter to remove pollen and dust. Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is
dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace subject to the following conditions:
it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-  The device may not cause harmful inter-
NANCE MANUAL”. ference.
To install  This device must accept any interference
recieved, including interference that may
NOTE cause undesirable operation.
 Operation in certain conditions such as driv- Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the (B) until it is securely retained. CAUTION
air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-
 Changes or modifications not expressly
vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
air flow is lower than normal or when the
NOTE approved by the party meeting the above
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the conditions could void the user’s authority to
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
following cases: operate the equipment.
replace the air filter.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a • When using an automatic car wash
repair facility of your choice for assistance. • When covering your vehicle with a car
cover

General information about your radio
Signal transmission Reflection Cross modulation

FM signals do not follow the earth surface The reason why one can hear FM but not AM If one listens to a weak station and is in the
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that vicinity of another strong station, both sta-
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected tions might be received simultaneously.
be received over long distances. AM signals by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by Because FM signals are easily reflected by
the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
broadcasts can be received over longer disturbances.
tances. The direct signal from the broadcast station
reaches the antenna slightly before the
7 reflected signal. This time difference may
FM AM
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
FM stereo reception
25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
(40 to 64 km) (160 km)
Stereo reception requires a high quality
broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
Weak reception (fading) more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
Because of the limited range of FM signals tion.
and the way FM waves transmit, you may
experience weak or fading FM reception.
When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
Causes of disturbances
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis- FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
turbed. tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
those without an electronic noise suppression
General information about your radio

device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power
lines, lightning and other types of similar
electrical phenomena.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Tools and jack ..................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-10
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-11
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-13 8
If the vehicle breaks down

1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine bands or bracelets that might make an
N00836300190 N00836400670
accidental electrical contact.
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the 2. Position the vehicles close enough
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with together so that the jumper cables can
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. touching each other.
slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the WARNING CAUTION
flashers flashing.  Follow the procedure described in this sec-  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
tion when using the jump cable to start the volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
both systems can be damaged.
If the engine stops/fails engine. Failure to follow these instructions
can cause serious injury or death.
8 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
If the engine stops, there will be no power
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
assist to the steering and brakes, making these CAUTION cle. Put an automatic transaxle, Twin
difficult to use.
 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or Clutch SST or CVT in “P” (PARK) or a
towing. Vehicles with Twin Clutch SST can- manual transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Turn
 The brake booster will not work, so the
not be started this way. Pushing or towing a the ignition switch to the “LOCK” posi-
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal
vehicle that has a manual transaxle may tion.
will be harder to press than usual. overheat and damage the catalytic converter.
 Since there is no power steering assist, the Also, there is more risk of an accident when
steering wheel will be hard to turn. a vehicle is being pushed or towed.
WARNING
 Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position on both vehicles. Make sure that
When the engine fails at the the cables or your clothes cannot be
NOTE
intersection  Although the battery in your vehicle is
caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
injury could result.
located in the trunk (refer to page 9-11), use
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, the joint terminal in the engine compartment
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe to jump start the engine.
NOTE
zone.
 Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine

4. Remove the joint terminal cover (A). 7. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
NOTE the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
size.
with the low battery.
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could
result. 8. After the engine is started, disconnect the
 Check the jumper cables for damage and cor- cables in the reverse order from the way
rosion before use. you connected them.
6. Connect one end of the other jumper cable WARNING

to the negative (-) terminal of the booster  Be sure to have an authorized Mitsubishi
battery, and the other end to the engine Motors dealer charge the battery. Do not
block of the vehicle with the low battery. charge the battery yourself.
Flammable gases may leak from the bat-
5. Connect one end of one jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the joint termi- WARNING tery and explode. 8
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive
nal, and the other end to the positive (+)  Be sure to follow the proper order when
diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte comes
terminal of the booster battery. connecting the batteries, of:
in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes,
   . or the painted surface of your vehicle,
 Make sure that the connection is made thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte
to the engine properly. If the connection is gets in your eyes, flush them immediately
directly made to the negative side of the and thoroughly with water, and get
battery, the flammable gases from inside prompt medical attention.
the battery might catch fire and explode,  Always wear protective clothing and gog-
causing personal injury. gles when working near the battery.
 When connecting the jumper cable, do not  Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
Booster connect the positive (+) cable to the nega- dren.
battery Joint terminal tive (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can  Never remove the battery label, upper
make the battery explode. cover, exhaust tube, or pipe. Flammable
gases may leak and explode.
NOTE
 Open the joint terminal cover before con-
CAUTION
necting the jumper cable to the positive ter-  Make sure that the jumper cable will not be
minal of the joint terminal. caught in the cooling fans or other moving
parts in the engine compartment.
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on
WARNING the hazard warning flashers.
WARNING
 This vehicle is equipped with a mainte-  Before raising the engine hood, check to
2. With the engine still running, carefully
nance-free battery located in the trunk. see if there is steam or spray coming from
raise the engine hood to vent the engine
To assure proper battery installation and under the hood. Steam or spray coming
venting of flammable gases, the battery compartment. from an overheated engine could seriously
must be serviced and/or replaced by an 3. Check that the cooling fans is running. If scald you.
authorized Mitsubishi dealer only. the fan is not turning, stop the engine Do not open the hood until there is no
immediately and contact an authorized steam or spray.
As your vehicle has anti-lock ity of your choice for assistance. 6. When you do not see any more steam or
brakes spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
WARNING leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
8 charge, after the engine has been started by jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
careful as components will be hot. Any
leak source must be repaired.
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. fans. The cooling fans can start at any
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check
This can cause the anti-lock braking system time.
the coolant level in the reserve tank. If
warning light to blink on and off. This is only there is none, or if it is too low, slowly add
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a 4. If you see steam or spray coming from coolant.
problem with the brake system. If this hap- under the hood, turn off the engine. 8. If the reserve tank needs coolant, you will
pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming probably also need to add coolant to the
charging system is operating properly. from under the hood, leave the engine on radiator. Do not loosen or remove the
until the bar graph for the engine coolant radiator cap until the engine has cooled
temperature warning display on the multi- down.
Engine overheating information display goes down. When it
N00836500033
is in the middle of the normal zone, you
When the engine is overheating, the informa- can start driving again. If the bar graph
tion screen in the multi-information display stays in the red zone, turn off the engine.
will be interrupted and the engine coolant
temperature warning display will appear.
Also “ ” will blink. If this happens:
8-4 For emergencies

Tools and jack
WARNING Tools and jack Tools

 Removing the radiator cap could scald N00836600311 N00832600140
you with escaping hot water or steam.

When checking the radiator level, cover
the cap with a cloth before trying to
Storage
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
wise, without pressing down, to the first The tools and jack are stowed in the trunk.
notch. The pressure in the system will then
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
keep turning the cap counterclockwise
until it will come off.
9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, 1- Bar 8

up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use 2- Wheel nut wrench
plain water if you have to (and replace it
with the right coolant as soon as possible).
10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it Jack
fully. Check the engine coolant tempera- N00832700239
ture display on the multi-information dis- 1- Tools
2- Jack Before removing the jack, lift up the luggage
play. You can start driving again when the
floor board.
bar graph for the engine coolant tempera-
ture display returns to the normal zone.
11. Have your vehicle checked by your autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when 6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench
How to change a tire it is raised on the jack, place chocks or ready.
N00836900763
blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally Refer to “Tools and jack” on page 8-5.
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
WARNING ing.
 The jack should not be used for any pur- Spare tire information
pose other than to change a tire. N00849600328
 Never get under the vehicle or put any

portion of your body under the vehicle Compact spare tire
while it is supported by the jack.
The compact spare tire is designed to save

Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle space in the trunk. Its lighter weight makes it
in a safe, flat location. easier to use if a flat tire occurs.
8 1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
ground. WARNING
2. Set the parking brake firmly.  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
3. On vehicles with manual transaxle, turn time with age even when they are not
WARNING being used. It is recommended that tires
 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the over 6 years generally be replaced even if
tion, and move the gearshift lever to the
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If damage is not obvious.
“R” (Reverse) position. the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
On vehicles with Twin Clutch SST, move jack could slip out of position, leading to
the gearshift lever to the “P” (PARK) an accident.
position, and turn the ignition switch to
CAUTION
 While the compact spare tire is stowed, the
the “LOCK” position.
inflation pressure should be checked at least
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a NOTE once a month to assure that it remains at the
warning triangle, flashing signal light,  The chocks shown in the illustration do not recommended inflation pressure. See the tire
etc., at an adequate distance from the come with your vehicle. It is recommended and loading information placard attached to
vehicle, and have all your passengers that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep the driver’s door sill.
leave the vehicle. them in the vehicle for use if needed. Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use ard” on page 11-3.
stones or any other objects that are large
enough to hold the wheel in position.
8-6 For emergencies

CAUTION CAUTION
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can  Do not use snow chains with your compact
cause an accident. If you have no choice but spare tire. Using chains could cause damage
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to To remove the compact spare
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-16. tire
 The compact spare tire should be used only N00849701326
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is 1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- 2. To remove the spare tire, remove the
tem will not function properly. Have the tire installation clamp (A) by turning it coun-
replaced or repaired at an authorized Mit-
terclockwise.
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of To change a tire 8
your choice as soon as possible. N00849800405
 You can use the same wheel nuts on the com- 1. Loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
pact spare tire wheel. wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv- yet.
ing with the compact spare tire.
 Avoid fast starting and braking when driving
with the compact spare tire.
 The diameter of the compact spare tire is dif-
ferent from that of a standard tire.
 Because the compact spare tire is designed
only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
other vehicle.
 Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
NOTE
 The clamp cannot be used for a normal size
snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
tire. Store a normal size tire in the trunk.
compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
damage these parts or other parts on your  Put the spare tire under the vehicle body near
the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
vehicle. points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
out of position.
the jacking point closest to the tire you
wish to change.
For emergencies 8-7
WARNING
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut with your vehicle.
WARNING wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar  The jack should not be used for any pur-
8  Set the jack only at the positions shown
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the pose other than to change a tire.
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,  No one should be in your vehicle when
illustration.
it could dent your vehicle or the jack using the jack.
might fall over and cause personal injury. Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
 Do not start or run the engine while your
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur- the tire is raised slightly off the ground
vehicle is on the jack.
face. surface.
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause that are still on the ground could turn and
personal injury. Always use the jack on a make your vehicle fall off the jack.
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base. 5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
wrench, then take the wheel off.
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
of the jack.
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
8-8 For emergencies


6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
mount the spare tire.
7. Temporarily tighten the wheel nut.

• Normal wheels
CAUTION
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts  Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or 8
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
(flange nuts) until their flange section
comes in contact with the wheel and it is
WARNING no longer loose.
 Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem NOTE
(I) facing outboard. If you cannot see the  Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
valve stem (I), you have installed the compact spare or steel wheel, but return
wheel backwards. them to the original wheel and tire as soon as
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel possible.
installed backwards can cause vehicle  If all four wheels are changed to steel
damage and result in an accident. wheels, use tapered nuts.
8. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the

wheel nut wrench counterclockwise until
the tire touches the ground.
• Compact spare wheel

Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
For emergencies 8-9

Towing
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
CAUTION
 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
after changing the tire, have the tire checked
is listed on the tire and loading informa-
for balance at your nearest authorized Mit-
tion placard attached to the driver’s door subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of
sill as shown in the illustration. your choice.
Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page  Do not mix one type of tire with another or
9-16. use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.
To store the flat tire or spare

9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the
illustration until each nut has been tight-
tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
8 ened to the torque listed here. wrench
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m) N00850000117
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and
wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “To remove the compact spare tire”
on page 8-7 and “Tools and jack” on page
CAUTION
8-5.
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
cause an accident. If you have no choice but
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep Towing
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
N00837000716
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-16. If your vehicle needs to be
CAUTION  After changing the tire and driving the vehi- towed
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, come loose. If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. vice.
8-10 For emergencies
Operation under adverse driving conditions

When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck.
CAUTION
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
Incorrect towing equipment could damage
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or
your vehicle.
Type C) as illustrated. This could result in
the driving system damage or vehicle may
CAUTION Towing with front wheels jump at the carriage.
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi- off the ground. If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
cle with a rope. D or Type E equipment.
Operation under adverse

NOTE Towing with rear wheels off
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
the ground. driving conditions
8
N00837200691
There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area. Obey the regulations of If your vehicle becomes stuck in
the area where you are driving your vehicle. sand, mud or snow
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,

or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
free it.
Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
Towing the vehicle by a tow cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let
truck the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the
transaxle before trying again.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
CAUTION ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow service.
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.
For emergencies 8-11

Operation under adverse driving conditions
WARNING On snowy or icy roads CAUTION

 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
stuck position, make sure that there are no  When driving on a road covered with The vehicle could start moving when it
people nearby. The rocking motion can snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward cannot be used on your vehicle. There an accident.
or backward, and injure any bystanders. may be state or local regulations about
using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using On a bumpy or rutted road
On wet roads them. Refer to the section entitled “Snow
tires” on page 9-19 and “Tire chains” on
Drive as slow as possible when driving on
page 9-19.
bumpy or rutted roads or over potholes etc.
CAUTION  Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts
8  Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
brakes. CAUTION
by driving into flood water.  Allow extra distance between your vehi-  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
 When driving in rain, on water-covered cle and the vehicle in front of you, and holes can damage the tires and wheels.
roads, or through a car wash, water could get avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
into the brake discs and make them fail tem- inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
 If a skid occurs when the accelerator
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the age.
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-  The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
several times while driving to dry the brake skid. • driven over a step (for example, at the
pads or linings, then check them again.  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock entrance or exit of a parking lot);
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may braking system (ABS). Hold the brake • parked too closely against a curb or parking
form between the tires and the road surface pedal down firmly and keep it depressed. block, or by the side of a road with curb-
(aquaplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip Do not pump the brake pedal which will stones;
on the road, making it difficult to steer or result in reduced braking performance. • driven on a steep slope;
brake properly. When driving on a wet road:  After parking on snowy or icy road, it
• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. may be difficult to move your vehicle due
• Do not drive on worn tires. to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- accelerator pedal little by little to move
tion pressures. the vehicle after confirming safety of the
vehicle.
8-12 For emergencies

Fuel Pump Shut-off System
Fuel Pump Shut-off System

N00860600044
WARNING
 Before attempting to restart the engine
after a collision, always inspect the ground
under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
not restart the engine.
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer after any colli-
sion.
8
In the event of a collision causing frontal air-
bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
engine.
For emergencies 8-13

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2 Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-28

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2 Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-40
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3 Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-40
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5 Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-41
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9
Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmission
(Twin Clutch SST) fluid (if so equipped) ....................................9-9 9
Transfer oil .......................................................................................9-9
Rear axle oil .....................................................................................9-9
AWC control fluid ...........................................................................9-9
Washer fluid ...................................................................................9-10
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so equipped)........................................9-10
Power steering fluid .......................................................................9-11
Battery ............................................................................................9-11
Tires ...............................................................................................9-12
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-19
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-19
Parking brake lever stroke .............................................................9-19
Parking brake break-in ...................................................................9-20
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-20
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-20
General maintenance .....................................................................9-21
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-23
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-23
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-23
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

N00937301397  The fan can turn on automatically even if
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
tion switch to the “LOCK” position to be
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- safe while you work in the engine com-
sible. partment.
 Do not smoke or allow open flames around
You can do some of the maintenance work
fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- ble.
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Be extremely careful when working
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. around the battery. It contains poisonous
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- and corrosive sulfuric acid.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized Mit-  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of a jack. Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
your choice. Always use properly rated automotive supplements your new vehicle warranties.
9 This section describes the maintenance jack stands.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
for details.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau- als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
tions for each procedure. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice if you Catalytic converter
have questions.
WARNING N00937400418
 When checking or servicing the inside of The catalytic converter requires you to use
the engine compartment, be sure the unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
engine is stopped and has had a chance to destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
cool down. the converter.
 If you need to work in the engine compart-
ment with the engine running, be espe- Normally, the catalytic converter does not
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. require maintenance. However, it is important
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
or other moving parts. verter to continue to work properly.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Engine hood
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as Engine hood
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
when performing diagnostic tests. N00937500510
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
CAUTION
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,  To avoid the risk of being burned, do not
have it serviced promptly. Running your malfunctioning.
touch the air outlets (A) and air scoop (B) on
vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from the engine hood when the engine compart-
damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not ment is hot (when the engine is running or
race the engine when turning off the igni- immediately after the vehicle has been
tion switch. driven).
WARNING  Stop driving the vehicle if you think the
 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas performance is noticeably low, or the
where combustible materials such as dry engine has a malfunction. If you are not
grass or leaves can come in contact with a able to stop driving immediately, slow
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. down and drive for only a short time.
 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- Have an inspection made by an authorized
9
lytic converter. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice as soon as possible.
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-  In unusual situations involving major
verter damage: engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
the type of recommended in “Fuel selec- in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
tion”. the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel immediately take your vehicle to an To open
level. Running out of gas could damage authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
the catalytic converter. repair facility of your choice for service. Use the engine hood release lever (located
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing
under the instrument panel near the driver’s
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is
door) to unlock the engine hood.
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
Pull the lever toward you to release the Release the safety lever and lift the engine Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
engine hood latch. hood. Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
9 WARNING NOTE
 Never use the release lever to unlatch the  To prevent damage to the engine hood and CAUTION
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion. wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting  Always insert the support prop into the hole
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the position when you open the engine hood. specially made for it. Propping the engine
engine hood is locked. hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident.
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is
lifted by a strong wind.

View of the engine compartment

4- Engine coolant reservoir
To close NOTE 5- Engine oil level dipstick
 Do not push down strongly on the engine
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and 6- Radiator cap
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
put it back in its retainer. you push down, you could create a dent in 7- Engine oil filler cap
the vehicle body.
 If you drive with the engine hood left open, Engine oil and oil filter
warning display is displayed on the informa- N00937702037
tion screen in the multi-information display.
To check and refill engine oil
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may

need to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine,
View of the engine compart- check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary. 9
Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches ment To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight. N00937600641 wipe it off, and gently insert it all the way
into the crankcase. Slowly remove it again.
CAUTION The oil level must not go above the line on
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
the dipstick.
when closing the engine hood.
If the level does not reach the line, which
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
shows the smallest amount of oil required,
before driving.
If you drive without the engine hood com- remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
pletely closed, it could open up while driv- cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.
ing.
NOTE 1- Power steering fluid reservoir

 If this does not close the engine hood prop-
2- Air cleaner filter
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher 3- Brake fluid/Clutch fluid reservoir (if so
position. equipped)

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
Good  The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark

CAUTION
 Overfilling the crankcase will cause oil aera- Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only
tion and loss of oil pressure, which could 1- The top portion shows the quality of
engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-
9 damage the engine. bol on the front of the container.
the oil.
2- The center portion shows the SAE
grade of the oil viscosity.
WARNING ILSAC certification symbol
 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders,
including dermatitis and cancer. Don’t let
used oil touch your skin. Wash thoroughly
after working with it.
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
NOTE If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-

 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced fication symbol, use an API classification SN
by payload, engine speed, etc. or higher oil with the following label.

Engine coolant
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based
Required engine oil viscosity Engine coolant non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and
N00955001123 N00937800568
non-borate coolant with long life hybrid
Always use SAE 5W-30 engine oil.
organic acid technology
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 5W-30 Engine
To check the coolant level
Oil is the recommended oil for optimum Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
engine performance and protection. The coolant reserve tank (A) lets you quickly excellent protection against corrosion and
see when you need to add coolant. When the rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
engine is cold, the level in the reserve tank num, and prevents blockages in some parts of
should be between the “FULL” and “LOW” engine.
marks. The radiator usually stays full so there If you need to add coolant often, or if the
is no reason to remove the radiator cap (B) level in the reserve tank does not drop when
except when you check the coolant freeze the engine cools, the cooling system should
point or replace the antifreeze coolant. be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice for testing. 9
FULL
CAUTION
 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
To replace the oil filter LOW
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
N00955100042
parts.
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or  The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND fers depending on the expected ambient tem-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. perature.
Only use high quality replacement filters on Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 %concentration
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica- of anti-freeze
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters To add coolant Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 %concentration
of anti-freeze
require that the filter can withstand a pressure
You can check the concentration level with a
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long gauge from an automotive supply store, or
oil filter is the best replacement filter. Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
Follow the installation instructions printed on service station can check it for you.
the filter.
Air cleaner filter

 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
CAUTION that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration
from the reserve tank back to the radiator
of coolant.
when the engine cools down. If you need
 Do not top off the tank with plain water only.
to change the cap, use the exact same
Water by itself boils at a lower temperature
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the kind.
water freezes, it will damage your cooling  Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause ator with the proper gauge, and only when
corrosion and rust. it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
against freezing.
Radiator cap  Keep the front of the radiator and con- 2. Install the air cleaner filter and put the
denser clean. cover back on in its original position.
The radiator cap must be tight sealed to pre-  If the temperature of the engine coolant
vent losing coolant which may result in
9 does not rise after the engine is warmed- NOTE
engine damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubi- up, take your vehicle to an authorized  Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-
shi Parts radiator cap, or an approved equiva- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
lent. ity of your choice to have the thermostat  After replacing the air cleaner filter, make
checked, and replaced if necessary. sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover
WARNING are firmly set.
 Wait for the engine to cool down before
opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
Air cleaner filter
N00937901449
steam or boiling coolant could spray up
from the radiator and scald you. The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
Points to remember “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
 Do not overfill the reserve tank.
1. Unclamp and take out the air cleaner fil-
ter.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)
Manual transaxle oil (if so Fluid type Rear axle oil

equipped) N00915200243
N00938200165
Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine SSTF-I Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as
to ensure optimum transmission performance. necessary to maintain the proper level.
Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is Fill or change oil according to the table.
checked, add oil to maintain the proper level, CAUTION
if necessary.
Refill or change the oil according to the table.
 Using the improper transmission fluid may Oil type
damage the transaxle.
Oil type For differen- Mitsubishi Motors

Special additives tial mecha- Genuine LSD gear
Lubri- nism oil
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine cant
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not rec- For torque MITSUBISHI
Lubricant NEW MULTI GEAR OIL API
Classification GL-3 ommend the addition of any fluid additives to transfer MOTORS Genu- 9
the transmission. mechanism ine ATF SP III
Viscosity
SAE 75W-80
range
Transfer oil AWC control fluid
N00938400255 N00915300013
Twin Clutch Sportronic shift Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,
transmission (Twin Clutch add oil as necessary to maintain the proper To check the fluid level
SST) fluid (if so equipped) level. Fill or change the oil according to the
table. Remove the lid on the trunk room right side
N00938300049
trim.
The Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmis- Oil type Check the fluid level in the reservoir 90 min-
sion (Twin Clutch SST) should be maintained utes or more after turning the ignition switch
and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi to the “LOCK” position.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your Lubri- Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD Check to make certain that the AWC control
choice to obtain the best performance and cant gear oil or equivalent fluid level is always between the “MAX” and
longest life. It is important that the transmis- “MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir
sion fluid is kept at the correct level. and refill the fluid, if necessary.
Washer fluid
To check the fluid level
The fluid level must be between the “MAX”

and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
MAX
MIN
NOTE
Fluid type  Do not spill the fluid onto the trunk. If the
fluid spilled, wipe it up immediately.
9
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genu-
Lubricant
ine ATF SP III
During cold weather The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
brake pads, but this does not indicate any
Washer fluid When freezing weather is anticipated, flush abnormality.
N00938600257 out the water in the reservoir by operating the The fluid in the master cylinder should be
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti- checked when doing other work under the
the trunk. freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate engine hood. The brake system should also be
Check the washer fluid level at regular inter- the system for a few seconds to flush out the checked for leaks at the same time.
vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec- residual water. If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
essary. length of time, it indicates leaks from the
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid (if so brake system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
equipped)
N00938700232
The brake fluid and the clutch fluid share the
reservoir tank.
Power steering fluid
Fluid type
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or

DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly
sealed to keep dirt and water out.
CAUTION
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
will damage the seals.
 Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
damage painted surfaces. WARNING
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different Fluid type  Be sure to have an authorized Mitsubishi
brands of brake fluid have different addi- Motors dealer charge the battery. Do not
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac- charge the battery yourself, as it should 9
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine only be charged after first being removed
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid. Lubricant
Power Steering Fluid from the vehicle.
 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
the brake fluid from evaporating. In addition, never remove the battery
label, upper cover, exhaust tube, or pipe.
Battery Flammable gases may leak and explode.
N00939100725
Power steering fluid The vehicle battery is installed in the trunk
N00939000391
behind a panel. During cold weather
The condition of the battery is very important
To check the fluid level for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
electrical system working properly. This has to do with its chemical and physical
Check the fluid level in the reservoir while Be sure to have an authorized Mitsubishi properties and is why a very cold battery,
the engine is idling. Motors dealer check the battery. especially one with a low charge, will have a
Check to make certain that the power steering hard time starting your vehicle.
fluid level is always between the “MAX” and It is recommended that you have your battery
“MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir and charging system checked by an autho-
and refill the fluid, if necessary. rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer before the

Tires
start of cold weather. If necessary, have it
replaced.
WARNING Tires
• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or N00939201576
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft
Disconnection and connection cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of WARNING
water and neutral detergent then imme-  Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
diately rinse the affected parts with or improperly inflated is dangerous.
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
plenty of water. These type tire conditions will adversely
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or affect vehicle performance.
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon- clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If These type tire conditions can also cause a
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+) electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them tread separation or blowout which may
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, with water immediately and get immedi- result in an accident causing serious
before starting the vehicle. ate medical attention. injury or death.
 Always wear protective clothing and gog-  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
WARNING gles when working with the battery, or time with age even when they are not
have a skilled automobile technician do it. being used. It is recommended that tires
9  Never disconnect the battery while the
engine is running, or you could damage
 This vehicle is equipped with a mainte- over 6 years generally be replaced even if
nance-free battery located in the trunk. To damage is not obvious.
the vehicle’s electrical parts.
assure proper battery installation and
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could
venting of flammable gases, the battery
cause it to overheat and be damaged. It is important to familiarize yourself with the
must be serviced and/or replaced by an
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer only. following terms:
from the battery because the battery could
 In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure
explode.  Cold tire pressure:
to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro- first, and reconnect it last.
• The measured pressure after the vehicle
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on
 Battery terminals and related accessories
has been parked for at least three hours,
nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- or
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
color them. And if gets on your skin or in • The measured pressure when the vehicle
hands after handling.
your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness. is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
Please observe the following handling
having been parked for three hours.
instructions:
 Maximum inflation pressure: the maxi-
mum permissible cold tire inflation pres-
sure for this tire.

Tires
 Recommended inflation pressure: the  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- tread and bead.
Tire Markings
mance.  Section width: the linear distance between
 Intended outboard sidewall: the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
• The sidewall that contains a whitewall, inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
bears white lettering or bears manufac- labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
turer, brand, and/or model name molding  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
that is higher or deeper than the same steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
or  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
• The outward facing sidewall of an asym- cords.
metrical tire that has a particular side  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
that must always face outward when tire.
mounted on a vehicle.  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
 Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use and tube assembly upon which the tire
on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- beads are seated. Size Designation 9
ger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross  Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 bead seat. EXAMPLE: P215/65R15
pounds or less.  Groove: the space between two adjacent
 Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by tread ribs. Passenger car tire size based
P
its manufacturer as primarily intended for on U.S.A. design standards
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose Section width in millimeters
passenger vehicles. 215
 Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
(mm.)
contact with the road. Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Tread rib: a tread section running circum- 65 Ratio of section height to
ferentially around a tire. section width of tire.
 Tread separation: pulling away of the
tread from the tire carcass.
 Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
bears the load.

Tires
Construction code NOTE Speed symbol

•“R” means radial construc-  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire A symbol indicating the
R tion. sizing is based on U.S.A. design range of speeds at which a
•“D” means diagonal or bias standards. The size designation tire can carry a load corre-
construction. for LT-metric tires is the same as sponding to its load index
15 Rim diameter in inches (in) for P-metric tires except for the under certain operating con-
letters “LT” that are molded into ditions.
the sidewall preceding the size H The maximum speed corre-
NOTE
designation. Example: sponding to the speed sym-
 European/Japanese metric tire
LT235/85R16. bol should only be achieved
sizing is based on European/Jap-
 Temporary spare tires are high under specified operating
anese design standards. Tires
pressure compact spares conditions. (i.e. tire pressure,
designed to these standards have
9 designed for temporary emer- vehicle loading, road condi-
the tire size molded into the
gency use only. Tires designed tions and posted speed lim-
sidewall beginning with the sec-
to this standard have the letter its)
tion width. The letter “P” is
absent from this tire size desig- “T” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Maximum Load
nation. Example: 215/65R15
96H. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Maximum load indicates the maxi-
Service Description mum load this tire is designed to
carry.
EXAMPLE: 95H
Load index
A numerical code associ-
95
ated with the maximum load
a tire can carry.

Tires
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD Treadwear, Traction and Temper-
WARNING 1504
 Overloading of your tire is ature Grades
Department of Transporta-
dangerous. Overloading can
tion
cause tire failure, affect vehi- Treadwear
This symbol certifies that
cle handling, and increase
the tire is in compliance The treadwear grade is a comparative
your stopping distance. Use DOT
with the U.S. Department rating based on the wear rate of the
tires of the recommended load
of Transportation tire safety tire when tested under controlled
capacity for your vehicle.
standards, and is approved conditions on a specified government
Never overload them.
for highway use. test course. For example, a tire
Code representing the tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
Maximum Pressure MA manufacturing location. (2 half (11/2) times as well on the gov-
digits) ernment course as a tire graded 100. 9
Maximum Pressure indicates the Code representing the tire The relative performance of tires
maximum permissible cold tire infla- L9 size. (2 digits) depends upon the actual conditions
tion pressure for this tire. ABCD Code used by tire manufac- of their use, however, and may depart
turer. (1 to 4 digits) significantly from the norm due to
Tire Identification Number (TIN) variations in driving habits, service
Number representing the
15 week in which the tire was practices and differences in road
The TIN may be found on both sides characteristics and climate.
of the tire but the date code and manufactured. (2 digits)
optional code may only be on one Number representing the
Traction
side. Look for the TIN on the out- 04 year in which the tire was
board side of tires as mounted on the manufactured. (2 digits) The traction grades, from highest to
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
the outboard side then you will find it grades represent the tire’s ability to
on the inboard side of the tire. stop on wet pavement as measured

Tires
under controlled conditions on speci- Tire inflation pressures
The correct tire pressure for your vehicle is
fied government test surfaces of listed on the placard attached to the driver’s
N00939300802
door sill.
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-
C may have poor traction perfor- the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard” on page 11-3.)
mance. vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause The recommended inflation pressures should
problems in three major areas: be used for the tires listed below.
Temperature  Safety
Item Tire size Front Rear
Too little pressure increases flexing in the
The temperature grades are A (the tire and can cause tire failure. Too much 220 220
highest), B and C, representing the pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability Normal tire 245/40R18 KPA, KPA,
tire’s resistance to the generation of to cushion shock. Objects on the road and 32 PSI 32 PSI
heat and its ability to dissipate heat potholes could then cause tire damage that Compact T145/70R1 420 KPA, 60
when tested under controlled condi- may result in tire failure. spare tire 8 PSI
9 tions on a specified indoor laboratory  Economy
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven Tire pressures should be checked, and
test wheel. Sustained high tempera- wear patterns in the tire tread. These adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
ture can cause the material of the tire abnormal wear patterns will reduce the Pressures should be checked more often
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and tread life, and the tire will have to be whenever weather temperatures change
excessive temperature can lead to replaced sooner. severely, because tire pressures change with
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- Too little pressure also makes it harder for outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed on
the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel. the placard are always “cold inflation pres-
responds to a level of performance  Ride comfort and vehicle stability
which all passenger car tires must sure”.
The superior riding experience built into Cold inflation pressure is measured after the
meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- your vehicle partly depends on the correct vehicle has been parked for at least three
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
B and A represent higher levels of uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little after having been parked for three hours.
pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
performance on the laboratory test Cold inflation pressure must not go above the
respond. maximum values molded into the tire side-
wheel than the minimum required by Unequal tire pressures can make steering wall. After driving several miles, your tire
law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. inflation pressure may increase 14 to 41 KPA,

Tires
2 to 6 PSI from the cold inflation pressure.  Have regular maintenance done on the
Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
CAUTION wheel balance and front and rear suspen-
 Always use tires of the same size, same type,
specified cold pressure, or your tire pressure sion alignment.
and same brand, and which have no wear dif-
will be too low.  Rotate your tires regularly as described in
ferences. Using tires that differ in size, type,
Check your tires each time you refuel. If one brand or the degree of wear, will increase the the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-18.
tire looks lower than the others, check the differential oil temperature, resulting in pos-
pressure for all of them.
You should also take the following safety pre-
sible damage to the driving system. Further, Tread wear indicators
the drive train will be subjected to excessive
N00939800201
cautions: loading, possibly leading to oil leakage,
component seizure, or other serious prob- The standard-equipment tires use a high-grip
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- lems. compound that gives superior grip.
mended pressures. (See the tire and load-  Even if a wheel has the same rim size and However, they wear more quickly than typi-
ing information placard attached to the offset as the specified type of wheel, its cal passenger-car tires.
driver’s door sill.) shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
 Stay within the recommended load limits. rectly. Consult an authorized Mitsubishi
 Make sure that the weight of any load in Motors dealer or a repair facility of your 9
choice before using wheels that you have.
your vehicle is evenly distributed.
 As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
 Drive at safe speeds.
sure monitoring system, use only Mitsubishi
 After filling your tires to the correct pres- genuine wheels.
sure, check them for damage and air Other wheels do not permit correct installa-
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the tion of tire inflation pressure sensors and can
valve stems. cause air leakage and sensor failure, which
would not be covered by your vehicle’s war-
ranty.
Replacing tires and wheels
N00939600397 1- Location of the tread wear indicator
Tire maintenance 2- Tread wear indicator
CAUTION N00939700037
 Avoid using different size tires and wheels The following maintenance steps are recom- Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-
from the ones listed, and avoid the com-
mended: nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help
bined use of different types of tires and
wheels. Using different size or type tires and
you know when your tires should be replaced.
 Check tire pressures regularly. Many states have laws requiring that you
wheels may affect driving safety.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5. replace your tires at this point.

Tires
These indicators are molded into the bottom wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe
of the tread grooves and will appear when the braking.
CAUTION
 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
correct direction of rotation, swap the front
mm). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
When the bands appear next to one another in find out the reason for uneven tread wear. vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
two or more places, replace your tires. right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
The first tire rotation is the most important Keep each tire on its original side of the
one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.
NOTE vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure
the arrows point in the direction in which the
 Tire wear indicators can have different marks
Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
direction ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the
turer.
wrong direction will not perform to its full
Front potential.
Tire rotation
9 N00939900390
Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction
To even out the wear on your tires and make Front
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND Front
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
However, the timing for tire rotation may
vary according to your vehicle condition,
road surface conditions, and your own per-
sonal driving habits. Any time you notice CAUTION
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-  A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
sible. rarily in place of a tire that has been removed CAUTION
during the tire rotation. However, it must not  Avoid the combined use of different types of
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, be included in the regular tire rotation tires. Using different types of tires can affect
damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal sequence. vehicle performance and safety.
wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-
sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)
Snow tires Tire chains Brake pedal free play

N00940000359 N00940100015 N00940301333
In some areas of the country, snow tires are To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
CAUTION off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
 Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. eral times with your foot. Then press the
required in your area, you must choose snow
The clearance between the chains and the pedal down with your fingers until you first
tires of the same size and type as the original
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires feel resistance.
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
should also be installed on all four wheels. aged.
Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling Brake pedal free play:
can be reduced. .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
should not be operated at sustained speeds
Clutch pedal free play (if so
over 75 mph (120 km/h). equipped)
9
N00940201097
CAUTION To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn

 If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, off the engine and press the pedal until you
change to tapered nuts when using snow tires feel resistance.
with steel wheels.
 Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels Clutch pedal free play:
should be used, because your vehicle is .2 to .4 inch (4 to 9 mm)
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem. If the free play is not within these limits, take
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
choice for adjustment.
Parking brake lever stroke

N00940400207
Check the parking brake lever travel occa-

sionally. To check this, pull the lever up

Parking brake break-in

slowly and count the number of clicks of the and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
ratchet. Wiper blades trol system is made of:
N00940700167
Parking brake lever stroke: Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean  a positive crankcase ventilation system
3 to 5 notches them regularly to remove deposits of salt and  an evaporative emission-control system
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild  an exhaust emission-control system
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
the ratchet after pulling. blades and glass areas. The maintenance services listed in the
Replace the blades if they continue to streak “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
or smear. MANUAL” must be performed at the times
or mileages listed to keep the emission-con-
trol system working properly. These, and all
NOTE the other “general” maintenance services
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long listed in this manual, need to be performed to
time. This wears out the rubber and can
keep your vehicle running properly and reli-
9 scratch the glass.
ably.
You may need more frequent maintenance if

During cold weather you drive your vehicle in harsh conditions
such as dusty areas or do a lot of start-and-
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do stop driving.
Parking brake break-in not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper To be sure the emission-control system works
N00936200044
motor may be damaged. properly, have your vehicle inspected and

Break-in the parking brake linings whenever maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
the brake performance of the parking brake is Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
insufficient or whenever the parking brake Emission-control system choice following the schedule in the “WAR-
linings and/or discs are replaced, in order to
assure the best brake performance. maintenance RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN-
N00940800201
UAL”.
This procedure is described in the vehicle ser- You should also have an inspection and ser-
vice manual and can be carried out by an Your vehicle is equipped with an emission- vice any time you suspect a malfunction.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. control system that meets all the requirements
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-
NOTE Fuel hoses fold.
 To meet government regulations and pro- N00941000053
mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
The engine electronic control module that  If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
controls OBD functions stores various data do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
(especially about the exhaust emissions). cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
This data will be erased if the battery cable is sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire.
disconnected, which could make a rapid all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
battery cable when the engine malfunction that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or damage, replace the hoses immediately.
“Check engine light”) is on.
Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control

Spark plugs N00950100050 system (except evaporative 9
N00940900244
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400116
Spark plugs must fire properly for good
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-
engine performance and emission-control.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-
Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
Change them at the mileage listed in the
adjustments made by an authorized Have the system checked at an authorized
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
MANUAL”.
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
NOTE Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”.
 Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine connection, and fuel tank filler
specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are cap) General maintenance
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause N00941300085 N00941500159
engine damage, performance problems or
radio noise. Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
General maintenance
there are other parts which do not usually  The underside or rear of the vehicle is
need regular maintenance.
Ball joint, steering linkage seals damaged
But, if any of these parts stops working prop- and drive shaft boots
erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. N00941800077 Also check the exhaust system each time the
Have these items checked if you notice a Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
problem with them. grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer  Ball joint boots of the front suspension fumes seep into the luggage compartment and
for assistance, if you have any questions. and steering linkage passenger compartments.
 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
Disc brake pads Check for any of the following
N00941600062 Exhaust system conditions:
Good brakes are essential to safe driving. N00942200108
Check the brake pads for wear. For good  Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
9 braking performance, replace the brake pads WARNING caused by corrosion or damage.
with the same type pads as the originals.  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
Brake hoses damage.
N00941700047
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked from entering inside your vehicle is to have
for:
Hood lock release mechanism
the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- and safety catch
 Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn plete exhaust system and nearby body areas N00942500042
spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The hood lock release mechanism and hood
showing through any cracks or worn spots sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
in the rubber hose cover, the hose should ing: oiled when needed for easy movement and to
be replaced. The brakes can fail if the stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease
hose wears through.  A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts
 Improper installation may cause twisting, tem of the hood latch and release lever. Work the
or wheel, tire or chassis interference.  The smell of exhaust fumes inside the grease into the hood lock mechanism until all
vehicle the movable surfaces are covered.

For cold and snowy weather

Also, put a light coat of the same grease on the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch. useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
For cold and snowy weather Fusible links Passenger compartment

N00942600102 N00942700275
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if

Ventilation slots a large current attempts to flow through cer-
tain electrical systems.
The ventilation slots in front of the wind- In case of a melted fusible link, see your
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
snowfall so that the operation of the heating repair facility of your choice for inspection
and ventilation systems will not be impaired. and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
load capacities” on page 9-24.
Weatherstripping 9
A- Main fuse block
WARNING B- Sub fuse block
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping  Fusible links must not be replaced by any
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
be treated with silicone grease. ible link may result in fire in the vehicle, The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
property destruction and serious or fatal ment are located behind the fuse lid on the
injuries at any time. driver’s side as shown.
Additional equipment (For
regions where snow is encoun- 1. Open the fuse lid and pull to remove it.
tered) Fuses
N00942800263
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-

handled spade in the vehicle during the win- Fuse block location
ter so that you can clear away snow if you get N00901000077
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for To prevent damage to the electrical system
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
Fuses
WARNING Engine compartment

 When changing fuses, do not damage the
driver’s knee airbag harness or acciden- In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
tally strike the airbag area with hard located as shown in the illustration.
objects. Improper work methods could
result in an accidental driver’s knee air-
bag deployment or could make the
driver’s knee airbag inoperable. Either of
these situations could result in serious
injury or death.
2. For vehicles with the bottom cover, use

the puller to loosen the 2 clips (A) and NOTE
push down the bottom cover. The puller is  When finished, be sure to return the puller to
the fuse block in the engine compartment.
9 in the fuse block in the engine compart-
ment. Refer to “Fuse replacement” on
page 9-27. 3. To put back the fuse lid, line up the fuse 1. Push the lock lever.
lid hook (B) with the clamp (C) on the 2. Remove the fuse block cover.
instrument panel and push the lid back in.
Fuse load capacities

N00954800156
This fuse list shows the names of the electri-

cal systems and their fuse capacities.
There are spare fuses in the cover of the fuse
block in the engine compartment. Always
replace a blown fuse with one of the same
capacity as the original.

Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse loca- Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
tion table bol ity bol ity
4 Windshield wiper 30 A Power window
20 30 A*
control
Passenger compartment fuse location 5 Optional 10 A
21 Defogger 30 A*
6 Door locks 20 A
Heated outside
7 Radio 15 A 22 7.5 A
Main fuse block Sub fuse block rearview mirrors
8 Control unit relay 7.5 A 23 115V Power outlet 15 A
Interior lights 25 (20)
9 15 A 24 Power seats
(Dome lights) A
Hazard warning 25 Heated seats 30 A
10 15 A
flasher
11 Rear window wiper 15 A *- Fusible link 9
12 Gauges 7.5 A  Some fuses may not be installed on your
Cigarette vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
13 lighter/Accessory 15 A or specifications.
socket  The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse.
14 Ignition switch 10 A
15 Sunroof 20 A
Sym- Capac- Outside rearview

No. Electrical system 16 10 A
bol ity mirrors
1 Heater 30 A* All-wheel
17 10 A
drive system
Stop lights
2 15 A 18 Back-up lights 7.5 A
(Brake lights)
3 Rear fog light 10 A 19 Accessory socket 15 A

Fuses
Engine compartment fuse location Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
table bol ity bol ity
3 Automatic transaxle 20 A Headlight
Engine compartment fuse location (low/high Dis-
4 Horn 10 A 17 20 A
beam) charge
5 Alternator 7.5 A (right)
Headlight
6 Headlight washer 20 A
(low
18 Halogen 10 A
7 Air conditioning 10 A beam)
(left)
8 ETV 15 A
* Headlight
9 Security horn 20 A (low
19 Halogen 10 A
10 Wiper deicer 15 A beam)
9 11 — — —
(right)
Behind the fuse block cover 20 I/C SPRAY 10 A

12 Power gate 30 A
21 Ignition coil 10 A
Daytime running
13 10 A
* lights 22 ENG/POWER 20 A
Headlight 23 Fuel pump 20 A
14 10 A
(high beam) (left)
24 Starter 30 A*
Headlight
15 10 A 25 — — —
*- Front of the vehicle (high beam) (right)
Headlight Anti-lock
26 40 A*
(low/high Dis- braking system
Sym- Capac- 16 20 A
No. Electrical system beam) charge Anti-lock braking
bol ity 27 30 A*
(left) system
1 Front fog lights 15 A
Air conditioning
28 30 A*
2 Engine 7.5 A condenser fan motor

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Identification of fuse
No. Electrical system
bol ity N00901100052
29 Radiator fan motor 40 A* Capacity Color

30 IOD IOD 30 A 7.5 A Brown
31 Audio amplifier 30 A 10 A Red
32 Diesel 30 A 15 A Blue
33 — Spare fuse 10 A 20 A Yellow
34 — Spare fuse 15 A 25 A Natural (White)
35 — Spare fuse 20 A Green (fuse type)/ 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,
30 A
Pink (fusible link type) and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
*- Fusible link 40 A Green block.
 Some fuses may not be installed on your 9

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model Fuse replacement
or specifications. N00954900027
 The table above shows the main equip- 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
ment corresponding to each fuse. the electrical item connected to the fuse
and turn the ignition switch to the
There are no 7.5 A, 25 A or 30 A spare fuses. “LOCK” position.
If a fuse of one of these capacities blows, 2. There is a fuse puller (A) in the engine
replace it temporarily by borrowing one of compartment fuse block.
the fuses indicated below.
7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
25 A: 20 A spare fuse
30 A: 30 A audio amplifier fuse
Replace the borrowed fuse with a fuse that
has the correct capacity as soon as possible.

Replacement of light bulbs

4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
CAUTION NOTE
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
short time, have the electrical system washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
blown, something else must be causing
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
the problem. Contact an authorized Mit- dealer or a repair facility of your choice to phenomenon as when window glass mists up
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility find and correct the cause. on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
of your choice to have the problem tional problem.
checked. When the light is switched on, the heat will
Replacement of light bulbs remove the fog. However, if water gathers
N00942900219 inside the light, please have it checked by an
Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy Bulb capacity
9 the bulb when it gets hot. N00943000099
The bulb should only be replaced with a new

CAUTION bulb with the same rating and type. The type
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.
B- Fuse is OK being turned off.
C- Blown fuse When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
Outside
N00950301945
otherwise be burned.
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
Front
securely into the appropriate slot.
NOTE
CAUTION  If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, it is recommended that
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than
these procedures be carried out by an autho-
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
to heat up and could cause a fire.
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens.


[Except for vehicles with high intensity dis- [For vehicles with high intensity discharge
charge headlights] headlights]
WARNING
 Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
ANSI Wattage ANSI Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Trade No. or Can- Trade No. choice when it is necessary to repair a dis-
Description Wattage Description charge headlight or to replace the bulb.
or Bulb dle or Bulb
type power type The power circuit, bulb and electrodes
generate high voltages that may cause a
1- Front turn 1- Front turn severe electrical shock.
21 W WY21W 21 W WY21W
signal light signal light
2- Headlight, 9005 2- Daytime run- 27 W
60 W 1156 NOTE
high beam HB3 ning light 32 cp
 The side turn signal light uses LEDs rather
3- Headlight, 3- Headlight,
than bulbs. For repair and replacement, con-
low low/high
35 W — tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
beam/Day- 9006 beam (Dis- or a repair facility of your choice.
51 W
time running HB4 charge bulb) 9
light (If so 4- Front fog
equipped) 55 W H11 Rear
light
4- Front fog 5- Front side-
55 W H11
light marker and 5W WY5W
5- Front side- parking light
marker and 5W WY5W 6- Side turn sig-
parking light — —
nal light
6- Side turn sig-
— —
nal light


ANSI Inside
Trade No.
Description Wattage N00950400558
or Bulb
type
7- High-
mounted stop — —
light
8- License plate
5W W5W
light
9- Back-up light 21 W W21W *- Front of the vehicle
10- Tail light 5W W5W
11- Tail and stop 2. When replacing the bulb on the passen-
21/5 W W21/5W
light Description Wattage ger’s side, lift up the coolant reserve tank
9 (B).
12- Rear turn sig- 1- Trunk area light 5W
21 W W21W
nal light 2- Dome light (rear) (if so
8W
13- Rear side- equipped)
5W W5W
marker light 3- Dome light (front)/Reading
8W
light
NOTE
 The high-mounted stop light uses LEDs Headlights (low beam, except
rather than bulbs. For repair and replace-
ment, contact an authorized Mitsubishi for vehicles with high intensity
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your discharge headlights)
choice. N00901800105
*- Front of the vehicle
1. When replacing the bulb on the driver’s
side, remove the bolt (A) holding down
the relay box and move the relay box 3. Turn the bulb (C) counterclockwise, and
toward the rear of the vehicle. then remove the headlight bulb with
holder.

CAUTION
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlights are used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
alcohol and let it dry completely before
*- Front of the vehicle installing the bulb. *- Front of the vehicle
4. While pressing the tab (D), pull out the 2. Turn the bulb (B) counterclockwise to
bulb (E). remove it.
9
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

Headlights (high beam, except *- Front of the vehicle
steps in reverse. for vehicles with high intensity
discharge headlights) 3. While pressing the tab (C), pull out the
bulb (D).
N00901900076
1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.

Adjustment of headlight aim

N00943200121
The alignment of the headlights should be

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Daytime running lights (for

vehicles with high intensity dis-
charge headlights)
N00900300129
steps in reverse. 1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to
Headlights (low/high beam, for remove it.
CAUTION vehicles with high intensity dis-
9
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas charge lights)
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur- N00902000016
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair head-
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
lights, and do not attempt to replace their
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
bulbs.
hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to break the next time the headlights are WARNING
used.  A high voltage is present in the power cir-
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with cuit and in the bulbs and bulb terminals.
alcohol and let it dry completely before To avoid the risk of an electric shock, con- *- Front of the vehicle
installing the bulb. tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice 2. Turn the socket (B) counterclockwise to
whenever repair or replacement is neces- remove it.
sary.

Front side-marker and parking

lights (except for vehicles with
high intensity discharge head-
lights)
N00917300482
1. When replacing the bulb on the driver’s

side, remove the bolt (A) holding down
the relay box and move the relay box
toward the rear of the vehicle.
*- Front of the vehicle *- Front of the vehicle
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise while 3. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to
pressing it and pull it out of the socket. remove it.
9
2. When replacing the bulb on the passen-

ger’s side, lift up the coolant reserve tank
(B). *- Front of the vehicle
steps in reverse.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse. steps in reverse.
9 Front side-marker and parking 3. Turn the socket (E) counterclockwise to Front turn signal lights
lights (for vehicles with high remove it. N00943400338
1. Remove the clips (A) and clips (B), then

intensity discharge headlights) remove the duct (C) and the upper cover
N00917300466
(D).
1. To create enough work space, turn the
steering wheel all the way in the direction
opposite to the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the clips (A), clip (B) and screw
(C) to turn up the cover (D).
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.


2. While pressing the tab (D), pull out the
socket (E).

steps in reverse.
3. Turn the bulb (F) counterclockwise to
2. Remove the entire socket and bulb assem- Front fog lights remove it. 9
bly (E) by turning it counterclockwise. N00943600646
1. Remove the clips (A) and clips (B), then

turn up the cover (C).

*- Front of the vehicle steps in reverse.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

CAUTION Rear combination lights

 Handle halogen light bulbs with care. The N00943700399
gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pres-

surized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching Tail and stop lights, rear turn sig-
a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
 Never hold the halogen lights bulb with a
nal lights and rear side-marker
bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your lights
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the fog lights are used. 1. Remove the screws (A) from the light
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with unit.
alcohol and let it dry completely before
installing the bulb.
3. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies
by turning them counterclockwise.
2. Remove the light unit in the rear direc-

tion.
B- Tail and stop light

C- Rear turn signal light
D- Rear side-marker light


Tail and stop light and Rear side-marker light Tail lights and back-up lights
Rear turn signal light Back-up light Tail light
1. Open the trunk lid.
Remove the clips (A) and remove the
cover (B).

steps in reverse. 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
NOTE 9
 When mounting the light unit, align the pins
(E) on the light unit with the holes in the
License plate light
2. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies N00944000344
body. by turning them counterclockwise. 1. Remove the screws (A) from the license
plate lamp lens (B). Then, remove the lens
and gasket (C), and withdraw the bulb.
C- Tail light
D- Back-up light


2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly 2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out
together by turning it counterclockwise.
Dome light (front)/Reading the bulb.
lights
N00944500264
1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the

light assembly. Gently pry to remove the
lens.

9
NOTE
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.

steps in reverse.


3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out
steps in reverse.
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped)
the bulb.
N00944101342
NOTE 1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the

 Before replacing the bulb, put the dome light light assembly and pry gently to remove
(front)/reading lights switch into the “OFF” the lens.
position.
 When mounting the lens, align the tab (B)
with the hole on the vehicle body.

steps in reverse. 9
NOTE
NOTE  Before replacing the bulb, put the dome light
(rear) switch into the “OFF” position.
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.  When mounting the lens, align the tabs (B)
with the holes on the vehicle body.

Vehicle care precautions
Trunk area light CAUTION CAUTION

N00944800094  Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some  Do not use organic substances (solvents,
1. Pull both clips (A) away from the center are poisonous. Others are highly flammable. benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
as shown and remove the light unit. Then Some are dangerous if you breathe their alkaline or acidic solutions.
remove the bulb by pulling out. fumes in a closed space. When you use any- These chemicals can cause discoloring,
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be staining or cracking of the surface.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following stances mentioned above.
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Carbon Tetrachloride NOTE
• Benzine  Always read the instructions on the cleaner
• Kerosene label.
• Naphtha
9 • Acetone
• Turpentine Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal • Paint Thinner
steps in reverse. • Lacquer Thinner
flocked parts
N00945300184
• Nail Polish Remover
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
Vehicle care precautions soaked in a 3 % solution of gentle soap
N00945100153 These can all be dangerous, and they all can and water.
damage your vehicle. 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,
perform regular maintenance using the proper well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter-
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only Cleaning the inside of your gent thoroughly.
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula-
vehicle
N00945200079
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain After washing the inside of your vehicle with
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help lated area.
in choosing these materials.

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-  If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat  The genuine leather surface may harden and
tectants containing silicones or wax. upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight
Such products, when applied to the instru- over the surface in one direction. for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec- place it in the shade as much as possible.
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.  When the temperature of the vehicle interior
Also, if such products get on the switches of rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
Genuine leather (if so equipped)
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
N00945600259
ure of these accessories. stick to the seat.
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a
soft cloth soaked in a 5 % solution of gen-
Upholstery tle soap and water. Cleaning the outside of your
N00945500131
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, vehicle
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi- wring it out well, and wipe off all the N00945700016
soap.
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
keep the interior clean. 3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often 9
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic face.
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
Foreign material
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be NOTE N00945800017
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
3 % solution of gentle soap in lukewarm with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,
water. may grow. tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum  The genuine leather surface can be damaged foreign matters can damage the finish on your
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber vehicle.
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by brush. Generally, the longer any foreign material
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, stays on the finish, the worse the damage.
and spot remover. alcohol, gasoline, acid or alkaline solvents Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-
can discolor the genuine leather surface and ever the finish gets soiled.
should not be used.
 Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.

Washing CAUTION CAUTION

N00945900601  If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place  When using high-pressure water to wash a
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position vehicle equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key sys-
to deactivate the rain sensor before washing tem, keep the water from spraying on the
picked up from air, rain, snow or road sur-
the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper- open button on the trunk. This could cause
faces can damage the paint and body of your
ate in the presence of water spray on the the trunk to open and flood the inside of the
vehicle if left on. windshield and become damaged as a result. trunk.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way  Never spray or splash water on the electrical  Make sure to do the following when using an
to protect your vehicle from this damage. parts in the engine compartment. This may automatic car wash, with help from either
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. damage them. Be careful also when washing this manual or the car wash operator, to
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with the underbody. Do not spray water into the avoid damaging your vehicle:
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of engine compartment. • Fold the outside rear-view mirrors.
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,  Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat- • Remove the antenna.
wash the vehicle from top to bottom. ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the • If your vehicle is equipped with rear
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. paint surface and make it dull. spoiler, check with the car wash operator
9 Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- before using the car wash.
ored vehicles. • If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,
 Some hot water washing equipment uses the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” posi-
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. tion to deactivate the rain sensor.
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
This heated water may damage your vehi-
remain. cle’s resin parts. It can flood the interior of
the vehicle. Therefore, be sure of the follow- During cold weather
CAUTION ing:
 When washing the underside of your vehicle • Keep the washing nozzle at least 20 inches Salt and other chemicals spread on winter
or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro- (50 cm) away from the vehicle body. roads in some geographical areas can have a
tect your hands. • When washing around the door glass, hold detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
 This vehicle is equipped with a high perfor- the nozzle at a distance of more than 20 You should flush the underbody with a high
mance brakes. Wash the wheels frequently to inches (50 cm) and at right angles to the
pressure hose every time you wash the out-
remove brake dust. The dust will be difficult glass surface.
side of your vehicle.
to remove if left on the wheels for too long. Take special care to remove mud or other
debris which could trap and hold salt and
moisture.


After washing your vehicle, wipe off all cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush
waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
CAUTION the compound from the surface and apply a
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
doors to prevent the doors from freezing. coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
should not be used. These waxes remove rust
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
NOTE are harmful to the finish on the paint and the Damaged paint
 When the door is frozen, opening it by force plate, because they also remove clearcoat. N00946200018
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket They are also harmful to other glossy sur-
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc. Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat
installed around the door. Pour warm water
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe  Do not use gasoline, kerosene, benzine or should be touched up as soon as possible with
off the water after opening the door. To pre- paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the from the vehicle surface. Check body areas facing the road or the tires
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-  Do not put wax on the areas having black carefully for damage to the paint caused by
cant. matte coating because it can cause uneven flying stones, etc. The paint code number for
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away information code plate in the engine compart-
Waxing with a soft cloth and warm water. ment. 9
 If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be
N00946000221
careful not to apply any wax on the weather-
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or strip (black rubber) when waxing the area Cleaning plastic parts
when water does not bead up on the paint. around the sunroof opening. N00946300178
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has maintain a weatherproof seal with the sun-
If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. roof.
rough surface of the bumper, molding or
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. lights, the surface may appear white in color.
You should wax when the painted surfaces In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
are cool. Polishing and a soft cloth or chamois.
N00946100017
If painted surfaces have been severely dam- CAUTION

aged and lost their original luster and color
 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine scrubber as these may damage the plastic
polishing compound. Avoid limiting your surface.
polishing to the damaged surface only; polish
a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing

CAUTION CAUTION Cleaning the sunroof (if so

 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-  Do not use a brush or other hard implement equipped)
ishing powder) which may damage the plas- on the wheels.
N00946800072
tic surface. Doing so could scratch the wheels.
 Do not let the plastic parts get soiled with  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft
gasoline, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away
greases, paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (bat- so could cause the coating on the wheels to with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral deter-
tery electrolyte). These fluids, etc., may peel or become discolored or stained.
gent solution. Wipe away the solution with a
crack, stain or discolor the plastic parts.  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
sponge dipped in fresh water.
If any of these get on the plastic parts, wipe cleaner or by any other means.
them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a  Contact with seawater or road salt used for
mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such NOTE
them immediately with water. substances as soon as possible.  The surface treatment on the inside of the
glass may be removed if a hard cloth or
organic solvent is used.
9 Chrome parts N00946400010 Window glass
N00946600012
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and The window glass can usually be cleaned Engine compartment
N00947000042
apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead Never spray or splash water on the electrical
commercially available chrome polish. insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it components in the engine compartment, as
dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. this may cause damage.
Do not allow any nearby parts (such as plastic
Aluminum wheels parts) come into contact with sulphuric acid
N00946500109 Wiper blades (battery electrolyte), which may crack, stain,
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. N00946700084
or discolour them.
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove If this occurs, wipe the parts with a soft cloth
not be removed easily with water. grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper saturated with a mild detergent and water
Rinse off the detergent after washing the blades. solution.
wheel. Replace the wiper blades when they no longer Then immediately rinse the affected parts
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois clean the windshield properly. with plenty of water.
leather or a soft cloth.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047100100 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects.
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201485
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or Mit- ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
subishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition Caribbean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
You can also obtain other informa-
Transport Canada SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
tion about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov. 330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc. Key information to discuss with
P.O. Box 698 your insurance company
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. PAGO PAGO,
P.O. Box 6066 AMERICAN SAMOA AS,  Understand your repair estimate before
TAMUNING 96799 approving repairs.
GUAM 96931  Choosing the repair shop and the brands
of parts that they use on your vehicle is
your decision.
Important facts to know in  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
For vehicles sold in Saipan Many times, to save money, your insur-
case of an accident
ance company will recommend imitation
N01047300229
To contact Triple J Motors parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
call (670)234-7133 or write to: accident, but there is always that potential or workmanship.
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
Triple J Motors drive safely.
10 P.O. Box 500487 Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 In the event of an accident tection
 Remain calm. The strength and integrity built into your Mit-
For vehicles sold in American  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to subishi vehicle is the result of a specific
the police, and, if necessary, call for an design referred to as “Energy Management”.
Samoa ambulance. Individual body parts are designed to act as
 Record all the details of the accident. This one unit in the event of an accident. Shock
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. will provide you with accurate records of waves are absorbed by protective panels or
call 684(699)9140 or write to: the accident for discussions with your are channeled around the passenger compart-
insurance company and other persons ment. This important feature is possible
who may be acting on your behalf. because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubi-
shi Motors panels and structural parts, some-
thing that cannot be guaranteed by the
manufacturers of imitation parts. All Genuine
Mitsubishi Motors body panels and support
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Important facts to know in case of an accident

brackets are designed and constructed as you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
important protection features in the event of replacements parts are your guarantee that
an accident. By replacing body parts with your vehicle will have all the technological
imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet advantages and maintain the style and protec-
original equipment specifications. tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Motors parts.
Consumer rights (For vehicles
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg- 10
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4
Battery ............................................................................................11-5
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Refill capacities .............................................................................11-5
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 2 - Vehicle identification num- Chassis number

N01147400713 ber plate
Keep a record of the vehicle identification The chassis number is stamped as shown in
number. This information will assist the The vehicle identification number is stamped the illustration.
police if your vehicle is stolen. on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine compartment.
11 Engine serial number

1 - Vehicle emission control
information label The engine serial number is stamped on the
cylinder block as shown in the illustration.
The vehicle emission control information
label is affixed on the inside panel of the
engine hood.
4 - Vehicle information code

plate
The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger door sill.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
Type 1
Type 2 Vehicle dimensions

Tire and loading information N01147500352
placard Overall length 177.0 in (4,495 mm)

N01148100560
Overall width 71.3 in (1,810 mm)
The tire and loading information placard is
located on the driver’s door sill. Overall height 58.3 in (1,480 mm) 11
Wheel base 104.3 in (2,650 mm)
Certification label
N01148200213
The certification label (A) is located on the

driver’s door sill.
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
N01147600643
Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 4,542 lb (2,060 kg)

Front 2,381 lb (1,080 kg)
Gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
Rear 2,315 lb (1,050 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the number of maximum occupants
Engine specifications
N01147700468
11 Engine model 4B11

Engine displacement 121.9 CID (1,998 cm³)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 4 in-line
Bore 3.39 in (86.0 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.0 mm)
Compression ratio 9.0
Thermostat valve opening temperature 180 °F (82 °C)
Spark plugs NGK DILKR8B6
Spark plug gap .020 to .023 in (0.5 to 0.6 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
11-4 Specifications
Battery
Battery Tires and wheels NOTE

N01147800212 N01147900633  This tire satisfies vehicle loading conditions
described in this owner’s manual.
S65D26L Tire 245/40R18 93Y
Size 18 x 8 1/2JJ
Battery is a 12 volt type. Wheel PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
Offset 1.50 in (38 mm)
NOTE
 This is a Valve Regulated Lead Acid type
battery, which is a special type of sealed bat- PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation
tery. holes)
Refill capacities
N01148002114
Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel (approximate) 14.5 gal (55.0 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.
Oil pan 5.0 qt (4.8 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark 11
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L) (“starburst” symbol) on the container.
Engine oil
If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or
Oil cooler .53 qt (0.5 L) higher can be used.
Power steering As required Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Power Steering Fluid
8.0 qt (7.6 L) {Include .53 qt Refer to “Twin Clutch Sportronic shift transmission
Twin Clutch SST
(0.5 L) in oil cooler} (Twin Clutch SST) fluid” on page 9-9.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL
Manual transaxle 2.6 qt (2.5 L)
API classification GL-3, SAE 75W-80
Transfer oil .85 qt (0.8 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD gear oil
1.57 qt (1.0 L) {Includes hydrau-
AWC Control fluid MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine ATF SP III
lic piping}
Specifications 11-5
Refill capacities
Item Capacity Lubricants
For differential mech-
.58 qt (0.55 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine LSD gear oil
anism
AYC fluid
For torque transfer
.63 qt (0.6 L) MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine ATF SP III
mechanism
Brake/Clutch (if so equipped) As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
7.9 qt (7.5 L) {Includes .63 qt Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant
Engine coolant
(0.65 L) in reserve tank} Premium or equivalent*
Washer fluid 4.3 qt (4.0 L) —
Refer to the air conditioning label
Refrigerant (air conditioning) HFC-134a
on page 11-2.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid
technology
11 AYC: Active yaw control system
LSD: Limited slip differential
11-6 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Fluid ............................................. 11-5 Break-in period..................................... 5-3
A Bulb capacity...................................... 9-28
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6 B
ACD (Active center differential system) 5-71 Back-up lights C
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-76 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 California Perchlorate Materials
ASC OFF indicator ......................... 5-78 Replacement .................................. 9-37 Requirements ..................................... 3-7
ASC operation display .................... 5-78 Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive Capacities .......................................... 11-5
ASC warning display ...................... 5-78 shaft boots ....................................... 9-22
Card holder ............................ 5-160, 5-163
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 Battery .............................................. 9-11
Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Air conditioning Charging system warning light ....... 5-122
Automatic air conditioning ......... 7-4, 7-9 Disconection and connection ........... 9-12 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Important air conditioning operating tips.. During cold weather ....................... 9-11 Certification label ............................... 11-3
7-14 Specification.................................. 11-5 Charging system warning light ........... 5-122
Air purifier......................................... 7-15 Bluetooth 2.0 interface....................... 5-136 Chassis number................................... 11-2
All-wheel drive system........................ 5-70 Bottle holder ..................................... 5-165 Child restraints ................................... 4-13
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-44 Brake Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-36
Antenna Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-74
Braking ........................................... 6-5 Cleaning
Roof antenna .................................. 7-15
Fluid ..................................... 9-10, 11-5 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-40 12
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-74 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-41
Hose ............................................. 9-22
Warning light / display .................... 5-75 Clutch
Parking brake................................. 5-46
Arm rest............................................... 4-5 Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-19 Clutch pedal operation..................... 5-56
ASC .................................................. 5-76 Pedal............................................. 5-79 Fluid..................................... 9-10, 11-5
Pedal free play ............................... 9-19 Pedal free play................................ 9-19
Assist grip ........................................ 5-166
Power brakes ................................. 5-79 Coat hooks ....................................... 5-166
AWC Control fluid Service brake ................................. 5-79
Fluid.............................................. 11-5 Combination headlights and dimmer switch
Brake assist........................................ 5-80 Headlight reminder buzzer............. 5-127
AWC control fluid ................................ 9-9
Braking Light auto-cutout function ............. 5-126
AYC (Active yaw control system) ........ 5-71 Warning lights .............................. 5-121 Consumer information......................... 10-2
AYC fluid
12-1
Alphabetical index
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5 Twin Clutch SST ............................ 11-5
Cruise control..................................... 5-80 E Twin Clutch SST fluid ............. 9-9, 11-5
Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-135 Washer fluid ......................... 9-10, 11-5
Cup holder ....................................... 5-165
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-5
system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-26 Fog lights
D Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-20
Daytime running lights
Engine Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
Compartment................................... 9-5 (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-11
Replacement .................................. 9-32
Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5 Front console boxes .......................... 5-164
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-135
Hood............................................... 9-3 Front console tray ............................. 5-164
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5
windows) .................................. 7-8, 7-13 Front fog lights
Overheating..................................... 8-4
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
Dimensions ........................................ 11-3 Serial number ................................. 11-2
Indicators..................................... 5-120
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-127 Specifications ................................. 11-4
Replacement .................................. 9-35
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-22 Engine coolant temperature display....... 5-97 Switch ......................................... 5-130
Dome light (Rear) Engine malfunction indicator.............. 5-121 Front seats............................................ 4-3
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Exhaust system ................................... 9-22 Front side-marker and parking light
Replacement .................................. 9-39 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
12 Switch ......................................... 5-162 F Replacement ......................... 9-33, 9-34
Dome light/Reading lights Front turn signal lights
Filling the fuel tank .............................. 3-4
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
Replacement .................................. 9-38 Floor console box.............................. 5-164
Replacement .................................. 9-34
Switch ......................................... 5-161 Floor mat............................................. 6-2
Fuel
Doors Fluid Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Lock.............................................. 5-33 AWC control fluid ................... 9-9, 11-5 Fuel hoses...................................... 9-21
Power door locks ............................ 5-35 AYC fluid ...................................... 11-5 Modification/alterations to the electrical or
Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4 Brake fluid ............................ 9-10, 11-5 fuel systems ................................... 3-6
Clutch fluid ........................... 9-10, 11-5 Tank capacity.......................... 3-4, 11-5
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2
Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-5
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-13
Power steering fluid ............... 9-11, 11-5
12-2
Alphabetical index
Fuel selection ....................................... 3-2
Fuses ................................................. 9-23 I L
Fusible links....................................... 9-23 If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2 Labeling............................................. 11-2
Ignition switch ........................... 5-15, 5-50 License plate light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
G Important facts to know in case of an accident
Replacement................................... 9-37
10-4
General maintenance ........................... 9-21
Indicators ......................................... 5-120 Light auto-cutout function ................. 5-126
General vehicle data............................ 11-3
Information screen display Limited-slip differential....................... 5-78
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6
Brake warning display ................... 5-122 Link System ..................................... 5-136
Glove compartment........................... 5-163 Charging system warning display.... 5-123 Loading information.............................. 6-6
Oil pressure warning display .......... 5-123
Lubricants .......................................... 11-5
H Inside day/night rearview mirror .......... 5-48
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-130 Inside emergency trunk lid release ....... 5-38
M
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-120 Instrument cluster............................... 5-89
Manual transaxle................................. 5-56
Headlight reminder buzzer................. 5-127 Interior lights .................................... 5-161 Oil.......................................... 9-9, 11-5
Headlights Shift points (recommended speed).... 5-57
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 J Mirror
Dimmer ....................................... 5-127
Jack .................................................... 8-5 Inside day/night rearview mirror ...... 5-48 12
Headlight flasher .......................... 5-128 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-49
Storage............................................ 8-5
Headlight leveling switch .............. 5-129
Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2 Modification of your vehicle .................. 3-5
Replacement ................. 9-30, 9-31, 9-32
Switch ......................................... 5-124 Multi-information display .................... 5-90
High beam indicator.......................... 5-120 K Multi-information meter
Switch ........................................... 5-92
Hood lock release mechanism and safety Key reminder buzzer........................... 5-35
catch................................................ 9-22 Keyless entry system .................... 5-7, 5-28
Horn O
Keys ................................................... 5-3
Switch ......................................... 5-136 Octane requirement ............................... 3-2
Horn switch...................................... 5-136 Oil
12-3
Alphabetical index
Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5 Safety mechanism ........................... 5-43
Manual transaxle oil ................ 9-9, 11-5 Sub switch...................................... 5-43 S
Rear axle oil..................................... 9-9 Timer function ................................ 5-43 Safe driving techniques ......................... 6-4
Rear differential oil......................... 11-5 Puncture (Tire changing)....................... 8-6 S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) ...... 5-71
Transfer oil ............................. 9-9, 11-5
ACD (Active center differential system) ...
Operation under adverse driving conditions...
8-11
R 5-71
AYC (Active yaw control system).... 5-71
Radio
Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-49 Seat ..................................................... 4-2
General information about your radio 7-15
Overheating ......................................... 8-4 Arm rest .......................................... 4-5
Rain sensor....................................... 5-132
Front seats ....................................... 4-3
Reading light Head restraints ................................. 4-6
P Bulb capacity.................................. 9-30 Heated seats ..................................... 4-5
Parking ................................................ 6-5 Replacement................................... 9-38 Rear seats ........................................ 4-5
Parking brake ................................. 5-46 Rear axle oil ........................................ 9-9 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2
Parking brake break-in .................... 9-20
Rear side-marker lights Seat belt............................................... 4-8
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-19
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-28 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-11
Parking and side-marker lights Replacement................................... 9-36 Child restraints ............................... 4-13
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 Driver's seat belt reminder/warning .. 4-10
Rear turn signal lights
Replacement ......................... 9-33, 9-34 Force limiter .................................. 4-13
12 Polishing............................................ 9-43
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-28
Front passenger seat belt warning light .....
Replacement................................... 9-36
Power brakes...................................... 5-79 4-11
Rearview mirror Maintenance and inspection............. 4-20
Power door locks ................................ 5-35 Inside............................................. 5-48 Pre-tensioner .................................. 4-12
power door lock switch ................... 5-36 Outside .......................................... 5-49 Seat belt extender ........................... 4-12
Power outlet ..................................... 5-160 Refrigerant (air conditioning) ............... 11-5 Seat belt instructions ......................... 4-9
Power steering Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-28 Seat belt use during pregnancy......... 4-12
Fluid .................................... 9-11, 11-5 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-17 Service brake...................................... 5-79
System .......................................... 5-80 Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2
Power windows .................................. 5-42 Snow tires .......................................... 9-19
Rheostat ............................................. 5-89
Lock switch ................................... 5-43
Main switch ................................... 5-42 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-21
12-4
Alphabetical index
Speedometer....................................... 5-89 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 Trunk area light
SST (Sportronic Shift Transmission) .... 5-58 Replacement .................................. 9-36 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Tail lights Replacement................................... 9-40
Steering
Power steering fluid ............... 9-11, 11-5 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 Trunk lid ............................................ 5-37
Tilt lock lever ................................. 5-47 Replacement .................................. 9-37 Turbocharger operation ....................... 5-55
Wheel lock............................ 5-19, 5-52 Tank capacity............................... 3-4, 11-5 Turn signal light
Storage spaces .................................. 5-163 Theft-alarm system Indicators ..................................... 5-120
Sun visors ........................................ 5-160 System .......................................... 5-39 Lever ........................................... 5-129
Sunroof.............................................. 5-44 Tire pressure monitoring system .......... 5-85 Turn signal lights
Safety mechanism........................... 5-45 Warning light/display ..................... 5-86 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
Sunshade ....................................... 5-46 Tires ................................................. 9-12 Twin Clutch SST
Timer function................................ 5-45 How to change a tire......................... 8-6 Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-5
Super-all wheel control (S-AWC) Inflation pressure............................ 9-16 Gearshift lever operation ................. 5-58
S-AWC control mode display .......... 5-72 Maintenance .................................. 9-17 Gearshift lever position display ........ 5-59
S-AWC control mode switch ........... 5-72 Quality grading .............................. 10-2 Manual shift ................................... 5-64
S-AWC operation display ................ 5-73 Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-17 Manual shift display........................ 5-67
S-AWC warning display.................. 5-73 Rotation ........................................ 9-18 Twin Clutch SST control mode display....
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5 5-64
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-20
Curtain airbag system...................... 4-31
Snow tires ..................................... 9-19
Tire and loading information placard. 6-7,
Twin Clutch SST control mode switch.....
5-63
12
Driver's knee airbag system ............. 4-27
11-3 Warning display ............................. 5-60
How the Supplement Restraint System
Tire chains..................................... 9-19 Twin Clutch SST (Sportronic Shift
works .......................................... 4-23
Tread wear indicators ..................... 9-17 Transmission)................................... 5-58
Servicing ....................................... 4-35
Side airbag system .......................... 4-31 Tissue holder .................................... 5-165
Warning light/display...................... 4-26 Tools................................................... 8-5 U
Storage............................................ 8-5
USB input terminal ........................... 5-157
T Towing.............................................. 8-10 How to connect an iPod................. 5-158
Tachometer ........................................ 5-89 Trailer towing .................................... 6-10 USB input terminal device
Tail and stop lights Transfer oil .......................................... 9-9 How to connect a USB memory ..... 5-157
Oil ................................................ 11-5
12-5
Alphabetical index
V
Vanity mirror ................................... 5-160
Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-40
Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-3
Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-3
Vehicle weights .................................. 11-4
Vents................................................... 7-2
W
Warning lights.................................. 5-121
Washer
Fluid .................................... 9-10, 11-5
Switch ......................................... 5-134
Waxing.............................................. 9-43
12 Weights ............................................. 11-4
Wheel
Specification .................................. 11-5
Wiper
Rain sensor .................................. 5-132
Windshield .................................. 5-131
Wiper blades .................................. 9-20
12-6
How to calculate your gasoline mileage

N09348201032
NOTE
Name of Owner Date of Purchase
Address of Owner Model of Vehicle
Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number
Maintenance record
Kilometers
Service Performed Date Inspection and Maintenance Item
Miles

Mitsubishi Lancer Evolution Owner's Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Mitsubishi Lancer Evolution Owner's Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

BK0210800US.

book 1 ページ ２０１４年４月８日 火曜日 午前１１時２８分

Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

©2014 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan

Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

1 Instruments and controls (Driver’s area)

Instrument cluster P.5-89 Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter

Engine hood release lever P.9-3 Supplemental restraint system - air-

Steering wheel tilt lock lever P.5-47

Supplemental restraint system - driver’s knee airbag

Instruments and controls (Instrument panel)

Instruments and controls (Instrument panel) 1

Gearshift lever P.5-56, 5-58

Fuel tank filler door

Parking brake lever

Floor console box P.5-164 Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)

Passenger’s airbag off

Front console box 12 V power outlet

Electric remote-controlled out-

Power door lock switch

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor Inside rearview mirror P.5-48

Sun visors P.5-160

Bottle holder P.5-165

Front seats P.4-3

Supplemental restraint system - side airbag

Coat hook P.5-166 Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)

Rear seats P.4-5

AWC control fluid reservoir P.9-9

Inside emergency trunk lid release lever P.5-38

Windshield washer fluid reservoir

Spare tire P.8-6 Jack P.8-5 Tools P.8-5

Locking and unlocking P.5-33

Fuel tank filler

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-49

Headlights, high beam P.5-124, 9-28, 9-31

Trunk lid OPEN switch (if so

Rear side-marker lights

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning light Do this Ref. page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

2-2 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. page

Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”. P.5-51,

Will not turn from “ACC” to “LOCK”. P.5-11

Quick index 2-3

If this problem occurs...

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position.

The engine does not start.

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

The vehicle is stuck in sand,

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. page

2 The brakes are not functioning

2-6 Quick index

book 1 ページ２０１４年４月８日　火曜日　午前１１時２８分